You are on page 1of 276

PCS-921

Breaker Failure Protection


Instruction Manual

NR Electric Co., Ltd.

Preface

Preface
Introduction
This guide and the relevant operating or service manual documentation for the equipment provide
full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment.
Documentation for equipment ordered from NR is dispatched separately from manufactured goods
and may not be received at the same time. Therefore, this guide is provided to ensure that printed
information normally present on equipment is fully understood by the recipient.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of
this manual, and read relevant chapter carefully.
This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the equipment. Before
installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read and understood.

Health and Safety


The information in this chapter of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure that
equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition.
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts of
the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger
personnel and equipment and cause personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated.
Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling,
proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and
servicing. For this reason, only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment.
Qualified personnel are individuals who:

Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and of the
system to which it is being connected;

Are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety
engineering practices and are authorized to energize and de-energize equipment and to
isolate, ground, and label it;

Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering
practices;

Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).

Instructions and Warnings


PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

i
Date: 2013-02-21

Preface

The following indicators and standard definitions are used:


DANGER!
It means that death, severe personal injury, or considerable equipment damage will occur if safety
precautions are disregarded.
WARNING!
It means that death, severe personal, or considerable equipment damage could occur if safety
precautions are disregarded.
CAUTION!
It means that light personal injury or equipment damage may occur if safety precautions are
disregarded. This particularly applies to damage to the device and to resulting damage of the
protected equipment.
WARNING!
The firmware may be upgraded to add new features or enhance/modify existing features, please
make sure that the version of this manual is compatible with the product in your hand.
WARNING!
During operation of electrical equipment, certain parts of these devices are under high voltage.
Severe personal injury or significant equipment damage could result from improper behavior.
Only qualified personnel should work on this equipment or in the vicinity of this equipment. These
personnel must be familiar with all warnings and service procedures described in this manual, as
well as safety regulations.
In particular, the general facility and safety regulations for work with high-voltage equipment must
be observed. Noncompliance may result in death, injury, or significant equipment damage.
DANGER!
Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be
opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will produce a dangerously high
voltage.
WARNING!

Exposed terminals

Do not touch the exposed terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high voltage
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

ii
Date: 2013-02-21

Preface

generated is dangerous

Residual voltage

Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power supply. It
takes a few seconds for the voltage to discharge.
CAUTION!

Earth

The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed

Operating environment

The equipment must only be used within the range of ambient environment detailed in the
specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.

Ratings

Before applying AC voltage and current or the DC power supply to the equipment, check that they
conform to the equipment ratings.

Printed circuit board

Do not attach and remove printed circuit boards when DC power to the equipment is on, as this
may cause the equipment to malfunction.

External circuit

When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully check the
supply voltage used in order to prevent the connected circuit from overheating.

Connection cable

Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.

Copyright
Version: R1.02

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD.


69 Suyuan Avenue. Jiangning, Nanjing 211102, China

P/N: EN_FZBH5101.0084.0003

Tel: +86-25-87178185,

Fax: +86-25-87178208

Website: www.nrelect.com, www.nari-relays.com


Copyright NR 2013. All rights reserved

Email: nr_techsupport@nari-relays.com

We reserve all rights to this document and to the information contained herein. Improper use in particular reproduction and dissemination
to third parties is strictly forbidden except where expressly authorized.
The information in this manual is carefully checked periodically, and necessary corrections will be included in future editions. If
nevertheless any errors are detected, suggestions for correction or improvement are greatly appreciated.
We reserve the rights to make technical improvements without notice.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

iii
Date: 2013-02-21

Preface

Documentation Structure
The manual provides a functional and technical description of this relay and a comprehensive set
of instructions for the relays use and application.
All contents provided by this manual are summarized as below:

1 Introduction
Briefly introduce the application, functions and features about this relay.

2 Technical Data
Introduce the technical data about this relay, such as electrical specifications, mechanical
specifications, ambient temperature and humidity range, communication port parameters, type
tests, setting ranges and accuracy limits and the certifications that our products have passed.

3 Operation Theory
Introduce a comprehensive and detailed functional description of all protective elements.

4 Supervision
Introduce the automatic self-supervision function of this relay.

5 Management
Introduce the management function (measurment, recording and remote control) of this relay.

6 Hardware
Introduce the main function carried out by each plug-in module of this relay and providing the
definition of pins of each plug-in module.

7 Settings
List settings including system settings, communication settings, label settings, logic links and etc.,
and some notes about the setting application.

8 Human Machine Interface


Introduce the hardware of the human machine interface (HMI) module and a detailed guide for the
user how to use this relay through HMI. It also lists all the information which can be view through
HMI, such as settings, measurements, all kinds of reports etc.

9 Configurable Function
Introduce configurable function of the device and all configurable signals are listed.

10 Communication
Introduce the communication port and protocol which this relay can support, IEC60970-5-103,
IEC61850 and DNP3.0 protocols are introduced in details.

11 Installation
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

iv
Date: 2013-02-21

Preface

Introduce the recommendations on unpacking, handling, inspection and storage of this relay. A
guide to the mechanical and electrical installation of this relay is also provided, incorporating
earthing recommendations. A typical wiring connection to this relay is indicated.

12 Commissioning
Introduce how to commission this relay, comprising checks on the calibration and functionality of
this relay.

13 Maintenance
A general maintenance policy for this relay is outlined.

14 Decommissioning and Disposal


A general decommissioning and disposal policy for this relay is outlined.

15 Manual Version History


List the instruction manual version and the modification history records.

Typographic and Graphical Conventions


Deviations may be permitted in drawings and tables when the type of designator can be obviously
derived from the illustration.
The following symbols are used in drawings:

&
AND gate

OR gate

Comparator

BI

EBI

VEBI

Binary signal via opto-coupler

Enabling binary input, an input via opto-coupler for function enabling

Virtual enabling binary signal, a signal for enabling function via

communication media by software tool

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

v
Date: 2013-02-21

Preface
SET

Input signal from comparator with setting

I>

EN

Input signal of logic setting for function enabling

SIG

Input of binary signal except those signals via opto-coupler

OTH

Input of other signal

Output signal

XXX

Timer
t
t

Timer (optional definite-time or inverse-time characteristic)

10ms

0ms

Timer [delay pickup (10ms), delay drop off (0ms), non-settable]

[XXX]

0ms

Timer (delay pickup, settable)

0ms

[XXX]

Timer (delay drop off, settable)

[XXX]

[XXX]

Timer (delay pickup, delay drop off, settable)

IDMT

Timer (inverse-time characteristic)

---xxx is the symbol

Symbol Corresponding Relationship


Basic

Example

A, B, C

L1, L2, L3

Ia, Ib, Ic, I0

IL1, IL2, IL3, IN

AN, BN, CN

L1N, L2N, L3N

Ua, Ub, Uc

VL1, VL2, VL3

ABC

L123

Uab, Ubc, Uca

VL12, VL23, VL31

U (voltage)

U0, U1, U2

VN, V1, V2

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

vi
Date: 2013-02-21

1 Introduction

1 Introduction
Table of Contents
1.1 Application....................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Function ........................................................................................................... 1-1
1.3 Features ........................................................................................................... 1-3

List of Figures
Figure 1.1-1 Function diagram of PCS-921............................................................................... 1-1

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

1-a
Date: 2011-07-26

1 Introduction

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

1-b
Date: 2011-07-26

1 Introduction

1.1 Application
The PCS-921 is a digital breaker protection device and can be applied for all kinds of busbar
arrangement. By default, breaker failure protection, overcurrent protection, dead zone protection,
pole discrepancy protection and automatic reclosing function is taken as the standard function of
PCS-921.
PCS-921 supports configurable binary inputs, binary outputs, LEDs and IEC 61850 protocol.
Bus 1
PCS-921

52

Line 1

50BF

50DZ

62PD

50/51G

25

79

50/51P

52
Line 2

52

Bus 2
Figure 1.1-1 Function diagram of PCS-921
No.

Function

ANSI

1.

Breaker failure protection

50BF

2.

Pole discrepancy protection

62PD

3.

Two stages earth-fault protection

50/51G

4.

Two stages overcurrent protection

50/51P

5.

Dead zone protection

50DZ

6.

Synchro-checking

25

7.

Auto- reclosing

79

1.2 Function
1.

Protection Function

Breaker failure protection (50BF)

Pole discrepancy protection (62PD)

Dead zone protection (50DZ)

Two stages overcurrent protection (50/51P)

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

1-1
Date: 2011-07-26

1 Introduction

Two stages earth-fault protection (50/51G)

2.

Logic

User programmable logic

3.

Additional function

VT circuit supervision (VTS)

CT circuit supervision (CTS)

Self diagnostic

DC power supply supervision

Voltage and current drift auto regulation

Auto-reclosing (79)

Synchro-checking (25)

Event recorder including 1024 disturbance records, 1024 binary events, 1024 supervision
events and 1024 device logs.

Disturbance recorder including 64 disturbance records with waveforms (The file format of
disturbance recorder is compatible with international COMTRADE file.)

Clock synchronization
PPS (RS-485)
IRIG-B (RS-485)
PPM (DIN)
SNTP (PTP)
IEEE1588
SNTP (BC)
PPS (DIN)

4.

Monitoring

Number of circuit breaker operation (single-phase tripping, three-phase tripping and


reclosing)

Frequency

5.

Communication

2 RS-485 communication rear ports conform to IEC 60870-5-103 protocol or DNP3.0 protocol

1 RS-485 communication rear port for clock synchronization

Up to 4 Ethernet ports (depend on the chosen type of MON plug-in module) conform to IEC
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

1-2
Date: 2011-07-26

1 Introduction

61850 protocol, DNP3.0 protocol or IEC 60870-5-103 protocol over TCP/IP

Up to 2 Ethernet ports via optic fiber (ST interface or SC interface, depend on the chosen type
of MON plug-in module) conform to IEC 61850 protocol, DNP3.0 protocol or IEC 60870-5-103
protocol over TCP/IP

GOOSE communication function (optional NET-DSP plug-in module)

6.

User Interface

Friendly HMI interface with LCD and 9-button keypad on the front panel.

1 front multiplex RJ45 port for testing and setting

1 RS-232 rear port for printer

Language switchover English + selected language

Auxiliary software PCS-Explorer

1.3 Features

The intelligent device integrated with protection, control and monitor provides powerful
protection function, flexible protection configuration, user programmable logic and
configurable binary input and binary output, which can meet with various application
requirements.

High-performance hardware platform and modularized design, MCU (management control


unit)+DSP (digital signal processor). MCU manages general fault detector element and DSP
manages protection and metering. Their data acquisition system is completely independent in
electronic circuit. DC power supply of output relay is controlled by the operation of fault
detector element operates, this prevents maloperation due to error from ADC or damage of
any apparatus.

Flexible automatic reclosure supports various initiation modes and check modes.

Multiple setting groups with password protection and setting value saved permanently before
modification.

Powerful PC tool software can fulfill protection function configuration, modify setting and
waveform analysis.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

1-3
Date: 2011-07-26

1 Introduction

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

1-4
Date: 2011-07-26

2 Technical Data

2 Technical Data
Table of Contents
2.1 Electrical Specifications ................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.1 AC Current Input .................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.2 AC Voltage Input .................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.3 Power Supply....................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.4 Binary Input .......................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.5 Binary Output ....................................................................................................................... 2-2

2.2 Mechanical Specifications ............................................................................. 2-3


2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Range .................................................. 2-3
2.4 Communication Port ....................................................................................... 2-3
2.4.1 EIA-485 Port ........................................................................................................................ 2-3
2.4.2 Ethernet Port........................................................................................................................ 2-3
2.4.3 Optical Fibre Port ................................................................................................................. 2-4
2.4.4 Print Port .............................................................................................................................. 2-4
2.4.5 Clock Synchronization Port ................................................................................................. 2-4

2.5 Type Tests ........................................................................................................ 2-5


2.5.1 Environmental Tests ............................................................................................................ 2-5
2.5.2 Mechanical Tests ................................................................................................................. 2-5
2.5.3 Electrical Tests ..................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility ............................................................................................. 2-5

2.6 Certifications ................................................................................................... 2-6


2.7 Protective Functions....................................................................................... 2-6
2.7.1 Fault Detector ...................................................................................................................... 2-6
2.7.2 Phase Overcurrent Protection ............................................................................................. 2-7
2.7.3 Earth Fault Protection .......................................................................................................... 2-7
2.7.4 Dead Zone Protection.......................................................................................................... 2-7

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

2-a
Date: 2013-02-21

2 Technical Data

2.7.5 Breaker Failure Protection ................................................................................................... 2-7


2.7.6 Pole Discrepancy Protection ............................................................................................... 2-7
2.7.7 Auto-reclosing ...................................................................................................................... 2-7

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

2-b
Date: 2013-02-21

2 Technical Data

2.1 Electrical Specifications


2.1.1 AC Current Input
Phase rotation

ABC

Nominal frequency (fn)

505Hz, 605Hz

Rated current (In)

1A

Linear to

0.05In~40In (It should measure current without beyond full scale

5A

against 20 times of related current and value of DC offset by 100%.)


Thermal withstand
-continuously

4In

-for 10s

30In

-for 1s

100In

-for half a cycle

250In

Burden

< 0.15VA/phase @In

Number

Up to 6 current input according to various applications

< 0.25VA/phase @In

2.1.2 AC Voltage Input


Phase rotation

ABC

Nominal frequency (fn)

505Hz, 605Hz

Rated voltage (Un)

100V~130V

Linear to

1V~170V

Thermal withstand
-continuously

200V

-10s

260V

-1s

300V

Burden at rated

< 0.20VA/phase @Un

Number

Up to 6 voltage input according to various applications

2.1.3 Power Supply


Standard

IEC 60255-11:2008

Rated voltage

110Vdc/125Vdc, 220Vdc/250Vdc

Permissible voltage range

88~300Vdc

Permissible AC ripple voltage

15% of the nominal auxiliary voltage

Burden
Quiescent condition

<30W

Operating condition

<35W

2.1.4 Binary Input


Rated voltage

24V

48V

Rated current drain

1.2mA

2.4mA

Pickup voltage

13~17V

26~34V

Dropoff voltage

50% of pickup voltage

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

2-1
Date: 2013-02-21

2 Technical Data
Maximum permissible voltage

100Vdc

Withstand voltage

2000Vac, 2800Vdc (continuously )

Response time for logic input

1ms

Number

Up to 36 binary input according to various hardware configurations

Rated voltage

110V

125V

220V

250V

Rated current drain

1.1mA

1.25mA

2.2mA

2.5mA

Pickup voltage

60.5~77V

70~87.5V

121~154V

Dropoff voltage

50% of pickup voltage

Maximum permissible voltage

300Vdc

Withstand voltage

2000Vac, 2800Vdc (continuously )

Response time for logic input

1ms

Number

Up to 36 binary input according to various hardware configurations

2.1.5 Binary Output


1.

Tripping/signaling contact

Output mode
Continuous carry

Potential free contact


5A@380Vac
5A@250Vdc

Pickup time

<8ms (typical 5ms)

Dropoff time

<5ms
0.65A@48Vdc

Breaking capacity (L/R=40ms)

0.30A@110Vdc
0.15A@220Vdc

Burden
Maximal system voltage
Test voltage across open contact

300mW
380Vac
250Vdc
1000V RMS for 1min
6A@3s

Short duration current

15A@0.5s
30A@0.2s

Number

2.

Up to 55 binary output according to various hardware configurations

Fast signaling contact

Output mode
Continuous carry

Potential free contact


5A@380Vac
5A@250Vdc

Pickup time

<1ms

Dropoff time

<5ms
1.0A@48Vdc

Breaking capacity (L/R=0ms)

0.9A@110Vdc
0.4A@220Vdc

Maximal system voltage

380Vac
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

2-2
Date: 2013-02-21

2 Technical Data
250Vdc
Test voltage across open contact

1000V RMS for 1min

2.2 Mechanical Specifications


Enclosure dimensions (WHD)

482.6mm177.0mm291.0mm

Mounting Way

Flush mounted

Trepanning dimensions (WH)

450.0mm179.0mm, M6 screw

Chassis color

Silver grey

Weight per device

Approx. 15kg

Chassis material

Aluminum alloy

Location of terminal

Rear panel of the device

Device structure

Plug-in modular type @ rear side, integrated frontplate

Protection class
Standard

IEC 60255-1:2009

Front side

IP40, up to IP51 (With cover)

Other sides

IP30

Rear side, connection terminals

IP20

2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Range


Standard

IEC 60255-1:2009

Operating temperature

-40C to +70C (Readability of disaply may be impaired below -20C)

Transport and storage temperature


range

-40C to +70C

Permissible humidity

5%-95%, without condensation

Pollution degree

Altitude

<3000m

2.4 Communication Port


2.4.1 EIA-485 Port
Baud rate

4.8kbit/s, 9.6kbit/s, 19.2kbit/s, 38.4kbit/s, 57.6kbit/s, 115.2kbit/s

Protocol

IEC 60870-5-103:1997

Maximal capacity

32

Transmission distance

<500m

Safety level

Isolation to ELV level

Twisted pair

Screened twisted pair cable

2.4.2 Ethernet Port


Connector type

RJ-45

Transmission rate

100Mbits/s

Transmission standard

100Base-TX

Transmission distance

<100m

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

2-3
Date: 2013-02-21

2 Technical Data
Protocol

IEC 60870-5-103:1997, DNP 3.0 or IEC 61850

Safety level

Isolation to ELV level

2.4.3 Optical Fibre Port


2.4.3.1 For Station Level
Characteristic

Glass optical fiber

Connector type

ST, SC

Fibre type

Multi mode

Transmission distance

<2km

Wave length

1310nm

Transmission power

Min. -20.0dBm

Minimum receiving power

Min. -30.0dBm

Margin

Min +3.0dB

2.4.3.2 For Process Level


Characteristic

Glass optical fiber

Connector type

LC

Fibre type

Multi mode

Transmission distance

<2km

Wave length

1310nm

Transmission power

Min. -20.0dBm

Minimum receiving power

Min. -30.0dBm

Margin

Min +3.0dB

2.4.3.3 For Synchronization Port


Characteristic

Glass optical fiber

Connector type

ST

Fibre type

Multi mode

Wave length

820nm

Minimum receiving power

Min. -25.0dBm

Margin

Min +3.0dB

2.4.4 Print Port


Type

RS-232

Baud Rate

4.8kbit/s, 9.6kbit/s, 19.2kbit/s, 38.4kbit/s, 57.6kbit/s, 115.2kbit/s

Printer type

EPSON 300K printer

Safety level

Isolation to ELV level

2.4.5 Clock Synchronization Port


Type

RS-485

Transmission distance

<500m

Maximal capacity

32

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

2-4
Date: 2013-02-21

2 Technical Data
Timing standard

PPS, IRIG-B

Safety level

Isolation to ELV level

2.5 Type Tests


2.5.1 Environmental Tests
Dry cold test

IEC60068-2-1:2007

Dry heat test

IEC60068-2-2:2007

Damp heat test, cyclic

IEC60068-2-30:2005

2.5.2 Mechanical Tests


Vibration

IEC 60255-21-1:1988 Class I

Shock and bump

IEC 60255-21-2:1988 Class I

2.5.3 Electrical Tests


Standard

IEC 60255-27:2005

Dielectric tests

Test voltage 2kV, 50Hz, 1min

Standard

IEC 60255-5:2000

Impulse voltage tests


Overvoltage category

Test voltage 5kV

Insulation

resistance

measurements

Isolation resistance >100M@500VDC

2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility


IEC 60255-22-1:2007
1MHz burst disturbance test

Common mode: class III 2.5kV


Differential mode: class III 1.0kV
IEC60255-22-2:2008 class IV

Electrostatic discharge test

For contact discharge: 8kV


For air discharge: 15kV
IEC 60255-22-3:2007 class III
Frequency sweep
Radiated amplitude-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=80~1000MHz

Radio frequency interference tests

Spot frequency
Radiated amplitude-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=80MHz/160MHz/450MHz/900MHz
Radiated pulse-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=900MHz
IEC 60255-22-4:2008

Fast transient disturbance tests

Power supply, I/O, Earth: class IV, 4kV, 2.5kHz, 5/50ns


Communication terminals: class IV, 2kV, 5kHz, 5/50ns

Surge immunity test

IEC 60255-22-5:2008

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

2-5
Date: 2013-02-21

2 Technical Data
Power supply, AC input, I/O port: class IV, 1.2/50us
Common mode: 4kV
Differential mode: 2kV
Conducted

RF

Electromagnetic

Disturbance

IEC 60255-22-6:2001
Power supply, AC, I/O, Comm. Terminal: Class III, 10Vrms, 150
kHz~80MHz

Power Frequency Magnetic Field

IEC 61000-4-8:2001

Immunity

class V, 100A/m for 1min, 1000A/m for 3s

Pulse Magnetic Field Immunity

IEC 61000-4-9:2001
class V, 6.4/16s, 1000A/m for 3s

Damped oscillatory magnetic field

IEC 61000-4-10:2001

immunity

class V, 100kHz & 1MHz100A/m

Auxiliary power supply performance

IEC60255-11: 2008

- Voltage dips

Up to 500ms for dips to 40% of rated voltage without reset

-Voltage short interruptions

100ms for interruption without rebooting

2.6 Certifications

ISO9001:2008

ISO14001:2004

OHSAS18001:2007

ISO10012:2003

CMMI L4

EMC: 2004/108/EC, EN50263:1999

Products safety(PS): 2006/95/EC, EN61010-1:2001

2.7 Protective Functions


2.7.1 Fault Detector
2.7.1.1 DPFC Current Element
Setting range

0.050In~30.000In (A)

Accuracy

2.5% of setting or 0.02In whichever is greater

2.7.1.2 Residual Current Element


Setting range

0.050In~30.000In (A)

Accuracy

2.5% of setting or 0.02In whichever is greater

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

2-6
Date: 2013-02-21

2 Technical Data

2.7.2 Phase Overcurrent Protection


Setting range

0.050In~30.000In (A)

Accuracy

2.5% of setting or 0.02In whichever is greater

Time delay

0.000~20.000s

Accuracy

1% of Setting+30ms (at 2 times current setting)

2.7.3 Earth Fault Protection


Setting range

0.050In~30.000In (A)

Accuracy

2.5% of setting or 0.02In whichever is greater

Time delay

0.000~20.000 (s)

Accuracy

1% of Setting+30ms (at 2 times current setting)

2.7.4 Dead Zone Protection


Setting range

0.050In~30.000In

Accuracy

2.5% or 0.02In whichever is greater

Time delay

0.000~10.000s

Accuracy

1% of Setting +30ms

2.7.5 Breaker Failure Protection


Pick-up time

<20ms

Drop-off time

<20ms

Setting range of phase current

0.050In~30.000In

Setting range of residual current

0.050In~30.000In

Setting range of negative-sequence current

0.050In~30.000In

Accuracy

2.5% of setting or 0.02In whichever is greater

Time delay (first)

0.000~10.000s

Time delay (second)

0.000~10.000s

2.7.6 Pole Discrepancy Protection


Setting range (residual current)

0.050In~30.000In (A)

Setting range (negative-sequence current)

0.050In~30.000In (A)

Accuracy

2.5% of setting 0.02In whichever is greater

Resetting ratio

95%

Time delay

0.000~600.000 (s)

Accuracy

1% of Setting+30ms (at 2 times current setting)

2.7.7 Auto-reclosing
Phase difference setting range

0~89 (Deg)

Accuracy

2.0Deg

Voltage difference setting range


Accuracy

0.02Un~0.8Un (V)
(Un:Secondary rated phase-to-ground voltage)
Max(0.01Un, 2.5%)

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

2-7
Date: 2013-02-21

2 Technical Data
Frequency difference setting range

0.02~1 (Hz)

Accuracy

0.01Hz

Operating time of synchronism check

1%Setting+20ms

Operating time of energizing check

1%Setting+20ms

Operating time of auto-reclosing

1%Setting+20ms

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

2-8
Date: 2013-02-21

3 Operation Theory

3 Operation Theory
Table of Contents
3.1 System Parameters ......................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 General Application ............................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.2 Function Description ............................................................................................................ 3-1
3.1.3 Settings ................................................................................................................................ 3-1

3.2 Circuit Breaker Position Supervision ............................................................ 3-1


3.2.1 General Application ............................................................................................................. 3-1
3.2.2 Function Description ............................................................................................................ 3-2
3.2.3 Function Block Diagram ...................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.4 I/O Signals ........................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.5 Logic .................................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2.6 Settings ................................................................................................................................ 3-4

3.3 Fault Detector (FD) .......................................................................................... 3-4


3.3.1 General Application ............................................................................................................. 3-4
3.3.2 Fault Detector in Fault Detector DSP .................................................................................. 3-4
3.3.3 Protection Fault Detector in Protection Calculation DSP .................................................... 3-6
3.3.4 Function Block Diagram ...................................................................................................... 3-7
3.3.5 I/O Signals ........................................................................................................................... 3-7
3.3.6 Logic .................................................................................................................................... 3-8
3.3.7 Settings ................................................................................................................................ 3-8

3.4 Auxiliary Element ............................................................................................ 3-8


3.4.1 General Application ............................................................................................................. 3-8
3.4.2 Function Description ............................................................................................................ 3-8
3.4.3 Function Block Diagram .....................................................................................................3-11
3.4.4 I/O Signals ......................................................................................................................... 3-12
3.4.5 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-14

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-a
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

3.4.6 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-17

3.5 Phase Overcurrent Protection ..................................................................... 3-19


3.5.1 General Application ........................................................................................................... 3-19
3.5.2 Function Description .......................................................................................................... 3-19
3.5.3 Protection Principle ............................................................................................................ 3-19
3.5.4 Function Block Diagram .................................................................................................... 3-20
3.5.5 I/O Signals ......................................................................................................................... 3-20
3.5.6 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-20
3.5.7 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-21

3.6 Earth Fault Protection................................................................................... 3-22


3.6.1 General Application ........................................................................................................... 3-22
3.6.2 Function Description .......................................................................................................... 3-22
3.6.3 Protection Principle ............................................................................................................ 3-22
3.6.4 Function Block Diagram .................................................................................................... 3-23
3.6.5 I/O Signals ......................................................................................................................... 3-23
3.6.6 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-24
3.6.7 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-24

3.7 Dead Zone Protection ................................................................................... 3-25


3.7.1 General Application ........................................................................................................... 3-25
3.7.2 Function Description .......................................................................................................... 3-25
3.7.3 Protection Principle ............................................................................................................ 3-25
3.7.4 Function Block Diagram .................................................................................................... 3-25
3.7.5 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................... 3-26
3.7.6 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-26
3.7.7 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-26

3.8 Breaker Failure Protection ........................................................................... 3-27


3.8.1 General Application ........................................................................................................... 3-27
3.8.2 Function Description .......................................................................................................... 3-27
3.8.3 Function Block Diagram .................................................................................................... 3-28
3.8.4 I/O Signals ......................................................................................................................... 3-28
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-b
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

3.8.5 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-29


3.8.6 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-30

3.9 Pole Discrepancy Protection........................................................................ 3-31


3.9.1 General Application ........................................................................................................... 3-31
3.9.2 Function Description .......................................................................................................... 3-31
3.9.3 Function Block Diagram .................................................................................................... 3-31
3.9.4 I/O Signals ......................................................................................................................... 3-31
3.9.5 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-32
3.9.6 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-32

3.10 Synchrocheck ............................................................................................. 3-33


3.10.1 General Application ......................................................................................................... 3-33
3.10.2 Function Description ........................................................................................................ 3-33
3.10.3 I/O Signals ....................................................................................................................... 3-40
3.10.4 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-41
3.10.5 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-42

3.11 Automatic Reclosure................................................................................... 3-44


3.11.1 General Application .......................................................................................................... 3-44
3.11.2 Function Description ........................................................................................................ 3-44
3.11.3 Function Block Diagram ................................................................................................... 3-46
3.11.4 I/O Signals........................................................................................................................ 3-46
3.11.5 Logic................................................................................................................................. 3-48
3.11.6 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-59

3.12 Trip Logic ..................................................................................................... 3-61


3.12.1 Application ....................................................................................................................... 3-61
3.12.2 Function Description ........................................................................................................ 3-61
3.12.3 I/O Signals ....................................................................................................................... 3-61
3.12.4 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-62
3.12.5 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-63

3.13 VT Circuit Supervision ................................................................................ 3-63


3.13.1 General Application ......................................................................................................... 3-63
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-c
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

3.13.2 Function Description ........................................................................................................ 3-63


3.13.3 Function Block Diagram .................................................................................................. 3-64
3.13.4 I/O Signals ....................................................................................................................... 3-64
3.13.5 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-65
3.13.6 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-65

3.14 CT Circuit Supervision ............................................................................... 3-66


3.14.1 Application ....................................................................................................................... 3-66
3.14.2 Function Description ........................................................................................................ 3-66
3.14.3 Function Block Diagram .................................................................................................. 3-66
3.14.4 I/O Signals ....................................................................................................................... 3-66
3.14.5 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-67

List of Figures
Figure 3.2-1 CB position supervision........................................................................................ 3-3
Figure 3.2-2 Logic diagram of CB position supervision ......................................................... 3-3
Figure 3.3-1 Flow chart of protection program ........................................................................ 3-7
Figure 3.3-2 Logic diagram of fault detector ............................................................................ 3-8
Figure 3.4-1 Logic diagram of auxiliary element ................................................................... 3-17
Figure 3.5-1 Logic diagram of phase overcurrent protection .............................................. 3-21
Figure 3.6-1 Logic diagram of earth-fault protection ............................................................ 3-24
Figure 3.7-1 Logic diagram of dead zone protection ............................................................ 3-26
Figure 3.8-1 Logic diagram of breaker failure protection ..................................................... 3-29
Figure 3.9-1 Logic diagram of pole discrepancy protection................................................. 3-32
Figure 3.10-1 Relationship between reference voltage and synchronous voltage ............ 3-33
Figure 3.10-2 Voltage connection for single busbar arrangement ...................................... 3-35
Figure 3.10-3 Voltage connection for single busbar arrangement ...................................... 3-35
Figure 3.10-4 Voltage connection for double busbars arrangement ................................... 3-36
Figure 3.10-5 Voltage selection for double busbars arrangement....................................... 3-36
Figure 3.10-6 Voltage connection for one and a half breakers arrangement ..................... 3-37
Figure 3.10-7 Voltage selection for one and a half breakers arrangement ......................... 3-38
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-d
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

Figure 3.10-8 Voltage selection for one and a half breakers arrangement ......................... 3-39
Figure 3.10-9 Synchronism check ........................................................................................... 3-41
Figure 3.10-10 Dead charge check logic................................................................................. 3-42
Figure 3.10-11 Synchrocheck logic ......................................................................................... 3-42
Figure 3.11-1 Logic diagram of AR ready ............................................................................... 3-49
Figure 3.11-2 Single-phase tripping initiating AR .................................................................. 3-51
Figure 3.11-3 Three-phase tripping initiating AR ................................................................... 3-51
Figure 3.11-4 1-pole AR initiation............................................................................................. 3-52
Figure 3.11-5 3-pole AR initiation............................................................................................. 3-52
Figure 3.11-6 One-shot AR ....................................................................................................... 3-53
Figure 3.11-7 Extra time delay and blocking logic of AR ...................................................... 3-53
Figure 3.11-8 Reclosing output logic ...................................................................................... 3-54
Figure 3.11-9 Reclosing failure and success ......................................................................... 3-55
Figure 3.11-10 Single-phase transient fault ............................................................................ 3-58
Figure 3.11-11 Single-phase permanent fault ([79.N_Rcls]=2) ............................................. 3-58
Figure 3.12-1 Simplified trip logic............................................................................................ 3-62
Figure 3.13-1 Logic diagram of VT circuit supervision ......................................................... 3-65
Figure 3.13-2 Logic diagram of VT neutral point supervision .............................................. 3-65
Figure 3.14-1 Logic diagram of CT circuit failure .................................................................. 3-67

List of Tables
Table 3.1-1 System parameters .................................................................................................. 3-1
Table 3.2-1 I/O signals of CB position supervision ................................................................. 3-2
Table 3.2-2 Internal setting of CB position supervision .......................................................... 3-4
Table 3.3-1 I/O signals of fault detector .................................................................................... 3-7
Table 3.3-2 Settings of fault detector ........................................................................................ 3-8
Table 3.4-1 I/O signals of auxiliary element ............................................................................ 3-12
Table 3.4-2 Settings of auxiliary element ................................................................................ 3-17
Table 3.5-1 I/O signals of phase overcurrent protection ....................................................... 3-20
Table 3.5-2 Settings of phase overcurrent protection ........................................................... 3-21
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-e
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

Table 3.6-1 I/O signals of earth fault protection ..................................................................... 3-23


Table 3.6-2 Settings of earth fault protection ......................................................................... 3-24
Table 3.7-1 I/O signals of dead zone protection ..................................................................... 3-26
Table 3.7-2 Settings of dead zone protection ......................................................................... 3-26
Table 3.8-1 I/O signals of breaker failure protection ............................................................. 3-28
Table 3.8-2 Settings of breaker failure protection ................................................................. 3-30
Table 3.9-1 I/O signals of pole discrepancy protection ......................................................... 3-31
Table 3.9-2 Settings of pole discrepancy protection ............................................................. 3-32
Table 3.10-1 I/O signals of synchrocheck ............................................................................... 3-40
Table 3.10-2 Settings of synchrocheck ................................................................................... 3-42
Table 3.11-1 I/O signals of auto-reclosing .............................................................................. 3-46
Table 3.11-2 Reclosing number ................................................................................................ 3-56
Table 3.11-3 Settings of auto-reclosing................................................................................... 3-59
Table 3.12-1 I/O signals of trip logic ........................................................................................ 3-61
Table 3.12-2 Settings of trip logic ............................................................................................ 3-63
Table 3.13-1 I/O signals of VT circuit supervision ................................................................. 3-64
Table 3.13-2 Settings of VT circuit supervision ..................................................................... 3-65
Table 3.14-1 I/O signals of CT circuit supervision ................................................................. 3-66

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-f
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

3.1 System Parameters


3.1.1 General Application
The device performs various protection functions by respective algorithms with the information
(currents and voltages) acquired from primary system through current transformer and voltage
transformer, so it is important to configure analog input channels correctly.
Further to correct configuration of analog input channels, other protected system information, such
as the parameters of voltage transformer and current transformer are also required.
3.1.2 Function Description
The device generally considers transmission line as its protected object, current flows from busbar
to line is considered as the forward direction.
3.1.3 Settings
Table 3.1-1 System parameters
No.

Name

Range

Step

Unit

Remark

Active_Grp

1~10

Active setting group

Opt_SysFreq

50 or 60

PrimaryEquip_Name

U1n

33.00~65500.00

0.01

kV

U2n

80.00~220.00

0.01

I1n

100~65500

Primary rated value of CT

I2n

1 or 5

Secondary rated value of CT

Hz

System frequency
The description of the primary equipment
Primary

rated

value

of

VT

(phase-to-phase)
Secondary

rated

value

of

VT

(phase-to-phase)

Frequency upper limit setting


8

f_High_FreqAlm

50~65

Hz

The

device

will

issue

an

alarm

[Alm_Freq], when system frequency is


higher than the setting.
Frequency lower limit setting

f_Low_FreqAlm

45~60

Hz

The

device

will

issue

an

alarm

[Alm_Freq], when system frequency is


lower than the setting.

3.2 Circuit Breaker Position Supervision


3.2.1 General Application
The status of circuit breaker (CB) position is applied for protection and control functions in this
device, such as, auto-reclose and VT circuit supervision, etc. The status of CB position can be
applied as input signals for other features configured by user.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-1
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

3.2.2 Function Description


The signal reflecting CB position is acquired via opto-coupler with settable delay pick-up and
drop-off, and forms digital signal used by protection functions. CB position can reflect the status of
each phase by means of phase-segregated inputs.
In order to prevent that wrong status of CB position is input into the device via binary input,
appropriate monitor method is used to check the rationality of the binary input. When the binary
input of CB open position is detected, the status of CB position will be thought as incorrect and an
alarm [Alm_52b] will be issued if there is current detected in the line.
3.2.3 Function Block Diagram
1.

For phase-segregated circuit breaker


CB Position Supervision
I3P

Alm_52b

52b_PhA
52b_PhB
52b_PhC

2.

For non-phase segregated circuit breaker


CB Position Supervision
I3P

Alm_52b

52b

3.2.4 I/O Signals


Table 3.2-1 I/O signals of CB position supervision
No.

Input Signal

Description

I3P

Three-phase current input

52b_PhA

Normally closed contact of A-phase of circuit breaker

52b_PhB

Normally closed contact of B-phase of circuit breaker

52b_PhC

Normally closed contact of C-phase of circuit breaker

52b

Normally closed contact of three-phase of circuit breaker

No.
1

Output Signal
Alm_52b

Description
CB position is abnormal

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-2
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

3.2.5 Logic
BI

52b_PhA

&
>=1
52b_A_CB

BI

52b_PhB

&
>=1
52b_B_CB

BI

52b_PhC

&
>=1
52b_C_CB

EN

BI

[En_3PhCB]

&

52b

Figure 3.2-1 CB position supervision


SIG

&

[52b_PhA]

&
SIG

[52b_PhB]

&

SIG

[52b_PhC]

&

&
>=1

&

&
>=1

SIG

10s

10s

Alm_52b

Ia>I_Line

&
SIG

Ib>I_Line

&
SIG

Ic>I_Line

Figure 3.2-2 Logic diagram of CB position supervision

Where:
1.

I_Line is threshold value used to determine whether line is on-load or no-load. Default value
0.06In.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-3
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

3.2.6 Settings
Table 3.2-2 Internal setting of CB position supervision
No.

Name

En_3PhCB

Range

Step

Unit

Remark
This setting is used to determine whether CB position is
determined by phase-segregated auxiliary contact or
three-phase auxiliary contact
1: phase-segregated contact ([52b_PhA], [52b_PhB],
[52b_PhC])
0: three-phase contact ([52b])

0 or 1

3.3 Fault Detector (FD)


3.3.1 General Application
The device has one DSP module with fault detector DSP and protection DSP for fault detector and
protection calculation respectively. Protection DSP with protection fault detector element is
responsible for calculation of protection elements, and fault detector DSP is responsible to
determine fault appearance on the protected power system. Fault detector in fault detector DSP
picks up to provide positive supply to output relays. The output relays can only operate when both
the fault detector in fault detector DSP and a protection element operate simultaneously.
Otherwise, the output relays would not operate. An alarm message will be issued with blocking
outputs if a protection element operates while the fault detector does not operate.
3.3.2 Fault Detector in Fault Detector DSP
Main part of FD is DPFC current detector element that detects the change of phase-to-phase
power frequency current, and residual current fault detector element that calculates the vector
sum of 3 phase currents as supplementary. They are continuously calculating the analog input
signals.
The FD pickup condition in this device includes:
1.

Pickup condition 1: DPFC current is greater than the setting value

2.

Pickup condition 2: Residual current is greater than the setting value

If any of the above conditions is complied, the FD will operate to activate the output circuit
providing DC power supply to the output relays.
DPFC current fault detector element (pickup condition 1) and residual current fault detector
element (pickup condition 2) are always enabled, and all protection functions are permitted to
operate when they operate.
3.3.2.1 Fault Detector Based on DPFC Current (pickup condition 1)
DPFC phase-to-phase current is obtained by subtracting the phase-to-phase current from that of a
cycle before.
I = I(k)-I(k-24)

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-4
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

Where:
I(k) is the sampling value at a point.
I(k-24) is the value of a sampling point before a cycle, 24 is the sampling points in one cycle.
200
100
0
-100
-200

20

40

60
Original Current

80

100

120

20

40

60
DPFC current

80

100

120

100
50
0
-50
-100

From above figures, it is concluded that DPFC can reflect the sudden change of current at the
initial stage of a fault and has a perfect performance of fault detection.
It is used to determine whether this pickup condition is met according to Equation 3.3-1.
For multi-phase short-circuit fault, the DPFC phase-to-phase current has high sensitivity to ensure
the pickup of protection device. For usual single phase to earth fault, it also has sufficient
sensitivity to pick up except the earth fault with very large fault resistance. Under this condition the
DPFC current is relative small, however, residual current is also used to judge pickup condition
(pickup condition 2).
This element adopts adaptive floating threshold varied with the change of load current
continuously. The change of load current is small and steadily under normal or power swing
condition, the adaptive floating threshold with the ISet is higher than the change of current under
these conditions and hence maintains the element stability.
The criterion is:
IMAX>1.25ITh+ISet

Equation 3.3-1

Where:
IMAX: The maximum half-wave integration value of phase-to-phase current (=AB, BC, CA)
ISet: The fixed threshold value (i.e. the setting [FD.DPFC.I_Set])
ITh: The floating threshold value
The coefficient 1.25 is an empirical value which ensures the threshold always higher than the
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-5
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

unbalance output value of the system.


If operating condition is met, DPFC current element will pickup and trigger FD to provide DC power
supply for output relays, the FD operation signal will maintain 7 seconds after DPFC current
element drops off.
3.3.2.2 Fault Detector Based on Residual Current (pickup condition 2)
This pickup condition will be met when 3I0 is greater than the setting [FD.ROC.3I0_Set].
Where:
3I0: residual current calculates from the vector sum of Ia, Ib and Ic
When residual current FD element operates and lasts for longer than 10 seconds, an alarm
[Alm_PersistI0] will be issued.
If operating condition is met, the residual current FD element will pickup and trigger FD to provide
DC power supply for output relay, and pickup signal will be kept for 7 seconds after the residual
current FD element drops off.
3.3.3 Protection Fault Detector in Protection Calculation DSP
The protection device is running either of the two programs: one is Regular program for normal
state, and the other is Fault calculation program after protection fault detector picks up.
Under the normal state, the protection device will perform the following tasks:
1.

Calculate analog quantity

2.

Read binary input

3.

Hardware self-check

4.

Circuit breaker position supervision

5.

Analog quantity input supervision

Once the protection fault detector element in protection calculation DSP picks up, the protection
device will switch to fault calculation program, for example the calculation of phase overcurrent
protection, and to determine logic. If the fault is within the protected zone, the protection device will
send tripping command.
The protection program flow chart is shown as Figure 3.3-1.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-6
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

Main program

Sampling program

No

Yes

Pickup?

Regular program

Fault calculation program

Figure 3.3-1 Flow chart of protection program

The protection FD pickup conditions are the same as the FD in fault detector DSP as shown below.
The operation criteria for the conditions are also the same as that in fault detector DSP. Please
refer to section 3.3.2 for details.
1.

Pickup condition 1: DPFC current is greater than the setting value

2.

Pickup condition 2: Residual current is greater than the setting value

When any pickup condition mentioned above is met, the protection device will go to fault
calculation state.
3.3.4 Function Block Diagram
FD
I3P

FD.Pkp
FD.DPFC.Pkp
FD.ROC.Pkp

3.3.5 I/O Signals


Table 3.3-1 I/O signals of fault detector
No.
1
No.

Input Signal
I3P

Description
Three-phase current input

Output Signal

Description

FD.Pkp

The device picks up

FD.DPFC.Pkp

DPFC current fault detector element operates.

FD.ROC.Pkp

Residual current fault detector element operates.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-7
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

3.3.6 Logic
OTH

Ia

OTH

Ib

OTH

Ic

Calculate DPFC phase-to-phase


current
Iab= (Ia-Ib)
Ibc= (Ib-Ic)
Ica= (Ic-Ia)

OTH

Iab>[FD.DPFC.I_Set]

OTH

Ibc>[FD.DPFC.I_Set]

OTH

Ica>[FD.DPFC.I_Set]

>=1
FD.DPFC.Pkp

>=1
0s

Calculate residual current


3I0=Ia+Ib+Ic

OTH

3I0>[FD.ROC.3I0_Set]

7s

FD.Pkp

FD.ROC.Pkp

Figure 3.3-2 Logic diagram of fault detector

3.3.7 Settings
Table 3.3-2 Settings of fault detector
No.

Name

Range

Step

Unit

FD.DPFC.I_Set

(0.050~30.000)In

0.001

FD.ROC.3I0_Set

(0.050~30.000)In

0.001

Remark
Current setting of DPFC current fault
detector element
Current setting of residual current fault
detector element

3.4 Auxiliary Element


3.4.1 General Application
Auxiliary element (AuxE) is mainly used to program logics to meet users applications or further
improve operating reliability of protection elements. Reliability of protective elements is assured,
auxiliary element is usually not required to configure. Auxiliary elements including current change
auxiliary element (AuxE.OCD), residual current auxiliary element (AuxE.ROC), phase current
auxiliary element (AuxE.OC), voltage change auxiliary element (AuxE.UVD), phase under voltage
auxiliary element (AuxE.UVG), phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element (AuxE.UVS) and
residual voltage auxiliary element (AuxE.ROV), and they can be enabled or disabled by
corresponding logic setting or binary inputs. Users can configure them according to applications
via PCS-Explorer software.
3.4.2 Function Description
1.

Current change auxiliary element AuxE.OCD

It shares DPFC current element of DPFC fault detector. If DPFC fault detector operates
(FD.DPFC.Pkp=1) and current change auxiliary element is enabled, current change auxiliary
element operates.
2.

Residual current auxiliary element AuxE.ROC

There are 3 stages for residual current auxiliary element (AuxE.ROC1, AuxE.ROC2 and
AuxE.ROC3). Each residual current auxiliary element will operate instantly if calculated residual
current amplitude is larger than corresponding current setting

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-8
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

The criteria are:


AuxE.ROC1: 3I0>[AuxE.ROC1.3I0_Set]
AuxE.ROC2: 3I0>[AuxE.ROC2.3I0_Set]
AuxE.ROC3: 3I0>[AuxE.ROC3.3I0_Set]
Where:
3I0: The calculated residual current
3.

Phase current auxiliary element AuxE.OC

There are 3 stages for phase current auxiliary element (AuxE.OC1, AuxE.OC2 and AuxE.OC3).
Each phase current auxiliary element will operate instantly if phase current amplitude is larger than
corresponding current setting.
The criteria are:
AuxE.OC1: IMAX>[AuxE.OC1.I_Set]
AuxE.OC2: IMAX>[AuxE.OC2.I_Set]
AuxE.OC3: IMAX>[AuxE.OC3.I_Set]
Where:
IMAX: The maximum phase current among three phases
4.

Voltage change auxiliary element AuxE.UVD

AuxE.UVD is based on phase-to-ground voltage change measured in all three phases.


The criterion is:
UMAX>[AuxE.UVD.U_Set]
Where:
UMAX: The maximum phase-to-ground voltage change among three phases
5.

Phase under voltage auxiliary element AuxE.UVG

AuxE.UVG will operate instantly if any phase-to-ground voltage is lower than corresponding
voltage setting.
The criterion is:
UMIN<[ AuxE.UVG.U_Set]
Where:
UMIN: The minimum value among three phase-to-ground voltages
6.

Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element AuxE.UVS

AuxE.UVS will operate instantly if any phase-to-phase voltage is lower than corresponding voltage
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-9
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

setting.
The criterion is:
UMIN<[ AuxE.UVS.U_Set]
Where:
UMIN: The minimum value among three phase-to-phase voltages
7.

Residual voltage auxiliary element AuxE.ROV

AuxE.ROV will operate instantly if calculated residual voltage is larger than corresponding voltage
setting.
The criterion is:
3U0>[ AuxE.ROV.3U0_Set]
Where:
3U0: The calculated residual voltage

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-10
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

3.4.3 Function Block Diagram


AuxE
AuxE.OCD.En

AuxE.St

AuxE.OCD.Blk

AuxE.OCD.St_Ext

AuxE.ROCx.En

AuxE.OCD.On

AuxE.ROCx.Blk

AuxE.ROCx.St

AuxE.OCx.En

AuxE.ROCx.On

AuxE.OCx.Blk

AuxE.OCx.St

AuxE.UVD.En

AuxE.OCx.StA

AuxE.UVD.Blk

AuxE.OCx.StB

AuxE.UVG.En

AuxE.OCx.StC

AuxE.UVG.Blk

AuxE.OCx.On

AuxE.UVS.En

AuxE.UVD.St

AuxE.UVS.Blk

AuxE.UVD.St_Ext

AuxE.ROV.En

AuxE.UVD.On

AuxE.ROV.Blk

AuxE.UVG.St
AuxE.UVG.StA
AuxE.UVG.StB
AuxE.UVG.StC
AuxE.UVG.On
AuxE.UVS.St
AuxE.UVS.StAB
AuxE.UVS.StBC
AuxE.UVS.StCA
AuxE.UVS.On
AuxE.ROV.St
AuxE.ROV.On

Where:
x can be 1, 2 or 3

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-11
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

3.4.4 I/O Signals


Table 3.4-1 I/O signals of auxiliary element
No.

Input Signal

AuxE.OCD.En

AuxE.OCD.Blk

AuxE.ROC1.En

AuxE.ROC1.Blk

AuxE.ROC2.En

AuxE.ROC2.Blk

AuxE.ROC3.En

AuxE.ROC3.Blk

AuxE.OC1.En

10

AuxE.OC1.Blk

11

AuxE.OC2.En

12

AuxE.OC2.Blk

13

AuxE.OC3.En

14

AuxE.OC3.Blk

15

AuxE.UVD.En

16

AuxE.UVD.Blk

17

AuxE.UVG.En

18

AuxE.UVG.Blk

19

AuxE.UVS.En

20

AuxE.UVS.Blk

Description
Current change auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or
programmable logic etc.
Current change auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
programmable logic etc.
Stage 1 of residual current auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from
binary input or programmable logic etc.
Stage 1 of residual current auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from
binary input or programmable logic etc.
Stage 2 of residual current auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from
binary input or programmable logic etc.
Stage 2 of residual current auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from
binary input or programmable logic etc.
Stage 3 of residual current auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from
binary input or programmable logic etc.
Stage 3 of residual current auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from
binary input or programmable logic etc.
Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from
binary input or programmable logic etc.
Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from
binary input or programmable logic etc.
Stage 2 of phase current auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from
binary input or programmable logic etc.
Stage 2 of phase current auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from
binary input or programmable logic etc.
Stage 3 of phase current auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from
binary input or programmable logic etc.
Stage 3 of phase current auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from
binary input or programmable logic etc.
Voltage change auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or
programmable logic etc.
Voltage change auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
programmable logic etc.
Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered
from binary input or programmable logic etc.
Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered
from binary input or programmable logic etc.
Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from
binary input or programmable logic etc.
Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-12
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory
binary input or programmable logic etc.
Residual voltage auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from binary input

21

AuxE.ROV.En

22

AuxE.ROV.Blk

23

I3P

Three-phase current input

24

U3P

Three-phase voltage input

No.

or programmable logic etc.


Residual voltage auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from binary input
or programmable logic etc.

Output Signal

Description

AuxE.St

Any auxiliary element of the device operates

AuxE.OCD.St_Ext

Current change auxiliary element operates (7s delayed drop off).

AuxE.OCD.On

Current change auxiliary element is enabled

AuxE.ROC1.St

Stage 1 of residual current auxiliary element operates.

AuxE.ROC1.On

Stage 1 of residual current auxiliary element is enabled

AuxE.ROC2.St

Stage 2 of residual current auxiliary element operates.

AuxE.ROC2.On

Stage 2 of residual current auxiliary element is enabled

AuxE.ROC3.St

Stage 3 of residual current auxiliary element operates.

AuxE.ROC3.On

Stage 3 of residual current auxiliary element is enabled

10

AuxE.OC1.St

Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element operates.

11

AuxE.OC1.StA

Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element operates (phase A).

12

AuxE.OC1.StB

Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element operates (phase B).

13

AuxE.OC1.StC

Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element operates (phase C).

14

AuxE.OC1.On

Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element is enabled

15

AuxE.OC2.St

Stage 2 of phase current auxiliary element operates.

16

AuxE.OC2.StA

Stage 2 of phase current auxiliary element operates (phase A).

17

AuxE.OC2.StB

Stage 2 of phase current auxiliary element operates (phase B).

18

AuxE.OC2.StC

Stage 2 of phase current auxiliary element operates (phase C).

19

AuxE.OC2.On

Stage 2 of phase current auxiliary element is enabled

20

AuxE.OC3.St

Stage 3 of phase current auxiliary element operates.

21

AuxE.OC3.StA

Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element operates (phase A).

22

AuxE.OC3.StB

Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element operates (phase B).

23

AuxE.OC3.StC

Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element operates (phase C).

24

AuxE.OC3.On

Stage 3 of phase current auxiliary element is enabled

25

AuxE.UVD.St

Voltage change auxiliary element operates.

26

AuxE.UVD.St_Ext

Voltage change auxiliary element operates (7s delayed drop off).

27

AuxE.UVD.On

Voltage change auxiliary element is enabled

28

AuxE.UVG.St

Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element operates.

29

AuxE.UVG.StA

Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase A).

30

AuxE.UVG.StB

Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase B).

31

AuxE.UVG.StC

Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase C).

32

AuxE.UVG.On

Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element is enabled

33

AuxE.UVS.St

Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element operates.

34

AuxE.UVS.StAB

Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase AB).

35

AuxE.UVS.StBC

Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase BC).

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-13
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory
36

AuxE.UVS.StCA

Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase CA).

37

AuxE.UVS.On

Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element is enabled

38

AuxE.ROV.St

Residual voltage auxiliary element operates.

39

AuxE.ROV.On

Residual voltage auxiliary element is enabled

3.4.5 Logic
SIG

FD.DPFC.Pkp

SIG

AuxE.OCD.En

SIG

AuxE.OCD.Blk

En

AuxE.OCD.En

SIG

Ia

SIG

Ib

SIG

Ic

SIG

&
&

0s

[AuxE.OCD.t_DDO]

AuxE.OCD.St_Ext

AuxE.OCD.On

Calculate residual
current:
3I0=Ia+Ib+Ic
3I0>[AuxE.ROC1.3I0_Set]

AuxE.ROC1.En

&
AuxE.ROC1.St

&
SIG

AuxE.ROC1.Blk

En

AuxE.ROC1.En

SIG

AuxE.ROC2.En

AuxE.ROC1.On
3I0>[AuxE.ROC2.3I0_Set]

&
AuxE.ROC2.St

&
SIG

AuxE.ROC2.Blk

En

AuxE.ROC2.En

SIG

AuxE.ROC3.En

AuxE.ROC2.On
3I0>[AuxE.ROC3.3I0_Set]

SIG

AuxE.ROC3.Blk

En

AuxE.ROC3.En

&
AuxE.ROC3.St

&

AuxE.ROC3.On

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-14
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

SIG

Ia

Ia>[AuxE.OC1.I_Set]

&
AuxE.OC1.StA

SIG

Ib

Ib>[AuxE.OC1.I_Set]

&
AuxE.OC1.StB

SIG

Ic

Ic>[AuxE.OC1.I_Set]

&
AuxE.OC1.StC

>=1
SIG

&

AuxE.OC1.En

AuxE.OC1.St

&
SIG

AuxE.OC1.Blk

En

AuxE.OC1.En

SIG

Ia

AuxE.OC1.On
Ia>[AuxE.OC2.I_Set]

&
AuxE.OC2.StA

SIG

Ib

Ib>[AuxE.OC2.I_Set]

&
AuxE.OC2.StB

SIG

Ic

Ic>[AuxE.OC2.I_Set]

&
AuxE.OC2.StC

>=1
SIG

&

AuxE.OC2.En

AuxE.OC2.St

&
SIG

AuxE.OC2.Blk

En

AuxE.OC2.En

SIG

Ia

AuxE.OC2.On
Ia>[AuxE.OC3.I_Set]

&
AuxE.OC3.StA

SIG

Ib

Ib>[AuxE.OC3.I_Set]

&
AuxE.OC3.StB

SIG

Ic

Ic>[AuxE.OC3.I_Set]

&
AuxE.OC3.StC

>=1
SIG

&

AuxE.OC3.En

AuxE.OC3.St

&
SIG

AuxE.OC3.Blk

En

AuxE.OC4.En

AuxE.OC3.On

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-15
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory
SIG

Ua

SIG

Ub

SIG

Uc

SIG

AuxE.UVD.En

SIG

AuxE.UVD.Blk

En

AuxE.UVD.En

SET

Ua>[AuxE.UVD.U_Set]

Calculate DPFC phase


voltage
Ua= (Ua-Ufa)
Ub= (Ub-Ufb)
Uc= (Uc-Ufc)

>=1
&

Ub>[AuxE.UVD.U_Set]

AuxE.UVD.St

Uc>[AuxE.UVD.U_Set]
0s

[AuxE.UVD.t_DDO]

AuxE.UVD.St_Ext

&
AuxE.UVD.On

UA<[AuxE.UVG.U_Set]

&
AuxE.UVG.StA

SET

UB<[AuxE.UVG.U_Set]

&
AuxE.UVG.StB

SET

UC<[AuxE.UVG.U_Set]

&
AuxE.UVG.StC
>=1

SIG

&

AuxE.UVG.En

AuxE.UVG.St

&
SIG

AuxE.UVG.Blk

En

AuxE.UVG.En
AuxE.UVG.On

SET

UAB<[AuxE.UVS.U_Set]

&
AuxE.UVS.StAB

SET

UBC<[AuxE.UVS.U_Set]

&
AuxE.UVS.StBC

SET

UCA<[AuxE.UVS.U_Set]

&
AuxE.UVS.StCA
>=1

SIG

&

AuxE.UVS.En

AuxE.UVS.St

&
SIG

AuxE.UVS.Blk

En

AuxE.UVS.En
AuxE.UVS.On

SIG

Ua

SIG

Ub

SIG

Uc

SIG

AuxE.ROV.En

SIG

AuxE.ROV.Blk

En

AuxE.ROV.En

3U0>[AuxE.ROV.3U0_Set]

&
AuxE.ROV.St

Calculate residual voltage


3U0=Ua+Ub+Uc

&
AuxE.ROV.On

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-16
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory
SIG

AuxE.OCD.St_Ext

SIG

AuxE.ROC1.St

SIG

AuxE.ROC2.St

SIG

AuxE.ROC3.St

SIG

AuxE.OC1.St

>=1

>=1
AuxE.St

>=1
SIG

AuxE.OC2.St

SIG

AuxE.OC3.St

SIG

AuxE.UVD.St_Ext

SIG

AuxE.UVG.St

SIG

AuxE.UVS.St

SIG

AuxE.ROV.St

>=1
>=1

>=1

Figure 3.4-1 Logic diagram of auxiliary element

3.4.6 Settings
Table 3.4-2 Settings of auxiliary element
No.
1

Name
AuxE.OCD.t_DDO

Range

Step

0.000~10.000

0.001

Unit
s

Remark
Extended time delay of current change
auxiliary element
Enabling/disabling current change

AuxE.OCD.En

auxiliary element

0 or 1

0: disable
1: enable

AuxE.ROC1.3I0_Set

(0.050~30.000)In

0.001

Current setting of stage 1 residual


current auxiliary element
Enabling/disabling stage 1 residual

AuxE.ROC1.En

current auxiliary element

0 or 1

0: disable
1: enable

AuxE.ROC2.3I0_Set

(0.050~30.000)In

0.001

Current setting of stage 2 residual


current

auxiliary element

Enabling/disabling stage 2 residual


6

AuxE.ROC2.En

current auxiliary element

0 or 1

0: disable
1: enable

AuxE.ROC3.3I0_Set

(0.050~30.000)In

0.001

Current setting of stage 3 residual


current auxiliary element
Enabling/disabling stage 3 residual

AuxE.ROC3.En

current auxiliary element

0 or 1

0: disable
1: enable

AuxE.OC1.I_Set

(0.050~30.000)In

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

Current setting of stage 1 phase current


3-17

Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory
auxiliary element
Enabling/disabling stage 1 phase
10

AuxE.OC1.En

current auxiliary element

0 or 1

0: disable
1: enable

11

AuxE.OC2.I_Set

Current setting of stage 2 phase current

(0.050~30.000)In

auxiliary element
Enabling/disabling stage 2 phase

12

AuxE.OC2.En

current auxiliary element

0 or 1

0: disable
1: enable

13

AuxE.OC3.I_Set

Current setting of stage 3 phase current

(0.050~30.000)In

auxiliary element
Enabling/disabling stage 3 phase

14

AuxE.OC3.En

current auxiliary element

0 or 1

0: disable
1: enable

15

AuxE.UVD.U_Set

0~Un

0.001

16

AuxE.UVD.t_DDO

0.000~10.000

0.001

Voltage setting for voltage change


auxiliary element
Extended time delay of voltage change
auxiliary element
Enabling/disabling voltage change

17

AuxE.UVD.En

auxiliary element

0 or 1

0: disable
1: enable

18

AuxE.UVG.U_Set

0~Un

0.001

Voltage setting for phase-to-ground


under voltage auxiliary element
Enabling/disabling phase-to-ground

19

AuxE.UVG.En

under voltage auxiliary element

0 or 1

0: disable
1: enable

20

AuxE.UVS.U_Set

0~Unn

0.001

Voltage setting for phase-to-phase


under voltage auxiliary element
Enabling/disabling phase-to-phase

21

AuxE.UVS.En

under voltage auxiliary element

0 or 1

0: disable
1: enable

22

AuxE.ROV.3U0_Set

0~Un

0.001

Voltage setting for residual voltage


auxiliary element
Enabling/disabling residual voltage

23

AuxE.ROV.En

auxiliary element

0 or 1

0: disable
1: enable

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-18
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

3.5 Phase Overcurrent Protection


3.5.1 General Application
When a fault occurs in power system, usually the fault current would be very large and phase
overcurrent protection operates monitoring fault current is then adopted to avoid further damage to
protected equipment. For application on feeder-transformer circuits, second harmonic can also be
selected to block phase overcurrent protection to avoid the effect of inrush current on the
protection. Phase overcurrent protection is non-direction.
3.5.2 Function Description
Phase overcurrent protection has following functions:
1.

Two-stage phase overcurrent protection with independent logic, current and time delay
settings.

2.

Second harmonic can be selected to block each stage of phase overcurrent protection.

3.5.3 Protection Principle


3.5.3.1 Overview
Phase overcurrent protection consists of following elements:
1.

Overcurrent element: each stage is independent overcurrent element.

2.

Harmonic blocking element: one harmonic blocking element shared by all overcurrent
elements and each phase overcurrent element can individually enable the output signal from
harmonic element as a blocking input.

3.5.3.2 Overcurrent Element


The operation criterion for each stage of overcurrent element is:
Ip> [50/51Px.I_Set]

Equation 3.5-1

Where:
Ip is measured phase current.
[50/51Px.I_Set] is the current setting of stage x (x=1 or 2) of overcurrent element.
3.5.3.3 Harmonic Blocking Element
When phase overcurrent protection is used to protect feeder-transformer circuits, harmonic
blocking function can be selected for each stage of phase overcurrent element by configuring logic
setting [50/51Px.En_Hm2_Blk] (x=1 or 2) to prevent maloperation due to inrush current.
When the percentage of second harmonic component to fundamental component of any phase
current is greater than the setting [50/51P.K_Hm2], harmonic blocking element operates to block
stage x overcurrent element if corresponding logic setting [50/51Px.En_Hm2_Blk] is enabled.
Operation criterion:
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-19
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

Ip_2nd = 50/51P.K_Hm2 Ip

Equation 3.5-2

Where:
Ip_2nd is second harmonic of phase current.
Ip is fundamental component of phase current.
[50/51P.K_Hm2] is harmonic blocking coefficient.
If fundamental component of any phase current is lower than the minimum operating current
(0.1In), then harmonic calculation is not carried out and harmonic blocking element does not
operate.
3.5.4 Function Block Diagram

50/51Px
50/51Px.En

I3P
50/51Px.En1
50/51Px.En2

50/51Px.St
50/51Px.StA
50/51Px.StB
50/51Px.StC

50/51Px.Blk

50/51Px.Op

3.5.5 I/O Signals


Table 3.5-1 I/O signals of phase overcurrent protection
No.

Input Signal

I3P

50/51Px.En1

50/51Px.En2

50/51Px.Blk

No.

Description
Three-phase current input
Stage x of phase overcurrent protection enabling input 1, it is triggered from binary
input or programmable logic etc.
Stage x of phase overcurrent protection enabling input 2, it is triggered from binary
input or programmable logic etc.
Stage x of phase overcurrent protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary
input or programmable logic etc.

Output Signal

Description

50/51Px.En

Stage x of phase overcurrent protection is enabled

50/51Px.St

Stage x of phase overcurrent protection starts

50/51Px.StA

Stage x of phase overcurrent protection starts (A-Phase).

50/51Px.StB

Stage x of phase overcurrent protection starts (B-Phase).

50/51Px.StC

Stage x of phase overcurrent protection starts (C-Phase).

50/51Px.Op

Stage x of phase overcurrent protection operates

3.5.6 Logic
Logic diagram of phase overcurrent is shown in the following figure, including phase overcurrent

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-20
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

element and harmonic blocking element.


&
50/51Px.StA
SET

Ia>[50/51Px.I_Set]

SET

Ib>[50/51Px.I_Set]

SET

Ic>[50/51Px.I_Set]

EN

[50/51Px.En]

SIG

[50/51Px.En1]

&
50/51Px.StB

&

SIG

[50/51Px.En2]

SIG

[50/51Px.Blk]

SIG

I3P

SET

[50/51Px.En_Hm2_Blk]

&
&

50/51Px.StC
&
50/51Px.En
50/51Px.St

>=1
2nd Hm Detect

50/51Px.t_Op 0ms

&

50/51Px.Op

Figure 3.5-1 Logic diagram of phase overcurrent protection

Where: x=1, 2
3.5.7 Settings
Table 3.5-2 Settings of phase overcurrent protection
No.

Name

Range

Step

Unit

Remark
Setting

1.

50/51P.K_Hm2

0.000~1.000

0.001

of

component

second
for

harmonic

blocking

phase

overcurrent elements
2.

50/51P1.I_Set

(0.050~30.000)In

0.001

3.

50/51P1.t_Op

0.000~20.000

0.001

Current setting for stage 1 of phase


overcurrent protection
Time delay for stage 1 of phase
overcurrent protection
Enabling/disabling stage 1 of phase

4.

50/51P1.En

overcurrent protection

0 or 1

0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling second harmonic
blocking for stage 1 of phase

5.

50/51P1.En_Hm2_Blk

0 or 1

overcurrent protection
0: disable
1: enable

6.

50/51P2.I_Set

(0.050~30.000)In

0.001

7.

50/51P2.t_Op

0.000~20.000

0.001

8.

50/51P2.En

0 or 1

Current setting for stage 2 of phase


overcurrent protection
Time delay for stage 2 of phase
overcurrent protection
Enabling/disabling stage 2 of phase
overcurrent protection

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-21
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling second harmonic
blocking for stage 2 of phase
9.

50/51P2.En_Hm2_Blk

0 or 1

overcurrent protection
0: disable
1: enable

3.6 Earth Fault Protection


3.6.1 General Application
During normal operation of power system, there is trace residual current whereas a fault current
flows to earth will result in greater residual current. Therefore, residual current is adopted for the
calculation of earth fault protection. For application on feeder-transformer unit, second harmonic
also can be selected to block earth-fault protection to avoid the effect of sympathetic current on the
protection.
3.6.2 Function Description
Earth-fault protection has following functions:
1.

Two-stage earth-fault protection with independent logic, current and time delay settings.

2.

Second harmonic can be selected to block each stage of earth fault protection.

3.

Calculated residual current is used for the calculation of earth fault protection.

3.6.3 Protection Principle


3.6.3.1 Overview
Earth fault protection consists of following two elements:
1.

Overcurrent element: each stage equipped with one independent overcurrent element.

2.

Harmonic blocking element: one harmonic blocking element shared by all overcurrent
elements and each overcurrent element can individually enable the output signal of harmonic
blocking element as a blocking input.

3.6.3.2 Earth Fault Element


The operation criterion for each stage of earth-fault protection is:
3I0 > [50/51Gx.3I0_Set]

Equation 3.6-1

Where:
3I0 is the calculated residual current.
[50/51Gx.3I0_Set] is the current setting of stage x (x=1, 2) of earth-fault protection.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-22
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

3.6.3.3 Harmonic Blocking Element


In order to prevent effects of inrush current on earth-fault protection, harmonic blocking function
can be selected for each stage of earth-fault element by configuring logic setting
[50/51Gx.En_Hm2_Blk] (x=1, 2).
When the percentage of second harmonic component to fundamental component of residual
current is greater than the setting [50/51G.K_Hm2], harmonic blocking element operates to block
stage x of earth-fault protection if corresponding logic setting [50/51Gx.En_Hm2_Blk] is enabled
Operation criterion:
I0_2nd = 50/51G.K_Hm2 I0

Equation 3.6-2

Where:
I0_2nd is second harmonic of residual current.
I0 is fundamental component of residual current.
[50/51G.K_Hm2] is harmonic blocking coefficient.
If fundamental component of residual current is lower than the minimum operating current (0.1In)
then harmonic calculation is not carried out and harmonic blocking element does not operate.
3.6.4 Function Block Diagram
50/51Gx
I3P

50/51Gx.En

50/51Gx.En1

50/51Gx.St

50/51Gx.En2

50/51Gx.Op

50/51Gx.Blk

3.6.5 I/O Signals


Table 3.6-1 I/O signals of earth fault protection
No.

Input Signal

I3P

50/51Gx.En1

50/51Gx.En2

50/51Gx.Blk

No.

Description
Three-phase current input
Stage x of earth fault protection enabling input 1, it is triggered from binary input or
programmable logic etc.
Stage x of earth fault protection enabling input 2, it is triggered from binary input or
programmable logic etc.
Stage x of earth fault protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
programmable logic etc.

Output Signal

Description

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-23
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory
1

50/51Gx.En

Stage x of residual overcurrent protection is enabled.

50/51Gx.St

Stage x of residual overcurrent protection starts.

50/51Gx.Op

Stage x of residual overcurrent protection operates.

3.6.6 Logic
Logic diagram of earth-fault protection is shown in the following figure.
EN

[50/51Gx.En]

SIG

[50/51Gx.En1]

SIG

[50/51Gx.En2]

SIG

[50/51Gx.Blk]

SET

3I0>[50/51Gx.3I0_Set]

SIG

I3P

SET

[50/51Gx.En_Hm2_Blk]

&
&
50/51Gx.En

50/51Gx.St

&
50/51Gx.t_Op 0ms

2nd Hm Detect

50/51Gx.Op

&

Figure 3.6-1 Logic diagram of earth-fault protection

Where:
x=1, 2
3.6.7 Settings
Table 3.6-2 Settings of earth fault protection
No.

Name

Range

Step

Unit

Remark
Setting

50/51G.K_Hm2

0.000~1.000

0.001

of

second

harmonic

component for blocking earth


fault elements

50/51G1.3I0_Set

(0.050~30.000)In

0.001

50/51G1.t_Op

0.000~20.000

0.001

Current setting for stage 1 of


earth-fault protection
Time

delay for stage 1 of

earth-fault protection
Enabling/disabling stage 1 of

50/51G1.En

earth-fault protection

0 or 1

0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling

second

harmonic blocking for stage 1 of


5

50/51G1.En_Hm2_Blk

0 or 1

earth-fault protection
0: disable
1: enable

50/51G2.3I0_Set

(0.050~30.000)In

0.001

50/51G2.t_Op

0.000~20.000

0.001

Current setting for stage 2 of


earth-fault protection
Time

delay for stage 2 of

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-24
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory
earth-fault protection
Enabling/disabling stage 2 of
8

50/51G2.En

earth-fault protection

0 or 1

0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling

second

harmonic blocking for stage 2 of


9

50/51G2.En_Hm2_Blk

0 or 1

earth-fault protection
0: disable
1: enable

3.7 Dead Zone Protection


3.7.1 General Application
Generally, fault current is very large when multi-phase fault occurs between CT and circuit breaker
(i.e. dead zone) and it will have a greater impact on the system. Breaker failure protection can
operate after a longer time delay, in order to clear the dead zone fault quickly and improve the
system stability, dead zone protection with shorter time delay (compared with breaker failure
protection) is adopted.
3.7.2 Function Description
For some wiring arrangement (for example, circuit breaker is located between CT and the line), if
fault occurs between CT and circuit breaker, line protection can operate to trip circuit breaker
quickly, but the fault have not been cleared since local circuit breaker is tripped. Here dead zone
protection is needed in order to trip relevant circuit breaker.
3.7.3 Protection Principle
The criterion for dead zone protection is: when dead zone protection is enabled, binary input of
initiating dead zone protection is energized (by default, three-phase tripping signal is used to
initiate dead zone protection), if overcurrent element for dead zone protection operates, then
corresponding circuit breaker is tripped and three phases normally closed contact of the circuit
breaker are energized, dead zone protection will operate to trip adjacent circuit breaker after a
time delay.
3.7.4 Function Block Diagram
50DZ
50DZ.En1
50DZ.En2
50DZ.Blk

50DZ.En
50DZ.St
50DZ.Op

50DZ.Init

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-25
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

3.7.5 I/O Signal


Table 3.7-1 I/O signals of dead zone protection
No.

Input Signal

50DZ.En1

50DZ.En2

50DZ.Blk

50DZ.Init

No.

Description
Dead zone protection enabling input 1, it is triggered from binary input or
programmable logic etc.
Dead zone protection enabling input 2, it is triggered from binary input or
programmable logic etc.
Dead zone protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
programmable logic etc
Initiation signal input of the dead zone protection.

Output Signal

Description

50DZ.En

Dead zone protection is enabled.

50DZ.St

Dead zone protection starts.

50DZ.Op

Dead zone protection operates.

3.7.6 Logic
The logic diagram of dead zone protection is shown as below.
EN

[50DZ.En]

SIG

50DZ.En1

SIG

50DZ.En2

SIG

50DZ.Blk

BI

[52b_PhA]

BI

[52b_PhB]

BI

[52b_PhC]

SET

Ia > [50DZ.I_Set]

SET

Ib > [50DZ.I_Set]

SET

Ic > [50DZ.I_Set]

SIG

&
&
50DZ.En

&

50DZ.St

&
>=1

[50DZ.t_Op]

&

0ms

50DZ.Op

50DZ.Init

Figure 3.7-1 Logic diagram of dead zone protection

3.7.7 Settings
Table 3.7-2 Settings of dead zone protection
No.

Name

Range

Step

Unit

Remark
Current setting for dead zone

50DZ.I_Set

(0.050~30.000)In

0.001

protection. This setting shall ensure


the protection being sensitive
enough if dead zone fault occurs.
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-26
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory
2

50DZ.t_Op

0.000~10.000

0.001

Time delay of dead zone


protection.
Enabling/disabling

50DZ.En

0 or 1

dead

zone

protection
0: disable
1: enable

3.8 Breaker Failure Protection


3.8.1 General Application
Duplicated protection configurations are usually adopted for EHV power system, but the primary
equipment, circuit breaker, is not duplicated. Breaker failure protection is adopted to cater circuit
breaker tripping failure.
Breaker failure protection issues a back-up trip command to trip adjacent circuit breakers in case
of a tripping failure of the circuit breaker, and clears the fault as requested by the device. To utilize
the protection information of faulty equipment and the electrical information of failure circuit
breaker to constitute the criterion of breaker failure protection, it can ensure that the adjacent
circuit breakers of failure circuit breaker are tripped with a shorter time delay, so that the affected
area is minimized, and ensure stable operation of the entire power grid to prevent generators,
transformers and other components from seriously damaged.
3.8.2 Function Description
The instantaneous re-tripping function, after receiving tripping signal from other device and the
corresponding phase overcurrent element operating, is available and provides phase-segregated
binary output contact, which can ensure the circuit breaker is still tripped in case the secondary
circuit between the device and the circuit breaker is abnormal, to avoid undesired tripping of
breaker failure protection and the expansion of the affected area. Instantaneous re-tripping
function does not block AR.
When both the phase-segregated tripping contact from line protection and the corresponding
phase overcurrent element operate, or both the three-phase tripping contact and any phase
overcurrent element operate, breaker failure protection will send three-phase tripping command to
trip local circuit breaker after time delay of [50BF.t1_Op] and trip all adjacent circuit breakers after
time delay of [50BF.t2_Op].
When the protection element except undervoltage element within this device operates and issues
tripping signal, breaker failure protection will also be initiated.
Taking into account that the faulty current is too small for generator or transformer fault, the
sensitivity of phase current element may not meet the requirements, residual current criterion and
negative-sequence current criterion are provided in addition to the phase overcurrent element for
breaker failure protection initiated by input signal [50BF.ExTrp3P_GT] from generator and
transformer protection. They can be enabled or disabled by logic settings [50BF.En_3I0_3P] and
[50BF.En_I2_3P] respectively.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-27
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

For some special fault (for example, mechanical protection or overvoltage protection operating),
maybe faulty current is very small and current criterion of breaker failure protection is not met, in
order to make breaker failure protection can also operate under the above situation, an input
signal [50BF.ExTrp_WOI] is equipped to initiate breaker failure protection, once the input signal is
energized, normally closed auxiliary contact of circuit breaker is chosen in addition to breaker
failure current check to trigger breaker failure timer. The device takes current as priority with CB
auxiliary contact (52b) as an option criterion for breaker failure check.
3.8.3 Function Block Diagram
50BF
50BF.ExTrp3P_L

50BF.En

50BF.ExTrp3P_GT

50BF.Op_ReTrpA

50BF.ExTrp_WOI

50BF.Op_ReTrpB

50BF.ExTrpA

50BF.Op_ReTrpC

50BF.ExTrpB

50BF.Op_ReTrp3P

50BF.ExTrpC

50BF.Op_t1

50BF.En

50BF.Op_t2

50BF.Blk

3.8.4 I/O Signals


Table 3.8-1 I/O signals of breaker failure protection
No.

Input Signal

Description

50BF.ExTrp3P_L

Input signal of three-phase tripping contact from line protection

50BF.ExTrp3P_GT

50BF.ExTrpA

Input signal of phase-A tripping contact from external device

50BF.ExTrpB

Input signal of phase-B tripping contact from external device

50BF.ExTrpC

Input signal of phase-C tripping contact from external device

Input signal of three-phase tripping contact from generator or transformer


protection

Input signal of three-phase tripping contact from external device. Once it is


6

50BF.ExTrp_WOI

energized, normally closed auxiliary contact of circuit breaker is chosen in


addition to breaker failure current check to trigger breaker failure timers.

50BF.En

50BF.Blk

No.

Breaker failure protection enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or


programmable logic etc.
Breaker failure protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
programmable logic etc

Output Signal

Description

50BF.En

Breaker failure protection is enabled

50BF.Op_ReTrpA

Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip phase-A circuit breaker

50BF.Op_ReTrpB

Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip phase-B circuit breaker

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-28
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory
4

50BF.Op_ReTrpC

Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip phase-C circuit breaker

50BF.Op_ReTrp3P

Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip three-phase circuit breaker

50BF.Op_t1

Stage 1 breaker failure protection operates

50BF.Op_t2

Stage 2 breaker failure protection operates

3.8.5 Logic
SIG

50BF.En

EN

[50BF.En]

SIG

50BF.Blk

SIG

50BF.On

EN

[50BF.En_ReTrp]

EN

[50BF.En_3I0_1P]

SET

3I0>[50BF.3I0_Set]

SIG

BFI_A

&
50BF.On

&

>=1

>=1

&

&
>=1

BI

[50BF.ExTrpA]

SET

IA>[50BF.I_Set]

SIG

BFI_B

>=1

&

[50BF.ExTrpB]

SET

IB>[50BF.I_Set]

SIG

BFI_C

>=1

&

[50BF.ExTrpC]

SET

IC>[50BF.I_Set]

SIG

BFI_3P

BI

[50BF.ExTrp3P_L]

[50BF.t_ReTrp] 0ms

[50BF.Op_ReTrpB]

[50BF.t_ReTrp] 0ms

[50BF.Op_ReTrpC]

&
>=1

BI

[50BF.Op_ReTrpA]

&
>=1

BI

[50BF.t_ReTrp] 0ms

>=1
>=1
>=1
&

BI

[50BF.ExTrp3P_GT]

BI

[50BF.ExTrp_WOI]

EN

[50BF.En_3I0_3P]

SET

3I0>[50BF.3I0_Set]

EN

[50BF.En_I2_3P]

SET

I2>[50BF.I2_Set]

EN

[50BF.En_CB_Ctrl]

BI

[52b_PhA]

>=1

[50BF.Op_ReTrp3P]

&

>=1

&
&

>=1
>=1
&

&

&

BI

[52b_PhB]

BI

[52b_PhC]

SIG

50BF.On

[50BF.t1_Op]

0ms

[50BF.Op_t1]

[50BF.t2_Op]

0ms

[50BF.Op_t2]

&
&

Figure 3.8-1 Logic diagram of breaker failure protection

Where:
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-29
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

BFI_A, BFI_B, BFI_C: Protection tripping signal of A-phase, B-phase and C-phase configured to
initiate breaker failure protection, please refer to Figure 3.12-1.
3.8.6 Settings
Table 3.8-2 Settings of breaker failure protection
No.

Name

Range

Step

Unit

Remark
Current setting of phase current
criterion for BFP
Current setting of zero-sequence
current criterion for BFP

50BF.I_Set

(0.050~30.000)In

0.001

50BF.3I0_Set

(0.050~30.000)In

0.001

50BF.I2_Set

(0.050~30.000)In

0.001

Current
setting
negative-sequence
criterion for BFP

50BF.t_ReTrp

0.000~10.000

0.001

Time delay of re-tripping for BFP

50BF.t1_Op

0.000~10.000

0.001

Time delay of stage 1 for BFP

50BF.t2_Op

0.000~10.000

0.001

Time delay of stage 2 for BFP

50BF.En

0 or 1

50BF.En_ReTrp

0 or 1

50BF.En_3I0_1P

0 or 1

10

50BF.En_3I0_3P

0 or 1

11

50BF.En_I2_3P

0 or 1

12

50BF.En_CB_Ctrl

0 or 1

of
current

Enabling/disabling breaker failure


protection
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling re-trip function
for BFP
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling zero-sequence
current criterion for BFP initiated by
single-phase tripping contact
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling zero-sequence
current criterion for BFP initiated by
three-phase tripping contact
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling
negative-sequence current criterion
for BFP initiated by three-phase
tripping contact
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling breaker failure
protection can be initiated by
normally closed contact of circuit
breaker
0: disable
1: enable

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-30
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

3.9 Pole Discrepancy Protection


3.9.1 General Application
The pole discrepancy of circuit breaker may occur during operation of a breaker with segregated
operating gears for the three phases. The reason could be an interruption in the tripping/closing
circuits, or mechanical failure. A pole discrepancy can only be tolerated for a limited period. When
there is loading, zero-sequence or negative-sequence current will be generated in the power
system, which will result in overheat of the generator or the motor. With the load current increasing,
overcurrent elements based on residual current or negative-sequence current may operate. Pole
discrepancy protection is required to operate before the operation of these overcurrent elements.
3.9.2 Function Description
Pole discrepancy protection determines three-phase breaker pole discrepancy condition by its
phase segregated CB auxiliary contacts. In order to improve the reliability of pole discrepancy
protection, the asymmetrical current component can be selected as addition criteria when needed.
3.9.3 Function Block Diagram
62PD

62PD.En1

62PD.En

62PD.En2

62PD.St

62PD.Blk

62PD.Op

62PD.In_PD

3.9.4 I/O Signals


Table 3.9-1 I/O signals of pole discrepancy protection
No.

Input Signal

I3P

62PD.En1

62PD.En2

62PD.Blk

62PD.In_PD

No.

Description
Three-phase current input
Pole discrepancy protection enabling input 1, it is triggered from binary input or
programmable logic etc.
Pole discrepancy protection enabling input 2, it is triggered from binary input or
programmable logic etc.
Pole discrepancy protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
programmable logic etc.
Pole discrepancy binary input

Output Signal

Description

62PD.En

Pole discrepancy protection is enabled

62PD.St

Pole discrepancy protection starts

62PD.Op

Pole discrepancy protection operates to trip

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-31
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

3.9.5 Logic
Pole discrepancy protection can be initiated following method.
Phase-segregated circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are connected to the device. When the state
of three phase-segregated circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are inconsistent, pole discrepancy
protection will be started and initiate output after a time delay [62PD.t_Op].
Pole discrepancy protection can be blocked by external input signal [62PD.Blk]. In general, this
input signal is usually from the output of 1-pole AR initiation, so as to prevent pole discrepancy
protection from operation during 1-pole AR initiation.
SIG

62PD.En1

SIG

62PD.En2

EN

[62PD.En]

BI

[62PD.Blk]

BI

&
&
62PD.En

62PD.St

&
[62PD.t_Op]

[62PD.In_PD]

EN

[62PD.En_3I0/I2_Ctrl]

SET

3I0>[62PD.3I0_Set]

SET

I2>[62PD.I2_Set]

0ms

62PD.Op

>=1
>=1

Figure 3.9-1 Logic diagram of pole discrepancy protection

Where:
3I0: Calculated residual current by vector sum of Ia, Ib and Ic.
3.9.6 Settings
Table 3.9-2 Settings of pole discrepancy protection
No.

Name

Range

Step

Unit

62PD.3I0_Set

(0.050~30.000)In

0.001

62PD.I2_Set

(0.050~30.000)In

0.001

62PD.t_Op

0.000~600.000

0.001

62PD.En

0 or 1

62PD.En_3I0/I2_Ctrl

0 or 1

Remark
Current setting of residual
current criterion for pole
discrepancy protection
Current
setting
of
negative-sequence current
criterion for pole discrepancy
protection
Time
delay
of
pole
discrepancy protection
Enabling/disabling
pole
discrepancy protection
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling residual
current
criterion
and

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-32
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory
negative-sequence current
criterion for pole discrepancy
protection
0: disable
1: enable

3.10 Synchrocheck
3.10.1 General Application
The purpose of synchrocheck is to ensure two systems are synchronism before they are going to
be connected.
When two asynchronous systems are connected together, due to phase difference between the
two systems, larger impact will be led to the system during closing. Thus auto-reclosing and
manual closing are applied with the synchrocheck to avoid this situation and maintain the system
stability. The synchrocheck includes synchronism check and dead charge check.
3.10.2 Function Description
The synchronism check function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker and compares
them with the corresponding settings. The output is only given if all measured quantities are
simultaneously within their set limits.
The dead charge check function measures the amplitude of line voltage and bus voltage at both
sides of the circuit breaker, and then compare them with the live check setting [25.U_Lv] and the
dead check setting [25.U_Dd]. The output is only given when the measured quantities comply with
the criteria.
Synchrocheck in this device can be used for auto-reclosing and manual closing for both
single-breaker and dual-breakers. Details are described in the following sections.
When used for the synchrocheck of single-breaker, comparative relationship between reference
voltage (UL) and incoming voltage (UB) for synchronism is as follows.
UL

UB

Figure 3.10-1 Relationship between reference voltage and synchronous voltage

Figure 3.10-1 shows the characteristics of synchronism check element used for the auto-reclosing
if both line and busbar are live. The synchronism check element operates if voltage difference,
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-33
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

phase angle difference and frequency differency are all within their setting values.
1.

The voltage difference is checked by the following equations.

[25.U_Lv]UB
[25.U_Lv] UL
[25.U_Diff]|UB- UL|
2.

The phase difference is checked by the following equations.

UB.UL cos0
UB.UL sin([25.phi_Diff])UB.UL sin([25.phi_Diff])
Where,
is phase difference between UB and UL
3.

The frequency difference is checked by the following equations.

|f(UB)-f(UL)|[25.f_Diff]
If frequency check is disabled (i.e. [25.En_fDiffChk] is set as 0), a detected maximum slip cycle
can also be determined by the following equation based on phase difference setting and the
synchronism check time setting:
f =[25.phi_Diff]/(180[25.t_SynChk])
Where:
f is slip cycle
If frequency check is enabled (i.e. [25.En_fDiffChk] is set as 1), then [25.t_SynChk] can be set to
be a very small value (default value is 50ms).
3.10.2.1 Single Busbar Arrangement
Voltage selection function is not required for this busbar arrangement, the connection of the
voltage signals and respective VT MCB auxiliary contacts to the device is shown in the Figure
3.10-2 and Figure 3.10-3.
1.

Three-phase bus voltage used for protection

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-34
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory
Bus

VTS.En_LineVT=0

UL1

Ua
CB

Ub
Uc

MCB_VT_UL1

UB1
MCB_VT_UB1

Line

Figure 3.10-2 Voltage connection for single busbar arrangement

2.

Three-phase line voltage used for protection


Bus

VTS.En_LineVT=1

CB

UB1
MCB_VT_UB1

UL1

Ua
Ub
Uc

MCB_VT_UL1

Line

Figure 3.10-3 Voltage connection for single busbar arrangement

In the figures, the setting [VTS.En_LineVT] is used to determine protection voltage signals (Ua, Ub,
Uc) from line VT or bus VT according to the condition.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-35
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

3.10.2.2 Double Busbars Arrangement


Bus2
Bus1

B1D B2D

UB1
MCB_VT_UB1
UB2
MCB_VT_UB2
UB1D_Clsd
UB1D_Open
UB2D_Clsd
UB2D_Open

UL1

CB

Ua
Ub

Line

Uc

MCB_VT_UL1

Figure 3.10-4 Voltage connection for double busbars arrangement

For double busbars arrangement, selection of appropriate voltage signals from Bus 1 and Bus 2
for synchronizing are required. Line VT signal is taken as reference to check synchronizing with
the voltage after voltage selection function. Selection approach is as follows.
For the disconnector positions, the normally open (NO) and normally closed (NC) contacts of the
disconnector for bus 1 and bus 2 are required to determine the disconnector open and closed
positions. The voltage selection logic is as follows.
BI

&

UB1D_Clsd

UB1_Sel
BI

BI

UB1D_Open

&

UB2D_Clsd

Voltage
Selection Logic
UB2_Sel

BI

UB2D_Open

&
Invalid_Sel
UB1

UB

UB2

Figure 3.10-5 Voltage selection for double busbars arrangement

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-36
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

After acquiring the disconnector open and closed positions of double busbars, use the following
logic to acquire the feeder voltage of double busbars.
DS2 CLOSED

DS2 OPEN

DS1 CLOSED

Keep original value

Voltage from Bus 1 VT (UB1_Sel=1)

DS1 OPEN

Voltage from Bus 2 VT (UB2_Sel=1)

Keep original value

DS1 is disconnector of Bus 1


DS2 is disconnector of Bus 2
If voltage selection is invalid (Invalid_Sel=1), keep original selection and without switchover.
3.10.2.3 One and A Half Breakers Arrangement
For one and a half breakers arrangement, selection of appropriate voltage signals among Line1
VT, Line2 VT and Bus 2 VT as reference voltage to check synchronizing with Bus 1 voltage signal
for closing breaker at Bus 1 side.
Bus1

UB1
MCB_VT_UB1
UB1D_Clsd
UB1D_Open

UL1

B1D

Ua

Line 1

Ub
Uc

MCB_VT_UL1
UL1D_Clsd
UL1D_Open

L1D

Line 2

UL2
MCB_VT_UL2
UL2D_Clsd
UL2D_Open
UB2D_Clsd
UB2D_Open

L2D

UB2
MCB_VT_UB2
B2D
Bus2

Figure 3.10-6 Voltage connection for one and a half breakers arrangement

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-37
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

For the circuit breaker at bus side (take bus breaker of bus 1 as an example), the device acquires
the disconnector open and closed positions of two feeders and bus 2. The voltage selection logic
is as follows.
BI

UL1D_Clsd

BI

UL1D_Open

BI

UL2D_Clsd

BI

UL2D_Open

BI

UB2D_Clsd

BI

UB2D_Open

&
UL1_Sel

&
&

UL2_Sel

&
&

UB2_Sel

&
Invalid_Sel

UL1

UL

UL2
UB2

Figure 3.10-7 Voltage selection for one and a half breakers arrangement

For the tie breaker, the device acquires the disconnector open and closed positions of two feeders
and two busbars. Either Line 1 VT or Bus 1 VT signal is selected as reference voltage to check
synchronizing with the selected voltage between Line 2 VT and Bus 2 VT. The voltage selection
logic is as follows.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-38
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

BI

&

UL1D_Clsd

UL1_Sel
BI

UL1D_Open

BI

UB1D_Clsd

BI

UB1D_Open

&
&

UB1_Sel

&

UL1

UL

UB1

BI

&

UL2D_Clsd

UL2_Sel
BI

UL2D_Open

BI

UB2D_Clsd

BI

UB2D_Open

&
&

UB2_Sel

>=1
&

UL2

Invalid_Sel

UB

UB2

Figure 3.10-8 Voltage selection for one and a half breakers arrangement

When the voltage selection fails (including VT circuit failure and MCB failure), the device will issue
the corresponding failure signal. If the voltage selection is invalid (Invalid_Sel=1), keep original
selection and without switchover.
In order to simplify description, one of the two voltages used in the synchrocheck (synchronism check
and dead charge check) which obtained after voltage selection function is regarded as line voltage,
and another is bus voltage.
3.10.2.4 Synchronism Voltage Circuit Failure Supervision
If synchronism voltage from line VT or busbar VT is used for auto-reclosing with synchronism or
dead line or busbar check, the synchronism voltage is monitored.
If the circuit breaker is in closed state (52b of three phases are de-energized), but the synchronism
voltage is lower than the setting [25.U_Lv], it means that synchronism voltage circuit fails and an
alarm [25.Alm_VTS_UB] or [25.Alm_VTS_UL] will be issued with a time delay of 10s.
If auto-reclosing is disabled, or the logic setting [25.En_NoChk] is set as 1, synchronism voltage
is not required and synchronism voltage circuit failure supervision will be disabled.
When synchronism voltage circuit failure is detected, function of synchronism check and dead
check in auto-reclosing logic will be disabled.
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-39
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

After synchronism voltage reverted to normal condition, the alarm will be reset automatically with a
time delay of 10s.
3.10.3 I/O Signals
Table 3.10-1 I/O signals of synchrocheck
No.

Input Signal

Description

25.Blk_Chk

25.Blk_SynChk

25.Blk_DdChk

25.Start_Chk

25.Blk_VTS_UB

VT circuit supervision (UB) is blocked

25.Blk_VTS_UL

VT circuit supervision (UL) is blocked

25.MCB_VT_UB

Binary input for VT MCB auxiliary contact (UB)

25.MCB_VT_UL

Binary input for VT MCB auxiliary contact (UL)

No.

Input signal of blocking synchrocheck function for AR.


Input signal of blocking synchronism check for AR. If the value is 1, the output of
synchronism check is 0.
Input signal of blocking dead charge check for AR.
Input signal of starting synchronism check, usually it was starting signal of AR
from auto-reclosing module.

Output Signal

Description

UL1_Sel

To select voltage of Line 1

UL2_Sel

To select voltage of Line 2

UB1_Sel

To select voltage of Bus 1

UB2_Sel

To select voltage of Bus 2

Invalid_Sel

Voltage selection is invalid.

25.Ok_fDiffChk

25.Ok_UDiffChk

25.Ok_phiDiffChk

25.Ok_DdL_DdB

Dead line and dead bus condition is met

10

25.Ok_DdL_LvB

Dead line and live bus condition is met

11

25.Ok_LvL_DdB

Live line and dead bus condition is met

12

25.Chk_LvL

Line voltage is greater than the voltage setting [25.U_Lv]

13

25.Chk_DdL

Line voltage is smaller than the voltage setting [25.U_Dd]

14

25.Chk_LvB

Bus voltage is greater than the voltage setting [25.U_Lv]

15

25.Chk_DdB

Bus voltage is smaller than the voltage setting [25.U_Dd]

16

25.Ok_DdChk

To indicate that dead charge check condition of AR is met

17

25.Ok_SynChk

To indicate that synchronism check condition of AR is met

18

25.Ok_Chk

To indicate that synchrocheck condition of AR is met

19

25.Alm_VTS_UB

Synchronism voltage circuit is abnormal (UB)

20

25.Alm_VTS_UL

Synchronism voltage circuit is abnormal (UL)

21

f_Prot

Frequency of the voltage used by protection calculation

22

f_Syn

Frequency of the voltage used by synchrocheck

To indicate that frequency difference condition for synchronism check of AR is


met, frequency difference between UB and UL is smaller than [25.f_Diff].
To indicate that voltage difference condition for synchronism check of AR is met,
voltage difference between UB and UL is smaller than [25.U_Diff]
To indicate phase difference condition for synchronism check of AR is met, phase
difference between UB and UL is smaller than [25.phi_Diff].

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-40
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory
23

u_Diff

Voltage difference for synchronism check

24

f_Diff

Frequency difference for synchronism check

25

phi_Diff

Phase difference for synchronism check

3.10.4 Logic
These logic diagrams give the introduction to the working principles of the synchronism check and
dead charge check.
3.10.4.1 Synchronism Check Logic
The frequency difference, voltage difference, and phase difference of voltages from both sides of
the circuit breaker are calculated in the device, they are used as input conditions of the
synchronism check.
When the synchronism check function is enabled and the voltages of both ends meets the
requirements of the voltage difference, phase difference, and frequency difference, and there is no
synchronism check blocking signal, it is regarded that the synchronism check conditions are met.
SIG

25.Blk_Chk

SIG

25.Blk_SynChk

EN

[25.En_SynChk]

SIG

25.Start_Chk

SIG

UB>[25.U_Lv]

SIG

UL>[25.U_Lv]

SIG

25.Ok_UDiffChk

SIG

25.Ok_phiDiffChk

SIG

25.Ok_fDiffChk

>=1
&

&

&
50ms

0ms

&

[25.t_SynChk]

0ms

25.Ok_SynChk

Figure 3.10-9 Synchronism check

3.10.4.2 Dead Charge Check Logic


The dead charge check conditions have three types, namely, live-bus and dead-line check,
dead-bus and live-line check and dead-bus and dead-line check. The above three modes can be
enabled and disabled by the corresponding logic settings. The device can calculate the measured
bus voltage and line voltage at both sides of the circuit breaker and compare them with the
settings [25.U_Lv] and [25.U_Dd]. When the voltage is higher than [25.U_Lv], the bus/line is
regarded as live. When the voltage is lower than [25.U_Dd], the bus/line is regarded as dead.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-41
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory
SIG

25.Blk_Chk

SIG

25.Blk_DdChk

SIG

25.Start_Chk

EN

[25.En_DdL_DdB]

>=1
&
&
[25.t_DdChk]

>=1

0ms

25.Ok_DdChk

&
25.Ok_DdL_DdB

EN

[25.En_DdL_LvB]

&
25.Ok_DdL_LvB

EN

[25.En_LvL_DdB]

SIG

UL>[25.U_Lv]

SIG

UL<[25.U_Dd]

SIG

UB>[25.U_Lv]

SIG

UB<[25.U_Dd]

SIG

25.Alm_VTS_UB

SIG

25.Alm_VTS_UL

&
25.Ok_LvL_DdB

>=1

Figure 3.10-10 Dead charge check logic

3.10.4.3 Synchrocheck Logic


SIG

25.Ok_SynChk

EN

25.En_NoChk

SIG

25.Ok_DdChk

>=1
25.Ok_Chk

Figure 3.10-11 Synchrocheck logic

This device comprises two synchrocheck modules, correspond to circuit breaker 1 and circuit
breaker 2 respectively.
3.10.5 Settings
Table 3.10-2 Settings of synchrocheck
No.

Name

Range

Step

Unit

Remark
Voltage selecting mode of line.
0: A-phase voltage

25.Opt_Source_UL

0~5

1: B-phase voltage
2: C-phase voltage
3: AB-phase voltage
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-42
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory
4: BC-phase voltage
5: CA-phase voltage
Voltage selecting mode of bus.
0: A-phase voltage
1: B-phase voltage
2

25.Opt_Source_UB

0~5

2: C-phase voltage
3: AB-phase voltage
4: BC-phase voltage
5: CA-phase voltage

25.U_Dd

0.05Un~0.8Un

0.001

Voltage threshold of dead check

25.U_Lv

0.5Un~Un

0.001

Voltage threshold of live check

25.K_Usyn

0.20-5.00

25.phi_Diff

0~ 89

Compensation

coefficient

synchronous voltage
1

Deg

Phase

difference

25.phi_Comp

0~359

Deg

limit

of

synchronism check for AR


Compensation

for

difference

for

phase

between

two

synchronous voltages
8

25.f_Diff

0.02~1.00

25.U_Diff

0.02Un~0.8Un

10

25.t_DeadChk

0.010~25.000

11

25.t_SynChk

0.010~25.000

0.01

Hz

Frequency

difference

25.En_fDiffChk

of

synchronism check for AR


Voltage

difference

limit

of

synchronism check for AR


Time delay to confirm dead check
condition
Time

delay

to

confirm

synchronism check condition


Enabling/disabling

12

limit

frequency

difference check

0 or 1

0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling

13

25.En_SynChk

synchronism

check

0 or 1

0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling dead line and

14

25.En_DdL_DdB

dead bus (DLDB) check

0 or 1

0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling dead line and

15

25.En_DdL_LvB

live bus (DLLB) check

0 or 1

0: disable
1: enable

16

25.En_LvL_DdB

0 or 1

Enabling/disabling live line and

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-43
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory
dead bus (LLDB) check
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling AR without any
17

25.En_NoChk

check

0 or 1

0: disable
1: enable

3.11 Automatic Reclosure


3.11.1 General Application
To maintain the integrity of the overall electrical transmission system, the device is installed on the
transmission system to isolate faulted segments during system disturbances. Faults caused by
lightning, wind, or tree branches could be transient in nature and may disappear once the circuit is
de-energized. According to statistics, for overhead transmission line, 80%~90% of the faults on
overhead lines are the transient faults. Auto-reclosing systems are installed to restore the faulted
section of the transmission system once the fault is extinguished (providing it is a transient fault).
For certain transmission systems, auto-reclosure is used to improve system stability by restoring
critical transmission paths as soon as possible.
Besides overhead lines, other equipment failure, such as cables, busbar, transformer fault and so
on, are generally permanent fault, and auto-reclosing is not initiated after faulty feeder is tripped.
For some mixed circuits, such as overhead line with a transformer unit, hybrid transmission lines,
etc., it is required to ensure that auto-reclosing is only initiated for faults overhead line section, or
make a choice according to the situation.
3.11.2 Function Description
This auto-reclosing logic can be used with either integrated device or external device. When the
auto-reclosure is used with integrated device, the internal protection logic can initiate AR,
moreover, a tripping contact from external device can be connected to the device via opto-coupler
input to initiate integrated AR function.
When external auto-reclosure is used, the device can output some configurable output to initiate
external AR, such as, contact of initiating AR, phase-segregated tripping contact, single-phase
tripping contact, three-phase tripping contact and contact of blocking AR. According to
requirement, these contacts can be selectively connected to external auto-reclosure device to
initiate AR.
For phase-segregated circuit breaker, AR mode can be 1-pole AR for single-phase fault and
3-pole AR for multi-phase fault, or always 3-pole AR for any kinds of fault according to system
requirement. For persistent fault or multi-shot AR number preset value is reached, the device will
send final tripping command. The device will provide appropriate tripping command based on
faulty phase selection if adopting 1-pole AR.
AR can be enabled or disabled by logic setting or external signal via binary input. When AR is
enabled, the device will output contact [79.On], otherwise, output contact [79.Off]. After some
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-44
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

reclosing conditions, such as, CB position, CB pressure and so on, is satisfied, the device will
output contact [79.Ready].
According to requirement, the device can be set as one-shot or multi-shot AR. When adopting
multi-shot AR, the AR mode of first time reclosing can be set as 1-pole AR, 3-pole AR or 1/3-pole
AR. The rest AR mode is only 3-pole AR and its number is determined by the maximum 3-pole
reclosing number.
For one-shot AR or first reclosing of multi-shot AR, AR mode can be selected by logic setting
[79.En_1PAR], [79.En_3PAR] and [79.En_1P/3PAR] or external signal via binary inputs. When
3-pole or 1/3-pole AR mode is selected, the following three types of check modes can be selected:
dead charge check, synchronism check and no check.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-45
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

3.11.3 Function Block Diagram


79
79.En

79.On

79.Blk

79.Off

79.Sel_1PAR

79.Close

79.Sel_3PAR

79.Ready

79.Sel_1P/3PAR

79.AR_Blkd

79.Trp

79.Active

79.Trp3P

79.Inprog

79.TrpA

79.Inprog_1P

79.TrpB

79.Inprog_3P

79.TrpC

79.Inprog_3PS1

79.Lockout

79.Inprog_3PS2

79.PLC_Lost

79.Inprog_3PS3

79.WaitMaster

79.Inprog_3PS4

79.CB_Healthy

79.WaitToSlave

79.Clr_Counter

79.Prem_Trp1P

79.Ok_Chk

79.Prem_Trp3P
79.Rcls_Status
79.Fail_Rcls
79.Succ_Rcls
79.Fail_Chk
79.Mode_1PAR
79.Mode_3PAR
79.Mode_1/3PAR

3.11.4 I/O Signals


Table 3.11-1 I/O signals of auto-reclosing
No.

Input Signal

79.En

79.Blk

79.Sel_1PAR

Description
Binary input for enabling AR. If the logic setting [79.En_ExtCtrl]=1,
enabling AR will be controlled by the external signal via binary input
Binary input for disabling AR. If the logic setting [79.En_ExtCtrl]=1,
disabling AR will be controlled by the external input
Input signal for selecting 1-pole AR mode of corresponding circuit
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-46
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory
breaker
Input signal for selecting 3-pole AR mode of corresponding circuit

79.Sel_3PAR

79.Sel_1P/3PAR

79.Trp

Input signal of single-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR

79.Trp3P

Input signal of three-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR

79.TrpA

Input signal of A-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR

79.TrpB

Input signal of B-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR

10

79.TrpC

Input signal of C-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR

breaker
Input signal for selecting 1/3-pole AR mode of corresponding circuit
breaker

Input signal of blocking reclosing, usually it is connected with the


11

79.LockOut

operating signals of definite-time protection, transformer protection


and busbar differential protection, etc.

12

79.PLC_Lost

13

79.WaitMaster

14

79.CB_Healthy

15

79.Clr_Counter

Clear the reclosing counter

16

79.Ok_Chk

Synchrocheck condition of AR is met

No.

Input signal of indicating the alarm signal that signal channel is lost
Input signal of waiting for reclosing permissive signal from master
AR (when reclosing multiple circuit breakers)
The input for indicating whether circuit breaker has enough energy to
perform the close function

Output Signal

Description

79.On

Automatic reclosure is enabled

79.Off

Automatic reclosure is disabled

79.Close

Output of auto-reclosing signal

79.Ready

Automatic reclosure have been ready for reclosing cycle

79.AR_Blkd

Automatic reclosure is blocked

79.Active

Automatic reclosing logic is actived

79.Inprog

Automatic reclosing cycle is in progress

79.Inprog_1P

The first 1-pole AR cycle is in progress

79.Inprog_3P

3-pole AR cycle is in progress

10

79.Inprog_3PS1

First 3-pole AR cycle is in progress

11

79.Inprog_3PS2

Second 3-pole AR cycle is in progress

12

79.Inprog_3PS3

Third 3-pole AR cycle is in progress

13

79.Inprog_3PS4

Fourth 3-pole AR cycle is in progress

14

79.WaitToSlave

15

79.Prem_Trp1P

16

79.Prem_Trp3P

17

79.Rcls_Status

18

79.Fail_Rcls

Waiting signal of automatic reclosing which will be sent to slave


(when reclosing multiple circuit breakers)
Single-phase circuit breaker will be tripped once protection device
operates
Three-phase circuit breaker will be tripped once protection device
operates
Automatic reclosure status (0: AR is ready; 1: AR is in progress; 2:
AR is successful)
Auto-reclosing fails

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-47
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory
19

79.Succ_Rcls

Auto-reclosing is successful

20

79.Fail_Chk

Synchrocheck for AR fails

21

79.Mode_1PAR

Output of 1-pole AR mode

22

79.Mode_3PAR

Output of 3-pole AR mode

23

79.Mode_1/3PAR

Output of 1/3-pole AR mode


Automatic reclosure counter

24

79.N_Total_Rcls Total

Recorded number of all reclosing attempts

25

79.N_Total_Rcls 1-pole Shot 1

Recorded number of first 1-pole reclosing attempts

26

79.N_Total_Rcls 3-pole Shot 1

Recorded number of first 3-pole reclosing attempts

27

79.N_Total_Rcls 3-pole Shot 2

Recorded number of second 3-pole reclosing attempts

28

79.N_Total_Rcls 3-pole Shot 3

Recorded number of third 3-pole reclosing attempts

29

79.N_Total_Rcls 3-pole Shot 4

Recorded number of fourth 3-pole reclosing attempts

3.11.5 Logic
3.11.5.1 AR Ready
For the first reclosing of multi-shot AR, AR mode can be 1-pole AR or 3-pole AR, however, the
selection is valid only to the first reclosing, after that it can only be 3-pole AR.
When logic setting [79.SetOpt] is set as 1, AR mode is determined by logic settings. When logic
setting [79.SetOpt] is set as 0, AR mode is determined by external signal via binary inputs.
An auto-reclosure must be ready to operate before performing reclosing. The output signal
[79.Ready] means that the auto-reclosure can perform at least one time of reclosing function, i.e.,
breaker open-close-open.
When the device is energized or after the settings are modified, the following conditions must be
met before the reclaim time begins:
1.

AR function is enabled.

2.

The circuit breaker is ready, such as, normal storage energy and no low pressure signal.

3.

The duration of the circuit breaker in closed position before fault occurrence is not less than
the setting [79.t_CBClsd].

4.

There is no block signal of auto-reclosing.

After the auto-reclosure operates, the auto-reclosure must reset, i.e., [79.Active]=0, in addition to
the above conditions for reclosing again.
The logic of AR ready is shown in Figure 3.11-1.
When there is a fault on an overhead line, the concerned circuit breakers will be tripped normally.
After fault is cleared, the tripping command will drop off immediately. In case the circuit breaker is
in failure, etc., and the tripping signal of the circuit breaker maintains and in excess of the time
delay [79.t_PersistTrp], AR will be blocked, as shown in the following figure.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-48
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

SIG

Any tripping signal

SIG

79.LockOut

SIG

1-pole AR Initiation

SIG

Any tripping signal

En

[79.En_PDF_Blk]

SIG

79.Sel_1PAR

En

[79.N_Rcls]=1

SIG

Three phase trip

SIG

Phase A open

SIG

Phase B open

[79.t_PersistTrp] 0ms

>=1
0ms [79.t_DDO_BlkAR]
[79.t_SecFault] 0ms

&

&
>=1
79.AR_Blkd

&
&

&

>=1

&
SIG

Phase C open

SIG

CB closed position

[79.t_CBClsd]

SIG

79.Active

>=1

SIG

Any tripping signal

&

>=1

&

[79.CB_Healthy]

0ms

SIG

79.AR_Blkd

>=1

SIG

BlockAR

SIG

79.Fail_Rcls

SIG

79.Fail_Chk

SIG

Last shot is made

EN

[79.En]

EN

[79.En_ExtCtrl]

BI

100ms

[79.t_CBReady]

&

79.Ready

>=1
&
>=1

&
>=1
79.On

&
SIG

79.En

SIG

79.Blk

&

Figure 3.11-1 Logic diagram of AR ready

The input signal [79.CB_Healthy] must be energized before auto-reclosure gets ready. Because
most circuit breakers can finish one complete process: open-closed-open, it is necessary that
circuit breaker has enough energy before reclosing. When the time delay of AR is exhausted, AR
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-49
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

will be blocked if the input signal [79.CB_Healthy] is still not energized within time delay
[79.t_CBReady]. If this function is not required, the input signal [79.CB_Healthy] can be not to
configure, and its state will be thought as 1 by default.
When auto-reclosure is blocked, auto-reclosing failure, synchrocheck failure or last shot is
reached, or when the internal blocking condition of AR is met (such as, zone 3 of distance
protection operates, the device operates for multi-phase fault, three-phase fault and so on. These
flags of blocking AR have been configured in the device, additional configuration is not required.),
auto-reclosure will be discharged immediately and next auto-reclosing will be disabled.
When the input signal [79.LockOut] is energized, auto-reclosure will be blocked immediately. The
blocking flag of AR will be also controlled by the internal blocking condition of AR. When the
blocking flag of AR is valid, auto-reclosure will be blocked immediately.
When a fault occurs under pole disagreement condition, blocking AR can be enabled or disabled.
The time delay [79.t_SecFault] is used to discriminate another fault which begins after 1-pole AR
initiated. AR will be blocked if another fault happens after this time delay if the logic setting
[79.En_PDF_Blk] is set as 1, and 3-pole AR will be initiated if [79.En_PDF_Blk] is set as 1.
AR will be blocked immediately once the blocking condition of AR appears, but the blocking
condition of AR will drop off with a time delay [79.t_DDO_BlkAR] after blocking signal disappears.
When one-shot and 1-pole AR is enabled, auto-reclosure will be blocked immediately if there are
binary inputs of multi-phase CB position is energized.
When any protection element operates to trip, the device will output a signal [79.Active] until AR
drop off (Reset Command). Any tripping signal can be from external protection device or internal
protection element.
AR function can be enabled by internal logic settings of AR mode or external signal via binary
inputs in addition to internal logic setting [79.En]. When logic setting [79.En_ExtCtrl] is set as 1,
AR enable are determined by external signal via binary inputs and logic settings. When logic
setting [79.En_ExtCtrl] set as 0, AR enable are determined only by logic settings.
For one-shot reclosing, if 1-pole AR mode is selected, auto-reclosure will reset when there is
three-phase tripping signal or input signal of multi-phase open position.
3.11.5.2 AR Initiation
AR mode can be selected by external signal via binary inputs or internal logic settings. If the logic
setting [79.SetOpt] set as 1, AR mode is determined by the internal logic settings. If the logic
settings [79.SetOpt] set as 0, AR mode is determined by the external inputs.
1.

AR initiated by tripping signal of line protection

AR can be initiated by tripping signal of line protection, and the tripping signal may be from internal
trip signal or external trip signal.
When selecting 1-pole AR or 1/3-pole AR, line single-phase fault will trigger 1-pole AR. When AR
is ready to reclosing (79.Ready=1) and the single-phase tripping command is received, this
single-phase tripping command will be kept in the device, and 1-pole AR will be initiated after the
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-50
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

single-phase tripping command drops off. The single-phase tripping command kept in the device
will be cleared after the completion of auto-reclosing sequence (Reset Command). Its logic is
shown in Figure 3.11-2.
SIG

Reset Command

&
>=1

SIG

Single-phase Trip

&
SIG

79.Ready

SIG

79.Sel_1PAR

SIG

79.Sel_1P/3PAR

&
1-pole AR Initiation

>=1

Figure 3.11-2 Single-phase tripping initiating AR

When selecting 3-pole AR or 1/3-pole AR, three-phase tripping will trigger 3-pole AR. When AR is
ready to reclosing (79.Ready=1) and the three-phase tripping command is received, this
three-phase tripping command will be kept in the device, and 3-pole AR will be initiated after the
three-phase tripping command drops off. The three-phase tripping command kept in the device will
be cleared after the completion of auto-reclosing sequence. (Reset Command) Its logic is shown
in Figure 3.11-3.
SIG

Reset Command

&
>=1

SIG

Three-phase Trip

&
SIG

79.Ready

SIG

79.Sel_3PAR

SIG

79.Sel_1P/3PAR

&
3-pole AR Initiation

>=1

Figure 3.11-3 Three-phase tripping initiating AR

2.

AR initiated by CB state

A logic setting [79.En_CBInit] is available for selection that AR is initiated by CB state. Under
normal conditions, when AR is ready to reclosing (79.Ready=1), AR will be initiated if circuit
breaker is open and corresponding phase current is nil. AR initiated by CB state can be divided
into initiating 1-pole AR and 3-pole AR, their logics are shown in Figure 3.11-4 and Figure 3.11-5
respectively. Usually normally closed contact of circuit breaker is used to reflect CB state.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-51
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

SIG

Phase A open

SIG

Phase B open

>=1
&
&

&
&

SIG

Phase C open

EN

[79.En_CBInit]

SIG

79.Ready

SIG

79.Sel_1PAR

SIG

79.Sel_1P/3PAR

1-pole AR Initiation

>=1

Figure 3.11-4 1-pole AR initiation

SIG

Phase A open

SIG

Phase B open

SIG

Phase C open

EN

[79.En_CBInit]

SIG

79.Ready

EN

[79.Sel_1PAR]

EN

[79.Sel_1P/3PAR]

&

&

&
3-pole AR Initiation

>=1

Figure 3.11-5 3-pole AR initiation

3.11.5.3 AR Reclosing
After AR is initiated, the device will output the initiating contact of AR. For 1-pole AR, in order to
prevent pole discrepancy protection from maloperation under pole discrepancy conditions, the
contact of 1-pole AR initiation can be used to block pole discrepancy protection.
When the dead time delay of AR expires after AR is initiated, as for 1-pole AR, the result of
synchronism check will not be judged, and reclosing command will be output directly. As far as the
3-pole AR, if the synchronism check is enabled, the release of reclosing command shall be subject
to the result of synchronism check. After the dead time delay of AR expires, if the synchronism
check is still unsuccessful within the time delay [79.t_wait_Chk], the signal of synchronism check
failure (79.Fail_Syn) will be output and the AR will be blocked. If 3-pole AR with no-check is
enabled, the condition of synchronism check success (25.Ok_Chk) will always be established.
And the signal of synchronism check success (25.Ok_Chk) from the synchronism check logic can
be applied by auto-reclosing function inside the device or external auto-reclosure device.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-52
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

>=1
79.Inprog

SIG

1-pole AR Initiation

[79.t_Dd_1PS1]

0ms

SIG

3-pole AR Initiation

[79.t_Dd_3PS1]

0ms

>=1
AR Pulse

&

79.Inprog_3P
79.Inprog_1P

&
[79.t_Wait_Chk]

0ms

79.Fail_Chk

25.Ok_Chk

SIG

Figure 3.11-6 One-shot AR

In case pilot protection adopting permissive scheme, when the communication channel is
abnormal, pilot protection will be disabled. In the process of channel abnormality, an internal fault
occurs on the transmission line, backup protection at both ends of line will operate to trip the circuit
breaker of each end. The operation time of backup protection at both ends of the line is possibly
non-accordant, whilst the time delay of AR needs to consider the arc-extinguishing and insulation
recovery ability for transient fault, so the time delay of AR shall be considered comprehensively
according to the operation time of the device at both ends. When the communication channel of
main protection is abnormal (input signal [79.PLC_Lost] is energized), and the logic setting
[79.En_AddDly] is set as 1, then the dead time delay of AR shall be equal to the original dead
time delay of AR plus the extra time delay [79.t_AddDly], so as to ensure the recovery of insulation
intensity of fault point when reclosing after transient fault. This extra time delay [t_ExtendDly] is
only valid for the first shot AR.

>=1
SIG

BI

Any tripping signal

&
&

[79.PLC_Lost]

SIG

79.Active

EN

[79.En_AddDly]

&
Extend AR time

Figure 3.11-7 Extra time delay and blocking logic of AR

Reclosing pulse length may be set through the setting [79.t_DDO_AR]. For the circuit breaker
without anti-pump interlock, a logic setting [79.En_CutPulse] is available to control the reclosing
pulse. When this function is enabled, if the device operates to trip during reclosing, the reclosing
pulse will drop off immediately, so as to prevent multi-shot reclosing onto fault. After the reclosing
command is issued, AR will drop off with time delay [79.t_Reclaim], and can carry out next
reclosing.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-53
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory
SIG

AR Pulse

0ms

50ms

>=1
79.AR_Out

[79.t_PW_AR]
[79.t_Reclaim]
SIG

Single-phase Trip

SIG

Three-phase Trip

EN

[79.En_CutPulse]

>=1

0ms

Reset Command

&
&

Figure 3.11-8 Reclosing output logic

The reclaim timer defines a time from the issue of the reclosing command, after which the
reclosing function resets. Should a new trip occur during this time, it is treated as a continuation of
the first fault. The reclaim timer is started when the CB closing command is given.
3.11.5.4 Reclosing Failure and Success
For transient fault, the fault will be cleared after the device operates to trip. After the reclosing
command is issued, AR will drop off after time delay [79.t_Reclaim], and can carry out next
reclosing. When the reclosing is unsuccessful or the reclosing condition is not met after AR
initiated, the reclosing will be considered as unsuccessful, including the following cases.
1.

For one-shot AR, if the tripping command is received again within reclaim time after the
reclosing pulse is issued, the reclosing shall be considered as unsuccessful.

2.

For multi-shot AR, if the reclosing times are equal to the setting value of AR number and the
tripping command is received again after the last reclosing pulse is issued, the reclosing shall
be considered as unsuccessful.

3.

The logic setting [79.En_FailCheck] is available to judge whether the reclosing is successful
by CB state, when it is set as 1. If CB is still in open position with a time delay [79.t_Fail] after
the reclosing pulse is issued, the reclosing shall be considered as unsuccessful. For this case,
the device will issue a signal (79.Fail_Rcls) to indicate that the reclosing is unsuccessful, and
this signal will drop off after (Reset Command). AR will be blocked if the reclosing shall be
considered as unsuccessful.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-54
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory
SIG

Any tripping command

SIG

Last shot is made

SIG

79.Inprog

SIG

79.AR_Blkd

&
>=1
0ms

200ms

>=1
79.Fail_Rcls

&

>=1
SIG

AR Pulse

SIG

CB closed

EN

[79.En_FailCheck]

&
[79.t_Fail]

0ms

&
&
0

[79.t_Fail]

&

79.Succ_Rcls

Figure 3.11-9 Reclosing failure and success

After unsuccessful AR is confirmed, AR will be blocked. AR will not enter into the ready state
unless the circuit breaker position drops off , and can only begin to enter into the ready state again
after the circuit breaker is closed.
3.11.5.5 Reclosing Numbers Control
The device may be set up into one-shot or multi-shot AR. Through the setting [79.N_Rcls], the
maximum number of reclosing attempts may be set up to 4 times. Generally, only one-shot AR is
selected. Some corresponding settings may be hidden if one-shot AR is selected.
1.

1-pole AR

[79.N_Rcls]=1 means one-shot reclosing. For one-shot 1-pole AR mode, 1-pole AR will be initiated
only for single-phase fault and respective faulty phase selected, otherwise, AR will be blocked. For
single-phase transient fault on the line, line protection device will operate to trip and 1-pole AR is
initiated. After the dead time delay for 1-pole AR is expired, the device will send reclosing pulse,
and then the auto-reclosure will drop off after the time delay [79.t_Reclaim] to ready for the next
reclosing. For permanent fault, the device will operate to trip again after the reclosing is performed,
and the device will output the signal of reclosing failure [79.Fail_Rcls].
[79.N_Rcls]>1 means multi-shot reclosing. For multi-shot reclosing in 1-pole AR mode, the first
reclosing is 1-pole AR, and the subsequent reclosing can only be 3-pole AR. For single-phase
transient fault on the line, line protection device will operate to trip and then 1-pole AR is initiated.
After the dead time delay of the first reclosing is expired, the device will send reclosing pulse, and
then the auto-reclosure will drop off after the time delay [79.t_Reclaim] to ready for the next
reclosing. For permanent fault, the device will operate to trip again after the reclosing is performed,
and then 3-pole AR is initiated. At this time, the time delay applies the setting [79.t_Dd_3PS2].
After the time delay is expired, if the reclosing condition is met, the device will send reclosing pulse.
The sequence is repeated until the reclosing is successful or the maximum permit reclosing
number [79.N_Rcls] is reached. If the first fault is multi-phase fault, the device operates to trip
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-55
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

three-phase and initiate 3-pole AR. At this time, the time delay applies the setting [79.t_Dd_3PS1].
For the possible reclosing times of 3-pole AR in 1-pole AR mode, please refer to Table 3.11-2.
2.

3-pole AR

[79.N_Rcls]=1 means one-shot reclosing. For one-shot 3-pole AR mode, line protection device will
operate to trip when a transient fault occurs on the line and 3-pole AR will be initiated. After the
dead time delay for 3-pole AR is expired, the device will send reclosing pulse, and then the
auto-reclosure will drop off after the time delay [79.t_Reclaim] to ready for the next reclosing. For
permanent fault, the device will operate to trip again after the reclosing is performed, and the
device will output the signal of reclosing failure [79.Fail_Rcls].
[79.N_Rcls]>1 means multi-shot reclosing. For multi-shot reclosing in 3-pole AR mode, line
protection device will operate to trip when a transient fault occurs on the line and 3-pole AR will be
initiated. After the dead time delay of the first reclosing is expired, the device will send reclosing
pulse, and then the auto-reclosure will drop off after the time delay [79.t_Reclaim] to ready for the
next reclosing. For permanent fault, the device will operate to trip again after the reclosing is
performed, and then 3-pole AR is initiated after the tripping contact drops off. After the time delay
for AR is expired, the device will send reclosing pulse. The sequence is repeated until the
reclosing is successful or the maximum permit reclosing number [79.N_Rcls] is reached.
3.

1/3-pole AR

[79.N_Rcls]=1 means one-shot reclosing. For one-shot 1/3-pole AR mode, line protection device
will operate to trip when a transient fault occurs on the line and 1-pole AR will be initiated for
single-phase fault and 3-pole AR will be initiated for multi-phase fault. After respective dead time
delay for AR is expired, the device will send reclosing pulse, and then the auto-reclosure will drop
off after the time delay [79.t_Reclaim] to ready for the next reclosing. For permanent fault, the
device will operate to trip again after the reclosing is performed, and the device will output the
signal of reclosing failure [79.Fail_Rcls].
[79.N_Rcls]>1 means multi-shot reclosing. For multi-shot reclosing in 1/3-pole AR mode, line
protection device will operate to trip when a transient fault occurs on the line and AR will be
initiated. After the dead time delay of the first reclosing is expired, the device will send reclosing
pulse, and then the auto-reclosure will drop off after the time delay [79.t_Reclaim] to ready for the
next reclosing. For permanent fault, the device will operate to trip again after the reclosing is
performed, and then 3-pole AR is initiated after the tripping contact drops off. After the time delay
for AR is expired, the device will send reclosing pulse. The sequence is repeated until the
reclosing is successful or the maximum permit reclosing number [79.N_Rcls] is reached. For the
possible reclosing times of 3-pole AR in 1/3-pole AR mode, please refer to Table 3.11-2.
The table below shows the number of reclose attempts with respect to the settings and AR modes.
Table 3.11-2 Reclosing number

Setting Value

1-pole AR

3-pole AR

1/3-pole AR

N-1AR

N-3AR

N-1AR

N-3AR

N-1AR

N-3AR

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-56
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory
3

N-1AR: the reclosing number of 1-pole AR


N-3AR: the reclosing number of 3-pole AR
4.

Coordination between dual auto-reclosures

Duplicated protection configurations are normally applied for UHV lines. If reclosing function is
integrated within line protections, the auto-reclosing function can be enabled in any or both of the
line protections without coordination.
If both sets of reclosing functions are enabled, when one of them first recloses onto a permanent
fault, the other will block the reclosing pulse according to the latest condition of the faulty phase.
For one-shot AR mode, if the current is detected in the faulty phase, AR will be blocked
immediately to prevent the circuit breaker from repetitive reclosing. For multi-shot AR mode, if the
current is detected in the faulty phase, the current reclosing pulse will be blocked and go into the
next reclosing pulse logic automatically. If the maximum permitted reclosing number [79.N_Rcls] is
reached, the auto-reclosure will drop off after the time delay [79.t_Reclaim].
For one-shot or multi-shot AR, there is a corresponding reclosing counter at each stage. After
reclosing pulse is sent, the corresponding reclosing counter will plus 1 and the reclosing counter
may be cleared by the submenu Clear Counter. If the circuit breaker is reclosed by other
devices during AR initiation, the auto-reclosure will go into the next reclosing pulse logic.
3.11.5.6 AR Time Sequence Diagram
The following two examples indicate typical time sequence of AR process for transient fault and
permanent fault respectively.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-57
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory
Signal

Fault
Trip
CB 52b

Open
[79.t_Reclaim]

79.t_Reclaim
79.Active
79.Inprog

[79.t_Dd_1PS1]

79.Inprog_1P

[79.t_Dd_1PS1]

79.Ok_Chk
AR Out

[79.t_PW_AR]

79.Perm_Trp3P
79.Fail_Rcls
Time

Figure 3.11-10 Single-phase transient fault


Signal

Fault
Trip
52b

Open

Open
[79.t_Reclaim]

79.t_Reclaim
79.Active
79.Inprog
79.Inprog_1P
79.Inprog_3PS2

[79.t_Dd_1PS1]
[79.t_Dd_3PS2]

79.Ok_Chk
AR Out

[79.t_PW_AR]

[79.t_PW_AR]

79.Perm_Trp3P
79.Fail_Rcls

200ms
Time

Figure 3.11-11 Single-phase permanent fault ([79.N_Rcls]=2)


PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-58
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

3.11.6 Settings
Table 3.11-3 Settings of auto-reclosing
No.

Name

Range

Step

Unit

Remark

79.N_Rcls

1~4

Maximum number of reclosing attempts

79.t_Dd_1PS1

0.000~600.000

0.001

Dead time of first shot 1-pole reclosing

79.t_Dd_3PS1

0.000~600.000

0.001

Dead time of first shot 3-pole reclosing

79.t_Dd_3PS2

0.000~600.000

0.001

79.t_Dd_3PS3

0.000~600.000

0.001

79.t_Dd_3PS4

0.000~600.000

0.001

79.t_CBClsd

0.000~600.000

0.001

Dead time of second shot 3-pole


reclosing
Dead time of third shot 3-pole reclosing
Dead

time

of

fourth

shot

3-pole

reclosing
Time delay of circuit breaker in closed
position before reclosing
Time delay to wait for CB healthy, and
begin to timing when the input signal

79.t_CBReady

0.000~600.000

0.001

[79.CB_Healthy] is de-energized and if


it is not energized within this time delay,
AR will be blocked.
Maximum wait time for synchronism

79.t_Wait_Chk

0.000~600.000

0.001

10

79.t_Fail

0.000~600.000

0.001

11

79.t_DDO_AR

0.000~600.000

0.001

Pulse width of AR closing signal

12

79.t_Reclaim

0.000~600.000

0.001

Reclaim time of AR

13

79.t_PersistTrp

0.000~600.000

0.001

check
Time delay allow for CB status change
to conform reclosing successful

Time delay of excessive trip signal to


block auto-reclosing
Drop-off time delay of blocking AR,

14

79.t_DDO_BlkAR

0.000~600.000

0.001

when

blocking

disappears,

signal

AR

blocking

for

AR

condition

drops off after this time delay


15

79.t_AddDly

0.000~600.000

0.001

16

79.t_WaitMaster

0.000~600.000

0.001

Additional time delay for auto-reclosing


Maximum

wait

time

for

reclosing

permissive signal from master AR


Time delay of discriminating another
fault, and begin to times after 1-pole AR

17

79.t_SecFault

0.000~600.000

0.001

initiated, 3-pole AR will be initiated if


another fault happens during this time
delay. AR will be blocked if another fault
happens after that.

18

79.En_PDF_Blk

0 or 1

Enabling/disabling

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

auto-reclosing

3-59
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory
blocked when a fault occurs under pole
disagreement condition
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling auto-reclosing with
19

79.En_AddDly

an additional dead time delay

0 or 1

0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling adjust the length of

20

79.En_CutPulse

reclosing pulse

0 or 1

0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling confirm whether AR

21

79.En_FailCheck

is successful by checking CB state

0 or 1

0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling auto-reclosing

22

79.En

0 or 1

0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling AR by external input

23

79.En_ExtCtrl

signal besides logic setting [79.En]

0 or 1

0: only logic setting


1: logic setting and external input signal
Enabling/disabling AR be initiated by

24

79.En_CBInit

open state of circuit breaker

0 or 1

0: disable
1: enable
Option of AR priority
0None (single-breaker arrangement)

25

79.Opt_Priority

1High (master AR of multi-breaker

0, 1 or 2

arrangement)
2 Low (slave AR of multi-breaker
arrangement)
Control option of AR mode
1: select AR mode by internal logic

26

79.SetOpt

0 or 1

settings
0: select AR mode by external input
signals
Enabling/disabling 1-pole AR mode

27

79.En_1PAR

0 or 1

0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling 3-pole AR mode

28

79.En_3PAR

0 or 1

0: disable
1: enable

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-60
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory
Enabling/disabling 1/3-pole AR mode
29

79.En_1P/3PAR

0 or 1

0: disable
1: enable

3.12 Trip Logic


3.12.1 Application
For any enabled protection tripping elements, their operation signal will convert to appropriate
tripping signals through trip logics and then trigger output contacts by configuration.
3.12.2 Function Description
This module gathers signals from phase selection and protection tripping elements and then
converts the operation signal from protection tripping elements to appropriate tripping signals. The
device can implement phase-segregated tripping or three-phase tripping, and may output the
contact of blocking AR and the contact of initiating breaker failure protection.
3.12.3 I/O Signals
Table 3.12-1 I/O signals of trip logic
No.

Input Signal

Description

TrpOut.En

Trip enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or programmable logic etc.

TrpOut.Blk

Trip blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or programmable logic etc.

Op_CBProt

Protection operation elements, includes phase overcurrent protection, earth fault


protection, pole discrepancy protection, dead zone protection, breaker failure
protection and etc.
Input signal of permitting three-phase tripping
4

PrepTrp3P

When this signal is valid, three-phase tripping will be adopted for any kind of
faults.

No.

Output Signal

Description

TrpOut.En

Trip output is enabled

TrpA

Tripping phase-A circuit breaker

TrpB

Tripping phase-B circuit breaker

TrpC

Tripping phase-C circuit breaker

Trp

Tripping any phase of circuit breaker

Trp3P

Tripping three-phase circuit breaker

BFI_A

BFI_B

BFI_C

Protection tripping signal of A-phase configured to initiate BFP, BFI signal shall be
reset immediately after tripping signal drops off.
Protection tripping signal of B-phase configured to initiate BFP, BFI signal shall be
reset immediately after tripping signal drops off.
Protection tripping signal of C-phase configured to initiate BFP, BFI signal shall be
reset immediately after tripping signal drops off.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-61
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

3.12.4 Logic
0

t_Dwell_Trp

&
>=1

SIG

50BF.Op_ReTrpA

SIG

Ia>0.06In

t_Dwell_Trp 0

TrpA

&

t_Dwell_Trp

&
>=1

SIG

50BF.Op_ReTrpB

SIG

Ib>0.06In

t_Dwell_Trp 0

TrpB

&

t_Dwell_Trp

&
>=1

SIG

50BF.Op_ReTrpC

SIG

Ic>0.06In

t_Dwell_Trp 0

TrpC

&
>=1

>=1

Trp

t_Dwell_Trp

&

&
SIG

>=1

>=1

Prep3PTrp

t_Dwell_Trp 0
SIG

Op_CBProt

SIG

Max(Ia,Ib,Ic)>0.06In

SIG

TrpA

&

Trp3P

&
BFI_A

SIG

TrpB

&
BFI_B

SIG

TrpC

&
BFI_C

SIG

Trp

SIG

50/51Gx.Op

SIG

50/51Px.Op

&
>=1

BFI

Figure 3.12-1 Simplified trip logic

All operation elements (except for re-tripping element) are 3 phase tripping elements.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-62
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

3.12.5 Settings
Table 3.12-2 Settings of trip logic
No.

Name

Range

Step

Unit

Remark
The dwell time of tripping command, empirical
value is 0.04

t_Dwell_Trp

0.000~10.000

0.001

The tripping contact shall drop off under


conditions of no current or protection tripping
element drop-off.

3.13 VT Circuit Supervision


3.13.1 General Application
The purpose of VT circuit supervision is to detect whether VT circuit is normal. Some protection
functions should be disabled when VT circuit fails.
VT circuit failure can be caused by many reasons, such as fuse blown due to short-circuit fault,
poor contact of VT circuit, VT maintenance and so on. The device can detect them and issue an
alarm signal to block relevant protection functions. However, the alarm of VT circuit failure should
not be issued when the following cases happen.
1.

Line VT is used as protection VT and the protected line is out of service.

2.

Only current protection functions are enabled and VT is not connected to the device.

3.13.2 Function Description


VT circuit supervision can detect failure of single-phase, two-phase and three-phase on protection
VT. Under normal condition, the device continuously supervises input voltage from VT, VT circuit
failure signal will be activated if residual voltage exceeds the threshold value or positive-sequence
voltage is lower than the threshold value. If the device is under pickup state due to system fault or
other abnormality, VT circuit supervision will be disabled.
Under normal conditions, the device detect residual voltage greater than 8% of Unn to determine
single-phase or two-phase VT circuit failure, and detect three times positive-sequence voltage less
than Unn to determine three-phase VT circuit failure. Upon detecting abnormality on VT circuit, an
alarm will comes up after a time delay of [VTS.t_DPU] and drop off with a time delay of
[VTS.t_DDO] after VT circuit restored to normal.
VT (secondary circuit) MCB auxiliary contact as a binary input can be connected to the binary
input circuit of the device. If MCB is open (i.e. [VTS.MCB_VT] is energized), the device will
consider the VT circuit is not in a good condition and issues an alarm without a time delay. If the
auxiliary contact is not connected to the device, VT circuit supervision will be issued with time
delay as mentioned in previous paragraph.
When VT is not connected into the device, the alarm will be not issued if the logic setting
[VTS.En_Out_VT] is set as 1. However, the alarm is still issued if the binary input [VTS.MCB_VT]

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-63
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

is energized, no matter that the logic setting [VTS.En_Out_VT] is set as 1 or 0.


When VT neutral point fails, third harmonic of residual voltage is comparatively large. If third
harmonic amplitude of residual voltage is larger than 0.2Unn and without operation of fault
detector element, VT neutral point failure alarm signal [VTNS.Alm] will be issued after a time delay
of [VTS.t_DPU] and drop off with a time delay of [VTS.t_DDO] after three phases voltage restored
to normal.
3.13.3 Function Block Diagram
VTS

VTS.En

VTNS
VTS.Alm

VTS.Blk

VTNS.En

VTNS.Alm

VTNS.Blk

VTS.MCB_VT

3.13.4 I/O Signals


Table 3.13-1 I/O signals of VT circuit supervision
No.

Input Signal

VTS.En

VTS.Blk

VTNS.En

VTNS.Blk

VTS.MCB_VT

No.

Description
VT supervision enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or programmable
logic etc.
VT supervision blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or programmable
logic etc.
VT neutral point supervision enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or
programmable logic etc.
VT neutral point supervision blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
programmable logic etc.
Binary input for VT MCB auxiliary contact

Output Signal

Description

VTS.Alm

Alarm signal to indicate VT circuit fails

VTNS.Alm

Alarm signal to indicate VT neutral point fails

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-64
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

3.13.5 Logic
SIG

3U0>0.08Unn

SIG

3U1<Unn

EN

[VTS.En_LineVT]

SIG

52b_3P

EN

[VTS.En_Out_VT]

>=1
&
>=1

BI

EN

&
&
>=1

[VTS.MCB_VT]

&
VTS.t_DPU

[VTS.En]

SIG

[VTS.En]

SIG

[VTS.Blk]

VTS.t_DDO

VTS.Alm

&

Figure 3.13-1 Logic diagram of VT circuit supervision


OTH

U03>0.2Unn

EN

[VTS.En_Out_VT]

EN

[VTS.En]

SIG

[VTNS.En]

SIG

[VTNS.Blk]

&
&
VTS.t_DPU

VTS.t_DDO

VTNS.Al
m

&

Figure 3.13-2 Logic diagram of VT neutral point supervision

Unn: rated phase-to-phase voltage


U03: third harmonic amplitude of neutral point residual voltage
3.13.6 Settings
Table 3.13-2 Settings of VT circuit supervision
No.

Name

Range

Step

Unit

Remark
Pick-up time delay of VT circuit supervision

VTS.t_DPU

0.200~100.000

0.001

VTS.t_DDO

0.200~100.000

0.001

Drop-off

time

delay

of

VT

circuit

supervision
No voltage used for protection calculation
1: enable

VTS.En_Out_VT

0: disable

0 or 1

In general, when VT is not connected to the


device, this logic setting should be set as
1
Voltage selection for protection calculation

VTS.En_LineVT

from busbar VT or line VT

0 or 1

1: line VT
0: busbar VT

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-65
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory
Alarm function of VT circuit supervision
5

VTS.En

0 or 1

1: enable
0: disable

3.14 CT Circuit Supervision


3.14.1 Application
The purpose of the CT circuit supervision is to detect any abnormality on CT secondary circuit.
3.14.2 Function Description
Under normal conditions, CT secondary signal is continuously supervised by detecting the
residual current and voltage. If residual current is larger than 10%In whereas residual voltage is
less than 3V, an error in CT circuit is considered, the concerned protection functions are blocked
and an alarm is issued with a time delay of 10s and drop off with a time delay of 10s after CT
circuit is restored to normal condition.
3.14.3 Function Block Diagram
CTS
CTS.En

CTS.Alm

CTS.Blk

3.14.4 I/O Signals


Table 3.14-1 I/O signals of CT circuit supervision
No.

Input Signal

Description

U3P

Three-phase voltage input

I3P

Three-phase current input

CTS.En

CTS.Blk

No.
1

CT circuit supervision enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or


programmable logic etc.
CT circuit supervision blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
programmable logic etc.

Output Signal
CTS.Alm

Description
Alarm signal to indicate CT circuit fails

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-66
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

3.14.5 Logic
OTH

3I0>0.1In

&
10s

OTH

10s

CTS.Alm

3U0<3V

Figure 3.14-1 Logic diagram of CT circuit failure

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-67
Date: 2013-02-27

3 Operation Theory

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

3-68
Date: 2013-02-27

4 Supervision

4 Supervision
Table of Contents
4.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Supervision Alarms ......................................................................................... 4-1
4.3 Relay Self-supervision.................................................................................... 4-6
4.3.1 Relay Hardware Monitoring ................................................................................................. 4-6
4.3.2 Fault Detector Monitoring .................................................................................................... 4-6
4.3.3 Check Setting ...................................................................................................................... 4-7

4.4 AC Input Monitoring ........................................................................................ 4-7


4.4.1 Voltage/Current Drift Monitoring and Auto-adjustment ........................................................ 4-7
4.4.2 Sampling Monitoring ............................................................................................................ 4-7

4.5 Secondary Circuit Monitoring ........................................................................ 4-7


4.5.1 Opto-coupler Power Supervision ......................................................................................... 4-7
4.5.2 Circuit Breaker Supervision ................................................................................................. 4-7

4.6 GOOSE Alarm .................................................................................................. 4-7

List of Tables
Table 4.2-1 Alarm description .................................................................................................... 4-1
Table 4.2-2 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................... 4-4

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

4-a
Date: 2013-02-26

4 Supervision

4-b

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-26

4 Supervision

4.1 Overview
Protection system is in quiescent state under normal conditions, and it is required to respond
promptly for faults which occurr on power system. When the device is in energizing process before
the LED HEALTHY is on, the device need to be checked to ensure no abnormality. Therefore,
the automatic supervision function, which checks the health of the protection system when startup
and during normal operation, plays an important role.
The numerical relay based on the microprocessor operations is suitable for implementing this
automatic supervision function of the protection system.
In case a defect is detected during initialization when DC power supply is provided to the device,
the device will be blocked with indication and alarm of relay out of service. It is suggested a trial
recovery of the device by re-energization. Please contact supplier if the device is still failure.
When a failure is detected by the automatic supervision, it is followed by a LCD message, LED
indication and alarm contact outputs. The failure alarm is also recorded in event recording report
and can be printed If required.

4.2 Supervision Alarms


Hardware circuit and operation status of the device are self-supervised continuously. If any
abnormal condition is detected, information or report will be displayed and a corresponding alarm
will be issued.
A minor abnormality may block a certain number of protections functions while the other functions
can still work. However, if severe hardware failure or abnormality, such as PWR module failure,
DC converter failure and so on, are detected, all protection functions will be blocked and the LED
HEALTHY will be extinguished and blocking output contacts BO_FAIL will be given. The
protective device then can not work normally and maintenance is required to eliminate the failure.
All the alarm signals and the corresponding handling suggestions are listed below.
NOTE!
If the protective device is blocked or alarm signal is sent during operation, please do find
out its reason with the help of self-diagnostic record. If the reason can not be found at site,
please notify the factory NR. Please do not simply press button TARGET RESET on the
protection panel or re-energize on the device.
Table 4.2-1 Alarm description

No.

Item

Description

Blocking
Device

Fail Signals
The device fails.
1

Fail_Device

This signal will be pick up if any fail signal picks up

Blocked

and it will drop off when all fail signals drop off.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

4-1
Date: 2013-02-26

4 Supervision
Set value of any setting is out of scope.
2

Fail_Setting_OvRange

This signal will pick up instantaneously and will be


latched

unless

the

recommended

handling

Blocked

suggestion is adopted.
Mismatch between the configuration of plug-in
3

Fail_BoardConfig

modules

and

the

designing

drawing

of

an

Blocked

applied-specific project.
After config file is updated, settings of the file and
settings saved on the device are not matched.
4

Fail_SettingItem_Chgd

This signal will pick up instantaneously and will be


latched

unless

the

recommended

Blocked

handling

suggestion is adopted.
Error is found during checking memory data.
5

Fail_Memory

This signal will pick up instantaneously and will be


latched

unless

the

recommended

handling

Blocked

suggestion is adopted.
Error is found during checking settings.
6

Fail_Settings

This signal will pick up instantaneously and will be


latched

unless

the

recommended

handling

Blocked

suggestion is adopted.
DSP chip is damaged.
7

Fail_DSP

This signal will pick up instantaneously and will be


latched

unless

the

recommended

handling

Blocked

suggestion is adopted.
Communication
8

Fail_DSP_Comm

between

two

DSP

chips

is

abnormal
This signal will pick up instantaneously and will

Blocked

drop off instantaneously.


Software configuation is incorrect.
9

Fail_Config

This signal will pick up instantaneously and will be


latched

unless

the

recommended

handling

Blocked

suggestion is adopted.
AC current and voltage samplings are abnormal.
10

Fail_Sample

This signal will pick up with a time delay of 200ms


and will be latched unless the recommended

Blocked

handling suggestion is adopted.


For DSP plug-in module for measurement and
11

MCBrd.Fail_Sample

control in slot 06, AC current and voltage samplings

Blocked

are abnormal
Error is found during checking the settings of DSP
12

MCBrd.Fail_Settings

plug-in module for measurement and control in slot

Blocked

06.
Alarm Signals
13

Alm_Device

The device is abnormal.

4-2

Unblocked

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-26

4 Supervision
This signal will be pick up if any alarm signal picks
up and it will drop off when all alarm signals drop
off.
14

Alm_Insuf_Memory

The memory of MON plug-in module is insufficient.

Unblocked

The device is in the communication test mode.


15

Alm_CommTest

This signal will pick up instantaneously and will

Unblocked

drop off instantaneously.


The error is found during MON module checking
settings of device.
16

Alm_Settings_MON

This signal will pick up with a time delay of 10s and

Unblocked

will be latched unless re-powering or rebooting the


device.
The error is found during checking the version of
17

Alm_Version

software downloaded to the device.


This signal will pick up instantaneously and will

Unblocked

drop off instantaneously.


The active group set by settings in device and that
18

Alm_BI_SettingGrp

set by binary input are not matched.


This signal will pick up instantaneously and will

Unblocked

drop off instantaneously.


Data frame is abnormal between two DSP
19

Alm_DSP_Frame

modules.
This signal will pick up instantaneously and will

Unblocked

drop off instantaneously.


The power supply of BI plug-in module in slot xx is
20

Bxx.Alm_OptoDC

abnormal.
This signal will pick up with a time delay of 10s and

Unblocked

will drop off with a time delay of 10s.


Fault detector element operates for longer than
21

Alm_Pkp_FD

50s.
This signal will pick up with a time delay of 50s and

Unblocked

will drop off with a time delay of 10s.


Neutral current fault detector element operates for
22

Alm_Pkp_I0

longer than 10s.


This signal will pick up with a time delay of 10s and

Unblocked

will drop off with a time delay of 10s.


Protection VT circuit fails.
23

VTS.Alm

This signal will pick up with a time delay of


[VTS.t_DPU] and drop off with a time delay of

Unblocked

[VTS.t_DDO].
Protection VT circuit of neutral point fails.
24

VTNS.Alm

This signal will pick up with a time delay of


[VTS.t_DPU] and drop off with a time delay of

Unblocked

[VTS.t_DDO].

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

4-3
Date: 2013-02-26

4 Supervision
CT circuit of corresponding circuit breaker fails.
25

CTS.Alm

This signal will pick up with a time delay of 10s and

Unblocked

will drop off with a time delay of 10s.


The auxiliary normally closed contact (52b) of
26

corresponding circuit breaker is abnormal.

Alm_52b

This signal will pick up with a time delay of 10s and

Unblocked

will drop off with a time delay of 10s.


The device is in maintenance state.
27

BI_Maintenance

This signal will pick up with a time delay of 150ms

Unblocked

and will drop off with a time delay of 150ms.


28

Alm_TimeSync

Time synchronization abnormality alarm.

Unblocked

Frequency of the system is higher than 65Hz or


29

lower than 45Hz.

Alm_Freq

This signal will pick up with a time delay of 100ms

Unblocked

and will drop off with a time delay of 10s.


Spare alarm signals
30

Alm_Sparexx (xx=01~08)

The time delay of pickup and dropoff for these

Unblocked

alarm signals can be set by PCS-Explorer.


Protection Element Alarm Signals
Synchronism voltage circuit is abnormal (UB)
31

25.Alm_VTS_UB

This signal will pick up with a time delay of 1.25s

Unblocked

and will drop off with a time delay of 10s.


Synchronism voltage circuit is abnormal (UL)
32

25.Alm_VTS_UL

This signal will pick up with a time delay of 1.25s

Unblocked

and will drop off with a time delay of 10s.


33

79.Fail_Rcls

Auto-reclosing fails.

Unblocked

34

79.Fail_Chk

Synchrocheck for AR fails.

Unblocked

Table 4.2-2 Troubleshooting


No.

Item

Handling suggestion
Fail Signals

Fail_Device

The signal is issued with other specific fail signals, and please refer to the
handling suggestion other specific alarm signals.
Please reset setting values according to the range described in the instruction

Fail_Setting_OvRange

manual, then re-power or reboot the device and the device will restore to
normal operation state.
1.

Go to the menu InformationBorad Info, check the abnormality

information.
3

Fail_BoardConfig

2.

For the abnormality board, if the board is not used, then remove, and if

the board is used, then check whether the board is installed properly and work
normally.
4

Fail_SettingItem_Chgd

Please check the settings mentioned in the prompt message on the LCD, and
go to the menu Settings and select Confirm_Settings item to comfirm

4-4

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-26

4 Supervision
settings. Then, the device will restore to normal operation stage.
5

Fail_Memory

Please inform the manufacture or the agent for repair.

Fail_Settings

Please inform the manufacture or the agent for repair.

Fail_DSP

Fail_DSP_Comm

Fail_Config

10

Fail_Sample

Chips are damaged and please inform the manufacture or the agent replacing
the module.
Please inform the manufacture or the agent for repair.
Please inform configuration engineers to check and confirm visualization
functions of the device
1.

Please make the device out of service.

2.

Then check if the analog input modules and wiring connectors

connected to those modules are installed at the position.


3.

Re-power the device and the device will restore to normal operation

state.
1. Please make the device out of service.
11

MCBrd.Fail_Sample

2. Then check if analog input modules and wiring connectors connected to


those modules are installed at the position.
3. Re-power the device and the device will restore to normal operation state.

12

MCBrd.Fail_Settings

Please inform the manufacturer or the agent for repair.


Alarm Signals

13

Alm_Device

14

Alm_Insuf_Memory

15

Alm_CommTest

16

Alm_Settings_MON

The signal is issued with other specific alarm signals, and please refer to the
handling suggestion other specific alarm signals.
Please replace MON plug-in module.
No special treatment is needed, and disable the communication test function
after the completion of the test.
Please inform the manufacture or the agent for repair.
Users may pay no attention to the alarm signal in the project commissioning
stage, but it is needed to download the latest package file (including correct

17

Alm_Version

version checksum file) provided by R&D engineer to make the alarm signal
disappear. Then users get the correct software version. It is not allowed that
the alarm signal is issued on the device already has been put into service. the
devices having being put into service so that the alarm signal disappears.
Please check the value of setting [Active_Grp] and binary input of indiating

18

Alm_BI_SettingGrp

active group, and make them matched. Then the ALARM LED will be
extinguished and the corresponding alarm message will disappear and the
device will restore to normal operation state.

19

20

Alm_DSP_Frame

Bxx.Alm_OptoDC

Please inform the manufacture or the agent for repair.


1.

check whether the binary input module is connected to the power supply.

2.

check whether the voltage of power supply is in the required range.

3.

After the voltage for binary input module restores to normal range, the

ALARM LED will be extinguished and the corresponding alarm message will
disappear and the device will restore to normal operation state.
Please check secondary values and protection settings. If settings are not set
21

Alm_Pkp_FD

reasonable to make fault detectors pick up, please reset settings, and then
the alarm message will disappear and the device will restore to normal

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

4-5
Date: 2013-02-26

4 Supervision
operation state.
Please check secondary values and protection settings. If settings are not set
22

Alm_Pkp_I0

reasonable to make fault detectors pick up, please reset settings, and then
the alarm message will disappear and the device will restore to normal
operation state.

23

VTS.Alm

24

VTNS.Alm

25

CTS.Alm

26

Alm_52b

Please check the corresponding VT secondary circuit. After the abnormality is


eliminated, the device returns to normal operation state.
Please check the corresponding VT secondary circuit of neutral point. After
the abnormality is eliminated, the device returns to normal operation state.
Please check the corresponding CT secondary circuit. After the abnormality is
eliminated, the device returns to normal operation state.
Please check the auxiliary contact of CB. After the abnormality is eliminated,
the device returns to normal operation state.
After maintenance is finished, please de-energized the binary input

27

BI_Maintenance

[BI_Maintenance] and then the alarm will disappear and the device restore to
normal operation state.
1.

check whether the selected clock synchronization mode matches the

clock synchronization source;


2.

check whether the wiring connection between the device and the clock

synchronization source is correct


28

Alm_TimeSync

3.

check whether the setting for selecting clock synchronization (i.e.

[Opt_TimeSync]) is set correctly. If there is no clock synchronization, please


set the setting [Opt_TimeSync] as No TimeSync.
4.

After the abnormality is removed, the ALARM LED will be extinguished

and the corresponding alarm message will disappear and the device will
restore to normal operation state.
29
30

Alm_Freq

Adjust the system operating mode

Alm_Sparexx

Find the reason according to specific problem. (These signals are

(xx=01~08)

user-defined.)

4.3 Relay Self-supervision


4.3.1 Relay Hardware Monitoring
All chips on DSP module are monitored to ensure whether they are damaged or having errors. If
any one of them is detected damaged or having error, the alarm signal [Fail_DSP] is issued with
the device being blocked.

4.3.2 Fault Detector Monitoring


When neutral current fault detector picks up and lasts for longer than 10 seconds, an alarm
[Alm_Pkp_I0] will be issued without the device blocked.
When any fault detector picks up for longer than 50s, an alarm will be issued [Alm_Pkp_FD]

4-6

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-26

4 Supervision

without the device blocked.

4.3.3 Check Setting


This relay has 10 setting groups, only one setting group could be activiated (is active) at a time.
The settings of active setting group are checked to ensure they are reasonable. If settings are
checked to be unreasonable or out of setting scopes, a corresponding alarm signal will be issued,
and the device is also blocked.

4.4 AC Input Monitoring


4.4.1 Voltage/Current Drift Monitoring and Auto-adjustment
Zero point of voltage and current may drift due to variation of temperature or other environment
factors. The device continually traces the drift and adjust it to normal value automatically.

4.4.2 Sampling Monitoring


AC current and voltage samplings of protection DSP and fault detector DSP are monitored and if
the samples of protection DSP and fault detector DSP are detected to be wrong or inconsistent
between them, the alarm signal [Fail_Sample] will be issued and the device will be blocked.

4.5 Secondary Circuit Monitoring


4.5.1 Opto-coupler Power Supervision
Positive power supply of opto-coupler is continually monitored. If an error or damage has occurred,
an alarm [Bxx.Alm_OptoDC] will be issued.

4.5.2 Circuit Breaker Supervision


If 52b of three phases are energized ,which indicates circuit breaker is open and there is no
current detected in the line, the line will be considered to be out of service.
If 52b of three phases are energized that indicates circuit breaker is open but current is still
detected in the line (the measured current is greater than a settable threshold value) or
three-phase circuit breaker is in pole disagreement condition, an alarm signal [Alm_52b] will be
issued after 10s.

4.6 GOOSE Alarm


No.

Output Signal

GAlm_AStorm_SL

GAlm_BStorm_SL

GAlm_CfgFile_SL

Namexx.GAlm_ADisc_SL_xx

Description
GOOSE alarm signal indicating that there is a network storm occurring on the
network A.
GOOSE alarm signal indicating that there is a network storm occurring on the
network B.
GOOSE alarm signal indicating that there is an error in the GOOSE
configuration file
GOOSE alarm signal indicating that network A for Namexx is disconnected.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

4-7
Date: 2013-02-26

4 Supervision
No.

Output Signal

Namexx.GAlm_BDisc_SL_xx

Namexx.GAlm_Cfg_SL_xx

Description
GOOSE alarm signal indicating that network B for Namexx is disconnected.
Between GOOSE control blocks received on network and GOOSE control
blocks defined in GOOSE.txt file are unmatched for Namexx.

These are GOOSE alarm reports. When any alarm message is issued, the LED ALARM is lit without
the device being blocked. After the abnormality is removed, the device will return to normal with the
LED ALARM being distinguished automatically.
No.

Output Signal

Handling suggestion

GAlm_AStorm_SL

Please check the related switches

GAlm_BStorm_SL

Please check the related switches

GAlm_CfgFile_SL

Please check the GOOSE configuration file (i.e. GOOSE.txt)

Namexx.GAlm_ADisc_SL_xx

Please check the network

Namexx.GAlm_BDisc_SL_xx

Please check the network

Namexx.GAlm_Cfg_SL_xx

Please check the GOOSE configuration file and the network

Namexx is the name defined by the setting [Linkxx], xx=01, 02, 03, , 64

4-8

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-26

5 Management

5 Management
Table of Contents
5.1 Measurement ................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Recording ........................................................................................................ 5-3
5.2.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 5-3
5.2.2 Event Recording .................................................................................................................. 5-3
5.2.3 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 5-3
5.2.4 Disturbance Recording ........................................................................................................ 5-4
5.2.5 Present Recording ............................................................................................................... 5-5

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

5-a
Date: 2013-02-26

5 Management

5-b

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-26

5 Management

5.1 Measurement
PCS-921 performs continuous measurement of the analogue input quantities. The current full
scale of relay is 40 times of rated current, and there is no effect to the performance of IED due to
overflowing of current full scale. The device samples 24 points per cycle and calculates the RMS
value in each interval and updated the LCD display in every 0.5 second. The measurement data
can be displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or on the local/remote PC via software tool.
Navigate the menu to view the sampling value through LCD screen.
This device can be used for one or two circuit breaker configuration. If it is used for two circuit
breakers configuration, some corresponding metering will be suffixed by CBn (n is the number of
the CB and it can be 1 and 2).
1.

RMS Values

Access path: Press key to enter main menu firstly. Select the item Measurements and
press key ENT to enter, and then select submenu Measurements1 (from protection DSP) or
Measurements2 (from fault detector DSP). Press key ENT to display corresponding
measurement values as below on the LCD.

Magnitude of phase current Ia, Ib, Ic

Magnitude of positive-sequence and negative-sequence current (I1, I2)

Magnitude of calculated residual current 3I0

Magnitude of three-phase protection voltage Ua, Ub, Uc (i.e. UL1)

Magnitude of phase-to-phase voltage Uab, Ubc, Uca

Magnitude of synchronism voltage Usyn

Magnitude of positive-sequence and negative-sequence voltage (U1, U2)


Magnitude of calculated residual voltage (3U0)

Frequency of protection voltage (f)

Frequency of synchronism voltage (f_Syn)

Frequency difference (f_Diff)

Voltage difference (U_Diff)

2.

Phase Angle

No.

Symbol

Definition

Ang(Ua-Ub)

Phase angle difference for A-phase voltage relative to B-phase voltage

Ang(Ub-Uc)

Phase angle difference for B-phase voltage relative to C-phase voltage

Ang(Uc-Ua)

Phase angle difference for C-phase voltage relative to A-phase voltage

Ang(Ua-Ia)

Phase angle difference for A-phase voltage relative to A-phase current

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

5-1
Date: 2013-02-26

5 Management
5

Ang(Ub-Ib)

Phase angle difference for B-phase voltage relative to B-phase current

Ang(Uc-Ic)

Phase angle difference for C-phase voltage relative to C-phase current

Ang(Ia-Ib)

Phase angle difference for A-phase current relative to B-phase current

Ang(Ib-Ic)

Phase angle difference for B-phase current relative to C-phase current

Ang(Ic-Ia)

Phase angle difference for C-phase current relative to A-phase current

10

phi_Diff

Phase angle difference between two synchronism voltages

3.

Metering of the primary value

Access path:
1)

Press key to enter main menu firstly.

2)

Select the item Measurements and press key ENT to enter, and then

3)

Select submenu Measurements3.

4)

Press key ENT to display corresponding measurement values as below on the LCD.

No.

Symbol

Definition

Unit

Ia

The primary value of A-phase current of line (Ia)

Ib

The primary value of B-phase current of line (Ib)

Ic

The primary value of C-phase current of line (Ic)

I1

The primary value of positive-sequence current (I1)

I2

The primary value of negative-sequence current (I2)

3I0

The primary value of calculated residual current (3I0)

Ua

The primary value of A-phase voltage (Ua)

kV

Ub

The primary value of B-phase voltage (Ub)

kV

Uc

The primary value of C-phase voltage (Uc)

kV

10

Uab

The primary value of phase-to-phase voltage (Uab)

kV

11

Ubc

The primary value of phase-to-phase voltage (Ubc)

kV

12

Uca

The primary value of phase-to-phase voltage (Uca)

kV

13

U1

The primary value of positive-sequence voltage (U1)

kV

14

U2

The primary value of negative-sequence voltage (U2)

kV

15

3U0

The primary value of calculated residual voltage (3U0)

kV

16

U_Syn

The primary value of synchronism voltage (U_Syn)

kV

17

The primary value of measurement frequency (f)

Hz

18

f_Syn

The primary value of synchronism frequency (f_Syn)

Hz

19

The primary value of active power (P)

MW

20

The primary value of reactive power (Q)

MVar

21

The primary value of apparent power (S)

MVA

5-2

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-26

5 Management
22

Cos

The value of power factor (Cos)

23

Pa

The primary value of phase-A active power (P)

MW

24

Pb

The primary value of phase-B active power (P)

MW

25

Pc

The primary value of phase-C active power (P)

MW

26

Qa

The primary value of phase-A reactive power (Q)

MVar

27

Qb

The primary value of phase-B reactive power (Q)

MVar

28

Qc

The primary value of phase-C reactive power (Q)

MVar

29

Cosa

The value of phase-A power factor (Cos)

30

Cosb

The value of phase-B power factor (Cos)

31

Cosc

The value of phase-C power factor (Cos)

32

f_Diff

33

df/dt

34

phi_Diff

35

U_Diff

The primary value of voltage difference.

36

PHr+_Pri

The primary positive active energy.

MWh

37

PHr-_Pri

The primary negative active energy.

MWh

38

QHr+_Pri

The primary positive reactive energy.

MVAh

39

QHr-_Pri

The primary negative reactive energy.

MVAh

The frequency difference between reference side and incoming side for CB
synchronism-check.
The df/dt difference between reference side and incoming side for CB
synchronism-check.
Phase-angle difference between reference side and incoming side for CB
synchronism-check.

Hz

Hz/s

Deg
kV

5.2 Recording
5.2.1 Overview
PCS-921 provides the following recording functions:
1.

Event recording

2.

Disturbance recording

3.

Present recording

All the recorded information except waveform can be viewed on local LCD or by printing.
Waveform could only be printed or extracted with PCS-Explorer software tool and a waveform
analysis software.

5.2.2 Event Recording


5.2.3 Overview
The device can store the latest 1024 disturbance records, 1024 binary events, 1024 supervision
events and 1024 device logs. All the records are stored in non-volatile memory, and when the
available space is exhausted, the oldest record is automatically overwritten by the latest one.
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

5-3
Date: 2013-02-26

5 Management

5.2.3.1 Disturbance Records


When any protection element operates or drops off, such as fault detector, distance protection etc.,
they will be logged in event records.
5.2.3.2 Supervision Events
The device is under automatic supervision all the time. If there are any failure or abnormal
condition detected, such as, chip damaged, VT circuit failure and so on, it will be logged in event
records.
5.2.3.3 Binary Events
When there is a binary input is energized or de-energized, i.e., its state has changed from 0 to 1
or from 1 to 0, it will be logged in event records.
5.2.3.4 Control Logs
When the total number of control command records reaches 256, Control_Logs memory area
will be full. If the device receives a new control command now, the oldest control command record
will be deleted, and then the latest control command record will be stored and displayed.
5.2.3.5 Device Logs
If an operator implements some operations on the device, such as reboot protective device,
modify setting, etc., they will be logged in event records.

5.2.4 Disturbance Recording


5.2.4.1 Application
Disturbance records can be used to have a better understanding of the behavior of the power
network and related primary and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance. Analysis of
the recorded data provides valuable information that can be used to improve existing equipment.
This information can also be used when planning for and designing new installations.
5.2.4.2 Design
A disturbance record consists of fault record and fault waveform. A disturbance record is initiated
by fault detector element.
The disturbance record has two types:
1.

Fault detector element picks up without operation of protective element.

2.

Fault detector element picks up with operation of protective elements.

5.2.4.3 Capacity and Information of Disturbance Records


The device can store up to 64 disturbance records with waveform in non-volatile memory. It is
based on first in first out queue that the oldest disturbance record will be overwritten by the latest
one.
For each disturbance record, the following items are included:

5-4

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-26

5 Management

1.

Sequence number

Each operation will be recorded with a sequence number in the record and displayed on LCD
screen.
2.

Date and time of fault occurrence

The time resolution is 1ms using the relay internal clock synchronized via clock synchronized
device if connected. The date and time is recorded when a system fault is detected.
3.

Relative operating time

An operating time (not including the operating time of output relays) is recorded in the record.
4.

Faulty phase

5.

Protection elements

5.2.4.4 Capacity and Information of Fault Waveform


MON module can store 64 pieces of fault waveform oscillogram in non-volatile memory. If a new
fault occurs when 64 fault waveform have been stored, the oldest will be overwritten by the latest
one.
Each fault record consists of all analog and digital quantities related to protection, such as original
current and voltage, differential current, alarm elements, and binary inputs and etc.
Each time recording includes 12-cycle pre-fault waveform, and 250 cycles at least and 500 cycles
at most can be recorded.

5.2.5 Present Recording


Present recording is a waveform triggered manually on on the devices LCD or remotely through
PCS-Explorer software. Recording content of present recording is same to that of disturbance
recording.
Each time recording includes 12-cycle waveform before triggering, and 250 cycles at most can be
recorded.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

5-5
Date: 2013-02-26

5 Management

5-6

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-26

6 Hardware

6 Hardware
Table of Contents
6.1 General Description ........................................................................................ 6-1
6.2 Typical Wiring .................................................................................................. 6-4
6.2.1 Conventional CT/VT (For reference only) ........................................................................... 6-4
6.2.2 ECT/EVT (For reference only) ............................................................................................. 6-6
6.2.3 CT Requirement .................................................................................................................. 6-8

6.3 Plug-in Module Description ............................................................................ 6-9


6.3.1 PWR Plug-in Module (Power Supply) ................................................................................. 6-9
6.3.2 MON Plug-in Module (Monitor) ...........................................................................................6-11
6.3.3 AI Plug-in Module (Analog Input)....................................................................................... 6-14
6.3.4 DSP Plug-in Module (Logic Proces) .................................................................................. 6-19
6.3.5 NET-DSP Plug-in Module (GOOSE and SV) .................................................................... 6-20
6.3.6 BI Plug-in Module (Binary Input) ....................................................................................... 6-21
6.3.7 BO Plug-in Module (Binary Output) ................................................................................... 6-25
6.3.8 HMI Module ....................................................................................................................... 6-27

List of Figures
Figure 6.1-1 Rear view of fixed module position ..................................................................... 6-1
Figure 6.1-2 Hardware diagram.................................................................................................. 6-2
Figure 6.1-3 Front view of PCS-921 ........................................................................................... 6-3
Figure 6.1-4 Typical rear view of PCS-921 ................................................................................ 6-4
Figure 6.2-1 Typical wiring of PCS-921 (conventional CT/VT)................................................ 6-5
Figure 6.2-2 Typical wiring of PCS-921 (ECT/EVT) .................................................................. 6-7
Figure 6.3-1 View of PWR plug-in module .............................................................................. 6-10
Figure 6.3-2 Output contacts of PWR plug-in module........................................................... 6-10
Figure 6.3-3 View of MON plug-in module .............................................................................. 6-12

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

6-a
Date: 2013-02-28

6 Hardware

Figure 6.3-4 Connection of communication terminal ............................................................ 6-14


Figure 6.3-5 Schematic diagram of CT circuit automatically closed ....................................... 6-15
Figure 6.3-6 Current connection of AI plug-in module .......................................................... 6-15
Figure 6.3-7 Voltage connection 1 of AI plug-in module ....................................................... 6-16
Figure 6.3-8 Voltage connection 2 of AI plug-in module ....................................................... 6-16
Figure 6.3-9 View of AI plug-in module (without synchronism voltage switchover) ......... 6-17
Figure 6.3-10 View of AI plug-in module (with synchronism voltage switchover) ............. 6-18
Figure 6.3-11 View of DSP plug-in module ............................................................................. 6-19
Figure 6.3-12 View of NET-DSP plug-in module ..................................................................... 6-20
Figure 6.3-13 View of BI plug-in module (NR1503) ................................................................ 6-21
Figure 6.3-14 View of BI plug-in module (NR1504) ................................................................ 6-22
Figure 6.3-15 View of BO plug-in module (NR1521A) ............................................................ 6-25
Figure 6.3-16 View of BO plug-in module (NR1521C)............................................................ 6-26
Figure 6.3-17 View of BO plug-in module (NR1521F) ............................................................ 6-27

List of Tables
Table 6.3-1 Terminal definition and description of PWR plug-in module ............................ 6-10
Table 6.3-2 Terminal definition of AI module (without synchronism voltage switchover) 6-17
Table 6.3-3 Terminal definition of AI module (with synchronism voltage switchover) ...... 6-18

6-b

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

6 Hardware

6.1 General Description


PCS-921 adopts 32-bit microchip processor CPU as control core for management and monitoring
function, meanwhile, adopts high-speed digital signal processor DSP for all the protection
calculation. 24 points are sampled in every cycle and parallel processing of sampled data can be
realized in each sampling interval to ensure ultrahigh reliability and safety of the device.

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

PWR module

07

BO module

06

BO module

05

BO module

04

DSP module

DSP module
03

BO module

02

BI module

01

BI module

Slot No.

AI module

MON module

PCS-921 is comprised of intelligent plug-in modules, except that few particular plug-in modules
position cannot be changed in the whole device (gray plug-in modules as shown in Figure 6.1-1),
other plug-in modules like AI (analog input) and IO (binary input and binary output) can be flexibly
configured in the remaining slot positions.

15

P1

Figure 6.1-1 Rear view of fixed module position

PCS-921 has 16 slots, PWR plug-in module, MON plug-in module and DSP plug-in module are
assigned at fixed slots.
Besides 4 fixed modules are shown in above figure, there are 12 slots can be flexibly configured.
AI plug-in module, BI plug-in module and BO plug-in module can be configured at position
between slot 02, 03 and 06~15. It should be pay attention that AI plug-in module will occupy two
slots.
This device is developed on the basis of our latest software and hardware platform, and the new
platform major characteristics are of high reliability, networking and great capability in
anti-interference. See Figure 6.1-2 for hardware diagram.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

6-1
Date: 2013-02-28

A/D

Protection
Calculation
DSP

A/D

Fault
Detector
DSP

Output Relay

Conventional CT/VT

External
Binary Input

6 Hardware

ECVT
Pickup
Relay

ECVT
ETHERNET
LCD
Power
Supply

Uaux

+E
Clock SYN

LED

CPU
RJ45

Keypad
PRINT

Figure 6.1-2 Hardware diagram

The working process of the device is as shown in above figure: current and voltage from
conventional CT/VT are converted into small voltage signal and sent to DSP module after filtered
and A/D conversion for protection calculation and fault detector respectively (ECVT signal is sent
to the device without small signal and A/D convertion). When DSP module completes all the
protection calculation, the result will be recorded in 32-bit CPU on MON module. DSP module
carries out fault detector, protection logic calculation, tripping output, and MON module perfomes
SOE (sequence of event) record, waveform recording, printing, communication between the
device and SAS and communication between HMI and CPU. When fault detector detects a fault
and picks up, positive power supply for output relay is provided.
The items can be flexibly configured depending on the situations like sampling method of the
device (conventional CT/VT or ECT/EVT), and the mode of binary output (conventional binary
output or GOOSE binary output). The configurations for PCS-900 series based on microcomputer
are classified into standard and optional modules.
Table 6.1-1 PCS-921 module configuration
No.

ID

NR1101/NR1102

Management and monitor module (MON module)

standard

NR1401

Analog input module (AI module )

standard

NR1161

Protection calculation and fault detector module (DSP module)

standard

NR1503/NR1504

Binary input module (BI module)

standard

NR1521

Binary output module (BO module)

standard

NR1301

Power supply module (PWR module)

standard

NR1136

Module description

Remark

GOOSE and SV from merging unit by IEC61850-9-2 (NET-DSP


module)

6-2

option

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

6 Hardware
ID

No.

Module description
Human machine interface module (HMI module)

Remark
standard

MON module provides functions like communication with SAS, event record, setting
management etc.

AI module converts AC current and voltage from current transformers and voltage
transformers respectively to small voltage signal.

DSP module performs filtering, sampling, protection calculation and fault detector calculation.

BI module provides binary inputs via opto-couplers with rating voltage among
24V/110V/125V/220V/250V (configurable).

BO module provides output contacts for tripping, and signal output contact for annunciation
signal, remote signal, fault and disturbance signal, operation abnormal signal etc.

PWR module converts DC 250/220/125/110V into various DC voltage levels for modules of
the device.

HMI module is comprised of LCD, keypad, LED indicators and multiplex RJ45 ports for user
as human-machine interface.

NET-DSP module receives and sends GOOSE messages, sampled values (SV) from
merging unit by IEC61850-9-2 protocol.

PCS-921 series is made of a 4U height 19 chassis for flush mounting. Components mounted on
its front include a 320240 dot matrix LCD, a 9 button keypad, 20 LED indicators and a multiplex
RJ45 port. A monolithic micro controller is installed in the equipment for these functions.
Following figures show front and rear views of PCS-921 respectively.

ALARM

11

PCS-9 21

12

BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

10

20

GRP

HEALTHY

ESC

1
2

ENT

Figure 6.1-3 Front view of PCS-921

20 LED indicators are, from top to bottom, operation (HEALTHY), self-supervision (ALARM),
others are configurable.
For the 9-button keypad, ENT is enter, GRP is group number and ESC is escape.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

6-3
Date: 2013-02-28

6 Hardware

NR1102

NR1401

NR1161

NR1161

NR1504

NR1504

NR1521

NR1521

NR1521

NR1521

NR1301
5V OK

ALM

BO_ALM BO_FAIL

ON

OFF

DANGER
1 BO_COM1
2

BO_FAIL

BO_ALM

BO_COM2

BO_FAIL

BO_ALM

OPTO+

OPTO-

9
10

PWR+

11

PWR-

12

GND

Figure 6.1-4 Typical rear view of PCS-921

6.2 Typical Wiring


6.2.1 Conventional CT/VT (For reference only)

12

13

PWR module

BO module

11

NR1521F NR1301

BO module

BO module

NR1521A NR1521C NR1521C

BI module

AI module

NR1504

BO module

NR1161

DSP module

NR1161

DSP module

NR1401

MON module

NR1102

15

P1

Slot No.
01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

14

The following typical wiring is given based on above hardware configuration

6-4

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

6 Hardware

Power supply supervision

0201
0203

BI_01

Ib

0205
Ic

0206

Ua

0214

Ub

0216
0217

Uc

0218

UB1

0220

UL2

0222
0223

UB2

0224

P111

OPTO+

P107

OPTO-

P108

COM

P105

BO_FAIL

P106

BO_ALM

P104

COM

0102

SGND

0103

0103
0104
0105

TXD

0106

SGND

0107

PRINT

PRINTER

RTS

0816

0821
0822
1101

BO_01

1102
1103

BO_02

1104

BO_11

1121
1122
1201

BO_01

1202
1203

BO_02

1204

BO_11

1221
1222
1301

BO_01

1302
1303

BO_02

1304

BO_11

1321
1322

Multiplex
RJ45 (Front)

1502
1503

BO_CtrlCls1

1504

SGND

Signal Binary Output (option)

0102

1501

Clock SYN

0101

SYN-

0815

BO_CtrlOpn1

0104
SYN+

Not used

0101

0814

COM

To the screen of other coaxial


cable with single point earthing

P101

0809

BI_13

Signal Binary Output


(option)

BO_ALM

BI_12

Signal Binary Output

BO_FAIL

P103

0808

BI_18

Power
Supply

P102

Not used

Power supply for


opto-coupler (24V)

PWR-

0807

BI_07

Controlled by fault
detector element

External DC power
supply

P110

BI_06

0221

Synchronism Voltage

0219

0802

0215

Protection Voltage

0213

*BI plug-in module can be independent common terminal

0204

PWR+

0801

Ia

0202

1517
BO_CtrlOpn5

1518
1519

BO_CtrlCls5

1520
1521

BO_Ctrl

1522
P112
0225
Grounding
Bus

Figure 6.2-1 Typical wiring of PCS-921 (conventional CT/VT)

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

6-5
Date: 2013-02-28

6 Hardware
PCS-921 (conventional CT/VT and conventional binary input and binary output)
Slot No.

01

08

09

11

12

13

15

P1

Module ID

NR1102

02

NR1401

03

NR1161

04

05

06

07

NR1504

NR1504

10

NR1521

NR1521

NR1521

14

NR1521

NR1301

MON

AI

DSP

BI

BI

BO

BO

BO

BO

PWR

08

09

11

12

13

PCS-921 (conventional CT/VT and GOOSE binary input and binary output)
Slot No.

01

Module ID

NR1102

02

NR1401

03

NR1161

04

05

NR1136

06

07

NR1504

10

14

15

NR1301

P1

MON

AI

DSP

NETDSP

BI

PWR

03

04

05

07

08

09

10

11

12

NR1301

PWR module

06

NR1521A NR1521C

BO module

DSP module
02

NR1503

BO module

01

NR1136

BI module

Slot No.

NR1161

NET-DSP Module

NR1161

MON module

NR1102

DSP module

6.2.2 ECT/EVT (For reference only)

13

14

15

P1

The following typical wiring is given based on above hardware configuration

6-6

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

6 Hardware

MU

Phase B

RX

Phase C

TX

P110

OPTO+

P107

OPTO-

P108

Power
Supply

P103

BO_ALM

P101

COM

P105

BO_FAIL

P106

BO_ALM

P104

COM

0802

0803

0804

0805

0806

BI_11

0821

0822
1101

BO_01

1102
1103

BO_02

1104

BO_11

1121
1122
1201

BO_01

1202
1203

BO_02

1204

BO_FAIL

Signal Binary Output

P102

BI_03

0801

PWR-

P111

BI_02

Power supply for


opto-coupler (24V)

PWR+

Controlled by fault
detector element

External DC power
supply

*BI plug-in module can be common negative


terminal

Phase A

FO interface for SV channel


Up to 8
(LC Type)

SV from
ECT/EVT

BI_01

BO_11

1221
1222
1501

BO_CtrlOpn1

SGND

0103
0104
0101

SYN-

0102

SGND

0103
0104
0105

TXD

0106

SGND

0107

1504
1517

BO_CtrlOpn5

1518
1519

BO_CtrlCls5

1520
1521

BO_Ctrl

1522
IRIG-B

PRINT

PRINTER

RTS

Clock SYN

SYN+

BO_CtrlCls1

0102

Signal Binary Output (option)

0101

COM

To the screen of other coaxial


cable with single point earthing

1502
1503

Multiplex
RJ45 (Front)

P112
0225

Grounding
Bus

Figure 6.2-2 Typical wiring of PCS-921 (ECT/EVT)

PCS-921 ECT/EVT, GOOSE binary input and binary output


Slot No.

01

Module ID

NR1102

02

03

NR1161

04

05

NR1136

06

07

NR1504

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

NR1301

P1

MON

DSP

NETDSP

BI

PWR

PCS-921 ECT/EVT, conventional binary input and binary output


Slot No.

01

02

03

04

Module ID

NR1102

NR1161

MON

DSP

05

06

07

08

09

NR1136

NR1504

NETDSP

BI

11

12

13

NR1504

NR1521

NR1521

BI

BO

BO

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

10

14

15

P1

NR1521

NR1521

NR1301

BO

BO

PWR

6-7
Date: 2013-02-28

6 Hardware

In the protection system adopting electronic current and voltage transformer (ECT/EVT), the
merging unit will merge the sample data from ECT/EVT, and then send it to the device through
multi-mode optical fibre. DSP module receives the data from merging unit through the optical-fibre
interface to complete the protection calculation and fault detector.
The difference between the hardware platform based on ECT/EVT and the hardware platform
based on conventional CT/VT lies in the receiving module of sampled values only, and the device
receives the sampled value from merging unit through multi-mode optical fibre.

6.2.3 CT Requirement
-Rated primary current Ipn:
According to the rated current or maximum load current of primary apparatus.
-Rated continuous thermal current Icth:
According to the maximum load current.
-Rated short-time thermal current Ith and rated dynamic current Idyn:
According to the maximum fault current.
-Rated secondary current Isn
-Accuracy limit factor Kalf:
Ipn

Rated primary current (amps)

Icth

Rated continuous thermal current (amps)

Ith

Rated short-time thermal current (amps)

Idyn

Rated dynamic current (amps)

Isn

Rated secondary current (amps)

Kalf

Accuracy limit factor ()Kalf=Ipal/Ipn

IPal

Rated accuracy limit primary current (amps)

Performance verification
Esl > Esl
Esl

Rated secondary limiting e.m.f (volts)


Esl = kalfIsn(Rct+Rbn)

Kalf

Accuracy limit factor (Kalf=Ipal/Ipn)

IPal

Rated accuracy limit primary current (amps)

Ipn

Rated primary current (amps)

Isn

Rated secondary current (amps)

Rct

Current transformer secondary winding resistance. (ohms)

Rbn

Rated resistance burden (ohms)


Rbn=Sbn/Isn

Sbn

Rated burden (VAs)

Esl

Required secondary limiting e.m.f (volts)

6-8

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

6 Hardware
Esl = kIpcf Isn(Rct+Rb)/Ipn
k
Ipcf

stability factor = 2
Protective checking factor current (amps)
Same as the maximum prospective fault current

Isn

Rated secondary current (amps)

Rct

Current transformer secondary winding resistance. (ohms)

Rb

Real resistance burden (ohms)


Rb=Rr+2RL+Rc

Rc

Contact resistance, 0.05-0.1 ohm (ohms)

RL

Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (ohms)

Rr

Impedance of relay phase current input (ohms)

Ipn

Rated primary current (amps)

For example:
1.

Kalf=30, Isn=5A, Rct=1ohm, Sbn=60VA

Esl = kalfIsn(Rct+Rbn) = kalfIsn(Rct+ Sbn/ Isn2)


= 305(1+60/25)=510V
2.

Ipcf=40000A, RL=0.5ohm, Rr=0.1ohm, Rc=0.1ohm, Ipn=2000A

Esl = 2IpcfIsn(Rct+Rb)/Ipn
= 2Ipcf Isn(Rct+(Rr+2RL+Rc))/Ipn
= 2400005(1+(0.1+20.5+0.1))/2000=440V
Thus, Esl > Esl

6.3 Plug-in Module Description


The device consists of PWR plug-in module, MON plug-in module, DSP plug-in module, AI plug-in
module, BI plug-in module, BO plug-in module and NET-DSP plug-in module. Terminal definitions
and application of each plug-in module are introduced as follows.

6.3.1 PWR Plug-in Module (Power Supply)


PWR module is a DC/DC converter with electrical insulation between input and output. It has an
input voltage range as described in Chapter 2 Technical Data. The standardized output voltages
are +5V and +24V DC. The tolerances of the output voltages are continuously monitored.
The +5V DC output provides power supply for all the electrical elements that need +5V DC power
supply in this device.
The use of an external miniature circuit breaker is recommended. The miniature circuit breaker
must be in the on position when the device is in operation and in the off position when the device is
in cold reserve.
A 12-pin connector is fixed on PWR module. The terminal definition of the connector is described

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

6-9
Date: 2013-02-28

6 Hardware

as below.

NR1301A
5V OK

BO_ALM

ALM

BO_FAIL

BO_COM1

BO_FAIL

BO_ALM

BO_COM2

BO_FAIL

BO_ALM

OPTO+

OPTO-

9
10 PWR+
11 PWR12 GND

Figure 6.3-1 View of PWR plug-in module

The power switch in the dotted box of above figure maybe is not existed.
01
BO_FAIL
02
BO_ALM
03
04
BO_FAIL
05
BO_ALM
06

Figure 6.3-2 Output contacts of PWR plug-in module

Terminal definition and description is shown as follows:


Table 6.3-1 Terminal definition and description of PWR plug-in module
Terminal No.

Symbol

Description

01

BO_COM1

Common terminal 1

02

BO_FAIL

Device failure output 1 (01-02, NC)

03

BO_ALM

Device abnormality alarm output 1 (01-03, NO)

04

BO_COM2

Common terminal 2

05

BO_FAIL

Device failure output 2 (04-05, NC)

6-10

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

6 Hardware
Terminal No.

Symbol

Description

06

BO_ALM

Device abnormality alarm output 2 (04-06, NO)

07

OPTO+

Positive power supply for BI module (24V)

08

OPTO-

Negative power supply for BI module (24V)

09

Blank

Not used

10

PWR+

Positive input of power supply for the device (250V/220V/125V/110V)

11

PWR-

Negative input of power supply for the device (250V/220V/125V/110V)

12

GND

Grounded connection of the power supply

NOTE!

The standard rated voltage of PWR module is self-adaptive to 88~300Vdc. If input voltage
is out of range, an alarm signal (Fail_Device) will be issued. For non-standard rated
voltage power supply module please specify when place order, and check if the rated
voltage of power supply module is the same as the voltage of power source before the
device being put into service.
PWR module provides terminal 12 and grounding screw for device grounding. Terminal 12
shall be connected to grounding screw and then connected to the earth copper bar of
panel via dedicated grounding wire.
Effective grounding is the most important measure for a device to prevent EMI, so effective
grounding must be ensured before the device is put into service.
PCS-921, like almost all electronic relays, contains electrolytic capacitors. These
capacitors are well known to be subject to deterioration over time if voltage is not applied
periodically. Deterioration can be avoided by powering the relays up once a year.

6.3.2 MON Plug-in Module (Monitor)


MON module consists of high-performance built-in processor, FLASH, SRAM, SDRAM, Ethernet
controller and other peripherals. Its functions include management of the complete device, human
machine interface, communication and waveform recording etc.
MON module uses the internal bus to receive the data from other modules of the device. It
communicates with the LCD module by RS-485 bus. This module comprises 100BaseT Ethernet
interfaces, RS-485 communication interfaces that exchange information with above system by
using IEC 61850, PPS/IRIG-B differential time synchronization interface and RS-232 printing
interface.
Modules with various combinations of memory and interface are available as shown in the table
below.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

6-11
Date: 2013-02-28

6 Hardware

NR1102A

ETHERNET

NR1102C

ETHERNET

NR1102B

ETHERNET

NR1102D

NR1102H

NR1102I

TX

TX

RX

RX

TX

TX

ETHERNET

NR1101E

ETHERNET

RX

RX

ETHERNET

ETHERNET

Figure 6.3-3 View of MON plug-in module


Module ID

Memory

Interface

Terminal No.

2 RJ45 Ethernet

RS-485
NR1102A

64M DDR

To SCADA
01

SYN+

02

SYN-

To

03

SGND

synchronization

05

RTS

06

TXD

07

SGND

4 RJ45 Ethernet

RS-485
64M DDR

Twisted pair wire

To printer

Cable

To SCADA
01

SYN+

02

SYN-

To

03

SGND

synchronization

05

RTS

06

TXD

07

SGND

2 RJ45 Ethernet

128M DDR

clock

clock

Twisted pair wire

04

RS-232

NR1102C

Physical Layer

04

RS-232

NR1102B

Usage

RS-485

To printer

Cable

To SCADA
01

SYN+

02

SYN-

To

03

SGND

synchronization

clock

Twisted pair wire

04

6-12

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

6 Hardware

RS-232

05

RTS

06

TXD

07

SGND

4 RJ45 Ethernet

RS-485
NR1102D

128M DDR

128M DDR

Cable

To SCADA
01

SYN+

02

SYN-

To

03

SGND

synchronization

clock

Twisted pair wire

04

RS-232

NR1102H

To printer

05

RTS

06

TXD

07

SGND

To printer

Cable

2 RJ45 Ethernet

To SCADA

Twisted pair wire

2 FO Ethernet

To SCADA

Optical fibre SC

RS-485

01

SYN+

02

SYN-

To

03

SGND

synchronization

clock

Twisted pair wire

04

RS-232

NR1102I

128M DDR

05

RTS

06

TXD

07

SGND

To printer

Cable

2 RJ45 Ethernet

To SCADA

Twisted pair wire

2 FO Ethernet

To SCADA

Optical fibre ST

RS-485

01

SYN+

02

SYN-

To

03

SGND

synchronization

clock

Twisted pair wire

04

RS-232

05

RTS

06

TXD

07

SGND

2 RJ45 Ethernet

RS-485

To printer

Cable

To SCADA
01

02

03

SGND

To SCADA

04

NR1101E

128M DDR

RS-485

05

06

07

SGND

Twisted pair wire

To SCADA

08

RS-485

09

SYN+

10

SYN-

To

11

SGND

synchronization

RTS

To printer

clock

12
RS-232

13

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

Cable

6-13
Date: 2013-02-28

6 Hardware
14

TXD

15

SGND

16

The correct connection is shown in Figure 6.3-4. Generally, the shielded cable with two pairs of
twisted pairs inside shall be applied. One pair of the twisted pairs are respectively used to connect
the + and terminals of difference signal. The other pair of twisted pairs are used to connect
the signal ground of the communication interface. The module reserves a free terminal for all the
communication ports. The free terminal has no connection with any signal of the device, and it is
used to connect the external shields of the cable when connecting multiple devices in series. The
external shield of the cable shall be grounded at one of the ends only.
Twisted pair wire
01

485-1B

02

SGND

03

COM

04

Twisted pair wire


SYN+

01

SYN-

02

SGND

03

Clock SYN

To the screen of other coaxial


cable with single point earthing

485-1A

04

Twisted pair wire


05

TXD

06

SGND

07

PRINT

RTS

Figure 6.3-4 Connection of communication terminal

6.3.3 AI Plug-in Module (Analog Input)


AI module is applicable for power plant or substation with conventional VT and CT. It is assigned to
slot numbers 02 and 03. However, the module is not required if the device is used with ECT/EVT.
For AI module, if the plug is not put in the socket, external CT circuit is closed itself. Just shown as
below.

Socket

Plug

In

Out

plug is not put in the socket

6-14

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

6 Hardware

In

Out

Put the plug in the socket

Figure 6.3-5 Schematic diagram of CT circuit automatically closed

There are two types of AI module with rating 5 A or 1 A. Please declare which kind of AI module is
needed before ordering. Maximum linear range of the current converter is 40In.
Three phase currents (Ia, Ib and Ic) are input to AI module separately, terminal 01, 03 and 05 are
polarity marks. It is assumed that polarity mark of CT installed on line is at line side. Three phase
voltages (Ua, Ub, and Uc) are input to AI module, terminal 13, 15 and 17 are polarity marks.
A
B
C

P2

S2

P1

S1

02

01

04

03

06

05

Figure 6.3-6 Current connection of AI plug-in module

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

6-15
Date: 2013-02-28

6 Hardware
A
B
C

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

Figure 6.3-7 Voltage connection 1 of AI plug-in module


A
B
C

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

Figure 6.3-8 Voltage connection 2 of AI plug-in module

If the synchronism voltage need to be connected, there are two situations:


1.

Without synchronism voltage switchover

The synchronism voltage can be connected to terminal 19 and 20 (terminal 19 is polarity mark).
6-16

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

6 Hardware

The synchronism voltage could be any phase-to-ground voltage or phase-to-phase voltage.


Ia

01

Ian

02

Ib

03

Ibn

04

Ic

05

Icn

06

NR1401

07

08

09

10

11

12

Ua

13

Uan

14

Ub

15

Ubn

16

Uc

17

Ucn

18

Us

19

Usn

20

21

22

23

24

Figure 6.3-9 View of AI plug-in module (without synchronism voltage switchover)

Table 6.3-2 lists the terminal number and definition of AI module.


Table 6.3-2 Terminal definition of AI module (without synchronism voltage switchover)
Terminal No.

Definition

Definition

01

Ia

The current of A-phase (Polarity mark)

02

Ian

The current of A-phase

03

Ib

The current of B-phase (Polarity mark)

04

Ibn

The current of B-phase

05

Ic

The current of C-phase (Polarity mark)

06

Icn

The current of C-phase

07

Reserved

08

Reserved

09

Reserved

10

Reserved

11

Reserved

12

Reserved

13

Ua

The voltage of A-phase (Polarity mark)

14

Uan

The voltage of A-phase

15

Ub

The voltage of B-phase (Polarity mark)

16

Ubn

The voltage of B-phase

17

Uc

The voltage of C-phase (Polarity mark)

18

Ucn

The voltage of C-phase

19

Us

Synchronism voltage (Polarity mark)

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

6-17
Date: 2013-02-28

6 Hardware
Terminal No.

2.

Definition

20

Usn

21

Reserved

22

Reserved

23

Reserved

24

Reserved

25

GND

Definition
Synchronism voltage

Ground

With synchronism voltage switchover

UB1, UB2 and UL2 are the synchronism voltage from bus VT and line VT used for synchrocheck, it
could be any phase-to-ground voltage or phase-to-phase voltage. The device can automatically
switch synchronism voltage according to auxiliary contact of CB position or DS position.
Ia

01

Ian

02

Ib

03

Ibn

04

Ic

05

Icn

06

NR1401

07

08

09

10

11

12

Ua

13

Uan

14

Ub

15

Ubn

16

Uc

17

Ucn

18

UB1

19

UB1n

20

UL2

21

UL2n

22

UB2

23

UB2n

24

Figure 6.3-10 View of AI plug-in module (with synchronism voltage switchover)

Table 6.3-3 lists the terminal number and definition of AI module.


Table 6.3-3 Terminal definition of AI module (with synchronism voltage switchover)
Terminal No.

Definition

Definition

01

Ia

The current of A-phase (Polarity mark)

02

Ian

The current of A-phase

03

Ib

The current of B-phase (Polarity mark)

04

Ibn

The current of B-phase

05

Ic

The current of C-phase (Polarity mark)

06

Icn

The current of C-phase

07

Reserve

08

Reserve

6-18

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

6 Hardware
Terminal No.

Definition

Definition

09

Reserve

10

Reserve

11

Reserve

12

Reserve

13

Ua

The voltage of A-phase (Polarity mark)

14

Uan

The voltage of A-phase

15

Ub

The voltage of B-phase (Polarity mark)

16

Ubn

The voltage of B-phase

17

Uc

The voltage of C-phase (Polarity mark)

18

Ucn

The voltage of C-phase

19

UB1

The voltage of bus 1 (Polarity mark)

20

UB1n

The voltage of bus 1

21

UL2

The voltage of line 2 (Polarity mark)

22

UL2n

The voltage of line 2

23

UB2

The voltage of bus 2 (Polarity mark)

24

UB2n

The voltage of bus 2

25

GND

Ground

If the auto-reclosing is enabled but synchronism check is not required, the synchronism voltage
should be disconnected.

6.3.4 DSP Plug-in Module (Logic Proces)

NR1161

Figure 6.3-11 View of DSP plug-in module

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

6-19
Date: 2013-02-28

6 Hardware

This device can be equipped with 2 DSP plug-in modules at most and 1 DSP plug-in module at
least. The default DSP plug-in module is necessary, which mainly is responsible for protection
function including fault detector and protection calculation.
The module consists of high-performance double DSP (digital signal processor), 16-digit
high-accuracy ADC that can perform synchronous sampling and manage other peripherals. One
of double DSP is responsible for protection calculation, and can fulfill analog data acquisition,
protection logic calculation and tripping output. The other is responsible for fault detector, and can
fulfill analog data acquisition, fault detector and providing power supply to output relay.
When the module is connected with conventional CT/VT, it can perform the synchronous data
acquisition through AI plug-in module. When the module is connected with ECT/EVT, it can
receive the real-time synchronous sampled value from merging unit through NET-DSP plug-in
module.
The other module is optional and it is not required unless control and manual closing with
synchronism check are equppied with this device. The default DSP plug-in module is fixed at slot
04 and the option DSP plug-in module is fixed at slot 06.

6.3.5 NET-DSP Plug-in Module (GOOSE and SV)

NR1136A

NR1136C

RX

Figure 6.3-12 View of NET-DSP plug-in module

This module consists of high-performance DSP (digital signal processor), 2~8 100Mbit/s
optical-fibre interface (LC type) and selectable IRIG-B interface (ST type). It supports GOOSE and
SV by IEC 61850-9-2 protocols. It can receive and send GOOSE messages to intelligent control
device, and receive SV from MU (merging unit).

6-20

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

6 Hardware

This module supports IEEE1588 network time protocol, E2E and P2P defined in IEEE1588
protocol can be selected.This module supports Ethernet IEEE802.3 time adjustment message
format, UDP time adjustment message format and GMRP.

6.3.6 BI Plug-in Module (Binary Input)


There are two kinds of BI modules available, NR1503 and NR1504. Up to 3 BI modules can be
equipped with one device. The rated voltage can be selected to be 24V/48V (NR1503D or
NR1504D) or 110V/220V/125V/250V (NR1503A or NR1504A).
Each BI module is with a 22-pin connector for 11 binary inputs (NR1503) or 18 binary inputs
(NR1504).
For NR1503, each binary input has independent negative power input of opto-coupler, and can be
configurable. The terminal definition of the connector of BI plug-in module is described as below.
[BI_n] (n=01, 02, ,11 can be configured as a specified binary input by PCS-Explorer software.)

NR1503

BI_01

01

Opto01-

02

BI_02

03

Opto02-

04

BI_03

05

Opto03-

06

BI_04

07

Opto04-

08

BI_05

09

Opto05-

10

BI_06

11

Opto06-

12

BI_07

13

Opto07-

14

BI_08

15

Opto08-

16

BI_09

17

Opto09-

18

BI_10

19

Opto10-

20

BI_11

21

Opto11-

22

Figure 6.3-13 View of BI plug-in module (NR1503)

Terminal description for NR 1503 is shown as follows.


Terminal No.

Symbol

Description

01

BI_01

Configurable binary input 1

02

Opto01-

Negative supply of configurable binary input 1

03

BI_02

Configurable binary input 2

04

Opto02-

Negative supply of configurable binary input 2

05

BI_03

Configurable binary input 3

06

Opto03-

Negative supply of configurable binary input 3

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

6-21
Date: 2013-02-28

6 Hardware
Terminal No.

Symbol

Description

07

BI_04

Configurable binary input 4

08

Opto04-

Negative supply of configurable binary input 4

09

BI_05

Configurable binary input 5

10

Opto05-

Negative supply of configurable binary input 5

11

BI_06

Configurable binary input 6

12

Opto06-

Negative supply of configurable binary input 6

13

BI_07

Configurable binary input 7

14

Opto07-

Negative supply of configurable binary input 7

15

BI_08

Configurable binary input 8

16

Opto08-

Negative supply of configurable binary input 8

17

BI_09

Configurable binary input 9

18

Opto09-

Negative supply of configurable binary input 9

19

BI_10

Configurable binary input 10

20

Opto10-

Negative supply of configurable binary input 10

21

BI_11

Configurable binary input 11

22

Opto11-

Negative supply of configurable binary input 11

For NR1504, all binary inputs share one common negative power input, and is configurable. The
terminal definition of the connector of BI plug-in module is described as below. [BI_n] (n=01,
02,,18 can be configured as a specified binary input by PCS-Explorer software.)

NR1504

Opto+

01

BI_01

02

BI_02

03

BI_03

04

BI_04

05

BI_05

06

BI_06

07
08

BI_07

09

BI_08

10

BI_09

11

BI_10

12

BI_11

13

BI_12

14
15

BI_13

16

BI_14

17

BI_15

18

BI_16

19

BI_17

20

BI_18

21

COM-

22

Figure 6.3-14 View of BI plug-in module (NR1504)

Terminal description for NR1504 is shown as follows.

6-22

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

6 Hardware
Terminal No.

Symbol

Description

01

Opto+

Positive supply of power supply of the module

02

BI_01

Configurable binary input 1

03

BI_02

Configurable binary input 2

04

BI_03

Configurable binary input 3

05

BI_04

Configurable binary input 4

06

BI_05

Configurable binary input 5

07

BI_06

Configurable binary input 6

08

Blank

Not used

09

BI_07

Configurable binary input 7

10

BI_08

Configurable binary input 8

11

BI_09

Configurable binary input 9

12

BI_10

Configurable binary input 10

13

BI_11

Configurable binary input 11

14

BI_12

Configurable binary input 12

15

Blank

Not used

16

BI_13

Configurable binary input 13

17

BI_14

Configurable binary input 14

18

BI_15

Configurable binary input 15

19

BI_16

Configurable binary input 16

20

BI_17

Configurable binary input 17

21

BI_18

Configurable binary input 18

22

COM-

Common terminal of negative supply of binary inputs

First four binary signals (BI_01, BI_02, BI_03, BI_04) in first BI plug-in module are fixed, they are
[BI_TimeSyn], [BI_Print], [BI_Maintenance] and [BI_RstTarg] respectively.
1.

Binary input: [BI_TimeSyn]

It is used to receive clock synchronization signal from clock synchronization device, the binary
input [BI_TimeSyn] will change from 0 to 1 once pulse signal is received. When the device
adopts Conventional mode as clock synchronization mode (refer to section Communication
Settings), the device can receives PPM (pulse per minute) and PPS (pulse per second). If the
setting [Opt_TimeSyn] is set as other values, this binary input is invalid.
2.

Binary input: [BI_Print]

It is used to manually trigger printing latest report when the equipment is configured as manual
printing mode by logic setting [En_AutoPrint]=0. The printer button is located on the panel usually.
If the equipment is configured as automatic printing mode ([En_AutoPrint]=1), report will be printed
automatically as soon as it is formed.
3.

Binary input: [BI_Maintenance]

It is used to block communication export when this binary input is energized. During device
maintenance or testing, this binary input is then energized not to send reports via communication
port, local display and printing still work as usual. This binary input should be de-energized when
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

6-23
Date: 2013-02-28

6 Hardware

the device is restored back to normal.


The application of the binary input [BI_Maintenance] for digital substation communication adopting
IEC61850 protocol is given as follows.
1)

Processing mechanism for MMS (Manufacturing Message Specification) message

a)

The protection device should send the state of this binary input to client.

b) When this binary input is energized, the bit Test of quality (Q) in the sent message changes
to 1.
c) When this binary input is energized, the client cannot control the isolator link and circuit
breaker, modify settings and switch setting group remotely.
d) According to the value of the bit Test of quality (Q) in the message sent, the client
discriminate whether this message is maintenance message, and then deal with it correspondingly.
If the message is the maintenance message, the content of the message will not be displayed on
real-time message window, audio alarm not issued, but the picture is refreshed so as to ensure
that the state of the picture is in step with the actual state. The maintenance message will be
stored, and can be inquired, in independent window.
2)

Processing mechanism for GOOSE message

a) When this binary input is energized, the bit Test in the GOOSE message sent by the
protection device changes to 1.
b) For the receiving end of GOOSE message, it will compare the value of the bit Test in the
GOOSE message received by it with the state of its own binary input (i..e [BI_Maintenance]), the
message will be thought as invalid unless they are conformable.
3)

Processing mechanism for SV (Sampling Value) message

a) When this binary input of merging unit is energized, the bit Test of quality (Q) of sampling
data in the SV message sent change 1.
b) For the receiving end of SV message, if the value of bit Test of quality (Q) of sampling data
in the SV message received is 1, the relevant protection functions will be disabled, but under
maintenance state, the protection device should calculate and display the magnitude of sampling
data.
c) For duplicated protection function configurations, all merging units of control module
configured to receive sampling should be also duplicated. Both dual protection devices and dual
merging units should be fully independent each other, and one of them is in maintenance state will
not affect the normal operation of the other.
4.

Binary input: [BI_RstTarg]

It is used to reset latching signal relay and LCD displaying. The reset is done by pressing a button
on the panel.

6-24

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

6 Hardware

Note!

The rated voltage of binary input is optional: 24V, 48V, 110V, 125V, 220V or 250V, which
must be specified when placed order. It is necessary to check whether the rated voltage of
BI module complies with site DC supply rating before put the relay in service.

6.3.7 BO Plug-in Module (Binary Output)


NR1521A, NR1521C and NR1521F modules are three standard binary output modules. The
contacts provided by NR1521A, NR1521C and NR1521F are all normally open (NO) contacts.
Output contact can be configured as a specified tripping output contact and a signal output contact
respectively by PCS-Explorer software according to user requirement.
NR1521A can provide 11 output contacts controlled by fault detector.

BO_01
NR1521A

BO_02

BO_03

BO_04

BO_05

BO_06

BO_07

BO_08

BO_09

BO_10

BO_11

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

Figure 6.3-15 View of BO plug-in module (NR1521A)

NR1521C can provide 11 output contacts without controlled by fault detector.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

6-25
Date: 2013-02-28

6 Hardware

BO_01
NR1521C

BO_02

BO_03

BO_04

BO_05

BO_06

BO_07

BO_08

BO_09

BO_10

BO_11

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

Figure 6.3-16 View of BO plug-in module (NR1521C)

BO plug-in module (NR1521F) is dedicatedly for remote/manual open or closing to circuit breaker,
disconnector and earth switch. 5 pairs of binary outputs (one for open and the other for closing)
can be provided by this BO plug-in module configured in slot 15 if measurement and control
function is equipped with the device. Up to 10 pairs of binary outputs can be provided by two BO
plug-in modules that can be configured in slot 14 and 15 respectively. (BO plug-in module
configured in slot 14 is optional if open or closing contacts is not enough)
A normally open contact is presented via terminal 21-22 designated as ROS (i.e. remote operation
signal). Whenever any of binary output contacts for open or closing is closed, ROS contact will
close to issue a signal indicating that this device is undergoing a remote operation.
BO plug-in module (NR1521F) is displayed as shown in the following figure.

6-26

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

6 Hardware

BO_CtrlOpn01
NR1521F

BO_CtrlCls01

BO_CtrlOpn02

BO_CtrlCls02

BO_CtrlOpn03

BO_CtrlCls03

BO_CtrlOpn04

BO_CtrlCls04

BO_CtrlOpn05

BO_CtrlCls05

BO_Ctrl

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

Figure 6.3-17 View of BO plug-in module (NR1521F)

6.3.8 HMI Module


The display panel consists of liquid crystal display module, keyboard, LED and ARM processor.
The functions of ARM processor include display control of the liquid crystal display module,
keyboard processing, and exchanging data with the CPU through LAN port etc. The liquid crystal
display module is a high-performance grand liquid crystal panel with soft back lighting, which has a
user-friendly interface and an extensive display range.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

6-27
Date: 2013-02-28

6 Hardware

6-28

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

7 Settings

7 Settings
Table of Contents
7.1 Communication Settings ................................................................................ 7-1
7.1.1 Setting Description............................................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.2 Access Path ......................................................................................................................... 7-5

7.2 Device Settings ............................................................................................... 7-5


7.2.1 Setting Description............................................................................................................... 7-5
7.2.2 Access Path ......................................................................................................................... 7-6

7.3 System Settings .............................................................................................. 7-6


7.3.1 Setting Description............................................................................................................... 7-6
7.3.2 Access Path ......................................................................................................................... 7-7

7.4 Protection Settings ......................................................................................... 7-7


7.4.1 Setting Description............................................................................................................... 7-7
7.4.2 Access Path ....................................................................................................................... 7-12

7.5 Logic Link Settings ....................................................................................... 7-12


7.5.1 Setting Description............................................................................................................. 7-12
7.5.2 Access Path ....................................................................................................................... 7-13

7.6 Measurement and Control Settings ............................................................. 7-13


7.6.1 Setting Description............................................................................................................. 7-13
7.6.2 Access Path ....................................................................................................................... 7-15

List of Tables
Table 7.1-1 Communication settings ......................................................................................... 7-1
Table 7.2-1 Device settings......................................................................................................... 7-5
Table 7.3-1 System settings ....................................................................................................... 7-6

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

7-a
Date: 2013-02-28

7 Settings

7-b

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

7 Settings

The device has some setting groups for protection to coordinate with the mode of power system
operation, one of which is assigned to be active. However, equipment parameters are common for
all protection setting groups.
Note!
All current settings in this chapter are secondary current converted from primary current by
CT ratio. Zero-sequence current or voltage setting is configured according to 3I0 or 3U0
and negative sequence current setting according to I2 or U2.

7.1 Communication Settings


Table 7.1-1 Communication settings
No.

Item

Range

IP_LAN1

000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255

Mask_LAN1

000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255

IP_LAN2

000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255

Mask_LAN2

000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255

En_LAN2

0 or 1

IP_LAN3

000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255

Mask_LAN3

000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255

En_LAN3

0 or 1

IP_LAN4

000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255

10

Mask_LAN4

000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255

11

En_LAN4

0 or 1

12

Gateway

000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255

13

En_Broadcast

0 or 1

14

Addr_RS485A

0~255

15

Baud_RS485A

4800,9600,19200,38400,57600,115200 (bps)

16

Protocol_RS485A

0, 1 or 2

17

Addr_RS485B

0~255

18

Baud_RS485B

4800,9600,19200,38400,57600,115200 (bps)

19

Protocol_RS485B

0, 1 or 2

20

Threshold_Measmt

0~100%

21

Period_Measmt

0~65535s

22

Format_Measmt

0, 1

23

Baud_Printer

4800,9600,19200,38400,57600,115200 (bps)

24

En_AutoPrint

0 or 1
Conventional

25

Opt_TimeSyn

SAS
Advanced
NoTImeSyn

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

7-1
Date: 2013-02-28

7 Settings
No.

Item

Range

26

IP_Server_SNTP

000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255

27

OffsetHour_UTC

-12~+12 (hrs)

28

OffsetMinute_UTC

0~60 (min)

7.1.1 Setting Description


1.

IP_LAN1, IP_LAN2, IP_LAN3, IP_LAN4

IP address of Ethernet port 1, Ethernet port 2, Ethernet port 3 and Ethernet port 4
2.

Mask_LAN1, Mask_LAN2, Mask_LAN3, Mask_LAN4

Subnet mask of Ethernet port 1, Ethernet port 2, Ethernet port 3 and Ethernet port 4
3.

En_LAN2, En_LAN3, En_LAN4

Put Ethernet port 2, Ethernet port 3 and Ethernet port 4 in service


They are used for Ethernet communication based on the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol. When the IEC
61850 protocol is applied, the IP address of Ethernet A will be GOOSE source MAC address.
Ethernet port 1 is always in service by default.

4.

Gateway

IP address of Gateway (router)

5.

En_Broadcast

This setting is only used only for IEC 60870-5-103 protocol. If NR network IEC 60870-5-103
protocol is used, the setting must be set as 1.
0: the device does not send UDP messages through network
1: the device sends UDP messages through network
6.

Addr_RS485A, Addr_RS485B

They are the devices communication address used to communicate with the SCADA or RTU via
serial ports (port A and port B).
7.

Baud_RS485A, Baud_RS485B

Baud rate of rear RS-485 serial port A or B


8.

Protocol_RS485A, Protocol_RS485B

Communication protocol of rear RS-485 serial port A or B


0: IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
1: Modbus Protocol
2: Reserved

7-2

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

7 Settings

Note!
Above table listed all the communication settings, the device delivered to the user maybe
only show some settings of them according to the communication interface configuration.
If only the Ethernet ports are applied, the settings about the serial ports (port A and port B)
are not listed in this submenu. And the settings about the Ethernet ports only listed in this
submenu according to the actual number of Ethernet ports.
The standard arrangement of the Ethernet port is two, at most four (predetermined when
ordering). Set the IP address according to actual arrangement of Ethernet numbers and
the un-useful port/ports need not be configured. If PCS-Explorer configuration tool
auxiliary software is connected with this device through the Ethernet, the IP address of the
PCS-Explorer must be set as one of the available IP address of this device.

9.

Threshold_Measmt

Threshold value of sending measurement values to SCADA through IEC 60870-5-103 or


IEC61850 protocol.
Default value: 1%

10. Period_Measmt
The time period for equipment sends measurement data to SCADA through IEC 60870-5-103
protocol.
Default value: 60

11. Format_Measmt
The setting is used to select the format of measurement data sent to SCADA through IEC
60870-5-103 protocol.
0: GDD data type through IEC103 protocol is 12
1: GDD data type through IEC103 protocol is 7, i.e. 754 short real number of IEEE standard
12. Baud_Printer
Baud rate of printer port
13. En_AutoPrint
If automatic print is required for fault report after protection operating, it is set as 1. Otherwise, it
should be set to 0.
14. Opt_TimeSyn
There are four selections for clock synchronization of device, shown as follows.

Conventional

PPS (RS-485): Pulse per second (PPS) via RS-485 differential level

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

7-3
Date: 2013-02-28

7 Settings

IRIG-B (RS-485): IRIG-B via RS-485 differential level


PPM (DIN): Pulse per minute (PPM) via the binary input [BI_TimeSyn]
PPS (DIN): Pulse per second (PPS) via the binary input [BI_TimeSyn]

SAS

SNTP (PTP): Unicast (point-to-point) SNTP mode via Ethernet network


SNTP (BC): Broadcast SNTP mode via Ethernet network
Message (IEC103): Clock messages through IEC103 protocol

Advanced

IEEE1588: Clock message via IEEE1588


IRIG-B (Fiber): IRIG-B via optical-fibre interface
PPS (Fiber) PPS: Pulse per second (PPS) via optical-fibre interface

NoTimeSync

When no time synchronization signal is connected to the device, please select this option and the
alarm message [Alm_TimeSyn] will not be issued anymore.
Conventional mode and SAS mode are always be supported by the device, but Advanced
mode is only supported when NET-DSP module is equipped. The alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn]
may be issued to remind user loss of time synchronization signals.
1)

When SAS is selected, if there is no conventional clock synchronization signal, the device
will not send the alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn]. When Conventional mode is selected, if there
is no conventional clock synchronization signal, SAS mode will be enabled automatically
with the alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn] issued simultaneously.

2)

When Advanced mode is selected, if there is no conventional clock synchronization signal


connected to NET-DSP module, SAS mode is enabled automatically with the alarm signal
[Alm_TimeSyn] issued simultaneously.

3)

When NoTimeSyn mode is selected, the device will not send alarm signals without time
synchronization signal. But the device can be still synchronized if receiving time
synchronization signal.
Note!
The clock message via IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is invalid when the device receives the
IRIG-B signal through RCS-485 port.

15. IP_Server_SNTP
It is the address of the SNTP time synchronization server which sends SNTP timing messages to
the relay or BCU.

7-4

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

7 Settings

16. OffsetHour_UTC, OffsetMinute_UTC


If the IEC61850 protocol is adopted in substations, the time tags of communication messages are
required according to UTC (Universal Time Coordinated) time.
The setting [OffsetHour_UTC] is used to set the hour offset of the current time zone to the GMT
(Greenwich Mean Time) zone; for example, if a relay is applied in China, the time zone of China is
east 8th time zone, so this setting is set as 8. The setting [OffsetMinute_UTC] is used to set the
minute offset of the current time zone to the GMT zone.
Time zone

GMT zone

East 1

Setting

East 6

Time zone

th

12/-12

Setting

West 6

Time zone

th

-6

Setting

th

East 8

East/West 12

Time zone

nd

th

rd

East 2

East 3

East 7

Setting

st

3
th

East 9

West 1

st

West 2

-1

West 3

-2

West 7

th

West 8

-7

West 9

-8

East 10

West 4

-9

West 10
-10

th

East 11

th

11
th

-4
th

East 5
5

th

10
rd

-3
th

th

4
th

9
nd

East 4

West 5

th

-5
th

West 11

th

-11

7.1.2 Access Path


MainMenuSettingsDevice SetupComm Settings

7.2 Device Settings


Table 7.2-1 Device settings
No.

Item

Range

HDR_EncodedMode

GB18030, UTF-8

Opt_Caption_103

0, 1 or 2

Bxx.Un_BinaryInput

24V, 30V, 48V, 110V, 125V, 220V

7.2.1 Setting Description


1.

HDR_EncodedMode

Select encoding format of header (HDR) file COMTRADE recording file


Default value is UTF-8.
2.

Opt_Caption_103

Select the caption language sent to SAS via IEC103 protocol


0: Current language
1: Fixed Chinese
2: Fixed English
Default value of [Opt_Caption_103] is 0 (i.e. current language), and please set it to 1 (i.e. Fixed
Chinese) if the SAS is supplied by China Manufacturer.
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

7-5
Date: 2013-02-28

7 Settings

3.

Bxx.Un_BinaryInput

This setting is used to set voltage level of binary input module. If low-voltage BI module is
equipped, 24V, 30V or 48V can be set according to the actual requirement, and if high-voltage BI
module is equipped, 110V, 125V or 220V can be set according to the actual requirement.
Bxx: this plug-in module is inserted in slot xx.

7.2.2 Access Path


MainMenuSettingsDevice SetupDevice Settings

7.3 System Settings


Table 7.3-1 System settings
No.

Item

Unit

Range

Active_Grp

1~10

Opt_SysFreq

50 or 60

PrimaryEquip_Name

Maximum 12 character

U1n

33.00~65500.00

kV

U2n

80.00~220.00

I1n

100~65500

I2n

1 or 5

f_High_FreqAlm

50~65

Hz

f_Low_FreqAlm

45~60

Hz

Hz

7.3.1 Setting Description


1.

Active_Grp

The number of active setting group, 10 setting groups can be configured for protection settings,
and only one is active at a time.
2.

PrimaryEquip_Name

It is recognized by the device automatically. Such setting is used for printing messages.
3.

Opt_SysFreq

It is option of system frequency, and can be set as 50Hz or 60Hz.


4.

Un1

Primary rated voltage of VT;


5.

Un2

Secondary rated voltage of VT;


6.

In1

7-6

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

7 Settings

Primary rated current of CT;


7.

In2

Secondary rated current of CT;


8.

f_High_FreqAlm

Frequency upper limit setting. The device will issue an alarm [Alm_Freq], when system frequency
is higher than the setting.
9.

f_Low_FreqAlm

Frequency lower limit setting. The device will issue an alarm [Alm_Freq], when system frequency
is lower than the setting.

7.3.2 Access Path


MainMenuSettingsSystem Settings

7.4 Protection Settings


All settings of protection are based on secondary ratings of VT and CT. For the specific project,
some settings relevant to synchrocheck module, auto-reclosing module and breaker failure
protection module maybe with the suffix of _CB1 and _CB2 what represent the settings
correspond to synchrocheck module, auto-reclosing module and breaker failure protection module
for circuit breaker 1 and circuit breaker 2 respectively.
Unn: rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage.
Un: rated secondary phase-to-ground voltage.
In: rated secondary current.

7.4.1 Setting Description


7.4.1.1 Fault Detector Settings (FD)
No.

Item

Remark

Range

FD.DPFC.I_Set

Current setting of DPFC current FD element

(0.050~30.000)In (A)

FD.ROC.3I0_Set

Current setting of neutral current FD element

(0.050~30.000)In (A)

7.4.1.2 Auxiliary Element (Aux.E)


No.

Item

AuxE.OCD.t_DDO

AuxE.OCD.En

AuxE.ROC1.3I0_Set

AuxE.ROC1.En

Remark
Extended time delay of current change auxiliary
element
Enabling/disabling current change auxiliary element
Current setting of stage 1 residual current auxiliary
element
Enabling/disabling stage 1 residual current auxiliary
element

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

Range
0.000~10.000 (s)
0 or 1
(0.050~30.000)In

0 or 1

7-7
Date: 2013-02-28

7 Settings
5

AuxE.ROC2.3I0_Set

AuxE.ROC2.En

AuxE.ROC3.3I0_Set

AuxE.ROC3.En

AuxE.OC1.I_Set

Current setting of stage 2 residual current

auxiliary

element
Enabling/disabling stage 2 residual current auxiliary
element
Current setting of stage 3 residual current auxiliary
element
Enabling/disabling stage 3 residual current auxiliary
element
Current setting of stage 1 phase current auxiliary
element
Enabling/disabling stage 1 phase current auxiliary

(0.050~30.000)In

0 or 1

(0.050~30.000)In

0 or 1

(0.050~30.000)In

10

AuxE.OC1.En

11

AuxE.OC2.I_Set

12

AuxE.OC2.En

13

AuxE.OC3.I_Set

14

AuxE.OC3.En

15

AuxE.UVD.U_Set

16

AuxE.UVD.t_DDO

17

AuxE.UVD.En

18

AuxE.UVG.U_Set

19

AuxE.UVG.En

20

AuxE.UVS.U_Set

21

AuxE.UVS.En

22

AuxE.ROV.3U0_Set

Voltage setting for residual voltage auxiliary element

0~Un

23

AuxE.ROV.En

Enabling/disabling residual voltage auxiliary element

0 or 1

element
Current setting of stage 2 phase current auxiliary
element
Enabling/disabling stage 2 phase current auxiliary
element
Current setting of stage 3 phase current auxiliary
element
Enabling/disabling stage 3 phase current auxiliary
element
Voltage setting for voltage change auxiliary element
Extended time delay of voltage change auxiliary
element
Enabling/disabling voltage change auxiliary element
Voltage setting for phase-to-ground under voltage
auxiliary element
Enabling/disabling phase-to-ground under voltage
auxiliary element
Voltage setting for phase-to-phase under voltage
auxiliary element
Enabling/disabling phase-to-phase under voltage
auxiliary element

0 or 1

(0.050~30.000)In

0 or 1

(0.050~30.000)In

0 or 1
0~Un
0.000~10.000 (s)
0 or 1
0~Un

0 or 1

0~Unn

0 or 1

7.4.1.3 Phase Overcurrent Protection (50/51P)


No.

Item

50/51P.K_Hm2

50/51P1.I_Set

50/51P1.t_Op

Remark

Range

Setting of second harmonic component for blocking


phase overcurrent elements
Current setting for stage 1 of phase overcurrent
protection
Time delay for stage 1 of phase overcurrent
protection

7-8

0.000~1.000

(0.050~30.000)In (A)

0.000~20.000 (s)

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

7 Settings
4

50/51P1.En

50/51P1.En_Hm2_Blk

50/51P2.I_Set

50/51P2.t_Op

50/51P2.En

50/51P2.En_Hm2_Blk

Enable stage 1 of phase overcurrent protection


Enable second harmonic blocking for stage 1 of
phase overcurrent protection
Current setting for stage 2 of phase overcurrent
protection
Time delay for stage 2 of phase overcurrent
protection
Enable stage 2 of phase overcurrent protection
Enable second harmonic blocking for stage 2 of
phase overcurrent protection

0 or 1
0 or 1

(0.050~30.000)In (A)

0.000~20.000 (s)
0 or 1
0 or 1

7.4.1.4 Earth Fault Protection Settings (50/51G)


No.

Item

Remark
Setting of second harmonic component for blocking

Range

50/51G.K_Hm2_Blk

50/51G1.3I0_Set

Current setting for stage 1 of earth fault protection

(0.050~30.000)In (A)

50/51G1.t_Op

Time delay for stage 1 of earth fault protection

0.000~20.000 (s)

50/51G1.En

Enable stage 1 of earth fault protection

0 or 1

50/51G1.En_Hm2

50/51G2.3I0_Set

Current setting for stage 2 of earth fault protection

(0.050~30.000)In (A)

50/51G2.t_Op

Time delay for stage 2 of earth fault protection

0.000~20.000 (s)

50/51G2.En

Enable stage 2 of earth fault protection

0 or 1

50/51G2.En_Hm2_Blk

earth fault elements

Enable second harmonic blocking for stage 1 of


earth fault protection

Enable second harmonic blocking for stage 2 of


earth fault protection

0.000~1.000

0 or 1

0 or 1

7.4.1.5 Dead Zone Protection (50DZ)


No.

Name

Remark

Range

50DZ.I_Set

Current setting of dead zone protection

(0.050~30.000)In (A)

50DZ.t_Op

Time delay of dead zone protection

0.000~10.000 (s)

50DZ.En

Enable dead zone protection

0 or 1

7.4.1.6 Breaker Failure Protection Settings (50BF)


No.

Item

Remark

Range

50BF.I_Set

Current setting of phase current criterion for BFP

50BF.3I0_Set

Current setting of zero-sequence current criterion


(0.050~30.000 )In (A)
for BFP

50BF.I2_Set

Current setting of negative-sequence current


(0.050~30.000 )In (A)
criterion for BFP

50BF.t_ReTrp

Time delay of re-tripping for BFP

0.000~10.000 (s)

50BF.t1_Op

Time delay of stage 1 for BFP

0.000~10.000 (s)

50BF.t2_Op

Time delay of stage 2 for BFP

0.000~10.000 (s)

50BF.En

Enable breaker failure protection

0 or 1

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

(0.050~30.000 )In (A)

7-9
Date: 2013-02-28

7 Settings
8

50BF.En_ReTrp

Enable re-trip function for BFP

0 or 1

50BF.En_3I0_1P

Enable zero-sequence current criterion for BFP


0 or 1
initiated by single-phase tripping contact

10

50BF.En_3I0_3P

Enable zero-sequence current criterion for BFP


0 or 1
initiated by three-phase tripping contact

11

50BF.En_I2_3P

Enable negative-sequence current criterion for BFP


0 or 1
initiated by three-phase tripping contact

12

50BF.En_CB_Ctrl

Enable breaker failure protection can be initiated by


0 or 1
normally closed contact of circuit breaker

7.4.1.7 Pole Discrepancy Protection Settings (62PD)


No.

Item

Remark

Range

62PD.3I0_Set

Current setting of residual


discrepancy protection

current criterion for pole

62PD.I2_Set

Current setting of negative-sequence


criterion for pole discrepancy protection

62PD.t_Op

Time delay of pole discrepancy protection

0.000~600.000 (s)

62PD.En

Enable pole discrepancy protection

0 or 1

62PD.En_3I0/I2_Ctrl

Enable
residual
current
criterion
negative-sequence current criterion for
discrepancy protection

current

(0.050~30.000 )In (A)


(0.050~30.000 )In (A)

and
pole 0 or 1

7.4.1.8 Synchrocheck Settings (25)


No.

Item

Remark

Range

25.Opt_Source_UL

Voltage selecting mode of line

0~5

25.Opt_Source_UB

Voltage selecting mode of bus

0~5

25.U_Dd

Voltage threshold of dead check

0.05Un~0.8Un (V)

25.U_Lv

Voltage threshold of live check

0.5Un~Un (V)

25.K_Usyn

Compensation coefficient for synchronism voltage

0.20-5.00

25.phi_Diff

Phase difference limit of synchronism check for AR

0~ 89 (Deg)

25.phi_Comp

25.f_Diff

Frequency difference limit of synchronism check for AR 0.02~1.00 (Hz)

25.U_Diff

Voltage difference limit of synchronism check for AR

0.02Un~0.8Un (V)

10

25.t_DeadChk

Time delay to confirm dead check condition

0.010~25.000 (s)

11

25.t_SynChk

Time delay to confirm synchronism check condition

0.010~25.000 (s)

12

25.En_fDiffChk

Enable frequency difference check

0 or 1

13

25.En_SynChk

Enable synchronism check

0 or 1

14

25.En_DdL_DdB

Enable dead line and dead bus (DLDB) check

0 or 1

15

25.En_DdL_LvB

Enable dead line and live bus (DLLB) check

0 or 1

16

25.En_LvL_DdB

Enable live line and dead bus (LLDB) check

0 or 1

17

25.En_NoChk

Enable AR without any check

0 or 1

Compensation for phase difference between two


synchronous voltages

7-10

0~359 (Deg)

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

7 Settings

7.4.1.9 Auto-reclosing Settings (79)


No.

Item

Remark

Range

79.N_Rcls

Maximum number of reclosing attempts

1~4

79.t_Dd_1PS1

Dead time of first shot 1-pole reclosing

0.000~600.000 (s)

79.t_Dd_3PS1

Dead time of first shot 3-pole reclosing

0.000~600.000 (s)

79.t_Dd_3PS2

Dead time of second shot 3-pole reclosing

0.000~600.000 (s)

79.t_Dd_3PS3

Dead time of third shot 3-pole reclosing

0.000~600.000 (s)

79.t_Dd_3PS4

Dead time of fourth shot 3-pole reclosing

0.000~600.000 (s)

79.t_CBClsd

Time delay of circuit breaker in closed position before


reclosing

0.000~600.000 (s)

Time delay to wait for CB healthy, and begin to timing


8

79.t_CBReady

when the input signal [79.CB_Healthy] is de-energized


and if it is not energized within this time delay, AR will

0.000~600.000 (s)

be blocked.
9

79.t_Wait_Chk

Maximum wait time for synchronism check

0.000~600.000 (s)

Time delay allow for CB status change to conform

10

79.t_Fail

11

79.t_DDO_AR

Pulse width of AR closing signal

0.000~600.000 (s)

12

79.t_Reclaim

Reclaim time of AR

0.000~600.000 (s)

13

79.t_PersistTrp

reclosing successful

Time

delay

of

excessive

trip

signal

to

block

auto-reclosing

0.000~600.000 (s)

0.000~600.000 (s)

Drop-off time delay of blocking AR, when blocking


14

79.t_DDO_BlkAR

signal for AR disappears, AR blocking condition drops 0.000~600.000 (s)


off after this time delay

15

79.t_AddDly

16

79.t_WaitMaster

Additional time delay for auto-reclosing


Maximum wait time for reclosing permissive signal from
master AR

0.000~600.000 (s)
0.000~600.000 (s)

Time delay of discriminating another fault, and begin to


17

79.t_SecFault

times after 1-pole AR initiated, 3-pole AR will be


initiated if another fault happens during this time delay.

0.000~600.000 (s)

AR will be blocked if another fault happens after that.


18

79.En_PDF_Blk

19

79.En_AddDly

20

79.En_CutPulse

21

79.En_FailCheck

22

79.En

23

79.En_ExtCtrl

24

79.En_CBInit

Enable auto-reclosing blocked when a fault occurs


under pole disagreement condition
Enable auto-reclosing with an additional dead time
delay
Enable adjust the length of reclosing pulse
Enable confirm whether AR is successful by checking
CB state
Enable auto-reclosing
Enable AR by external input signal besides logic setting
[79.En]
Enable AR be initiated by open state of circuit breaker

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

0 or 1

0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1

7-11
Date: 2013-02-28

7 Settings
25

79.Opt_Priority

Option of AR priority

0, 1 or 2

26

79.SetOpt

Control option of AR mode

0 or 1

27

79.En_1PAR

Enable 1-pole AR mode

0 or 1

28

79.En_3PAR

Enable 3-pole AR mode

0 or 1

29

79.En_1P/3PAR

Enable 1/3-pole AR mode

0 or 1

7.4.1.10 Trip Logic Settings


No.
1

Item

Remark

t_DDO_Trp

Range

The dwell time of tripping command

0.000~10.000 (s)

7.4.1.11 VTS Settings


No.

Item

Remark

Range

VTS.t_DPU

Pick-up time delay of VT circuit supervision

0.200~100.000 (s)

VTS.t_DDO

Drop-off time delay of VT circuit supervision

0.200~100.000 (s)

VTS. En_Out_VT

VT is not connected to the protection device

0 or 1

If three-phase voltage used for protection measurement


4

VTS.En_LineVT

comes from line side (for example, 3/2 breaker), it


should be set as 1. If three-phase voltage comes from

0 or 1

busbar side, it should be set as 0.


5

VTS.En

Enable alarm function of VT circuit supervision

0 or 1

7.4.2 Access Path


MainMenuSettingsProt Settings

7.5 Logic Link Settings


The logic link settings (in the submenu Logic Links) are used to determine whether the relevant
function of this device is enabled or disabled. If this device supports the logic link function, it will
have a corresponding submenu in the submenu Logic Links for the logic link settings.
Each logic link settings is an AND condition of enabling the relevant function with the
corresponding binary input and logic setting. Through SAS or RTU, logic link settings can be set
as 1 or 0; and it means that the relevant function can be in service or out of service through
remote command. It provides convenience for operation management.

7.5.1 Setting Description


7.5.1.1 GOOSE Link Settings
The GOOSE link settings (in the submenu GOOSE Links) are used to determine whether the
relevant GOOSE elements are enabled or disabled. See the GOOSE related instruction manual
for the more information and details.
7.5.1.2 Spare Link Settings
The spare link settings (in the submenu Function Links) are used for future application. It can
be defined as one of above three link settings through the PCS-Explorer configuration tool.
7-12

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

7 Settings
No.

Item

Remark

Range

Link_01

Spare link setting 01

0 or 1

Link_02

Spare link setting 02

0 or 1

Link_03

Spare link setting 03

0 or 1

Link_04

Spare link setting 04

0 or 1

Link_05

Spare link setting 05

0 or 1

Link_06

Spare link setting 06

0 or 1

Link_07

Spare link setting 07

0 or 1

Link_08

Spare link setting 08

0 or 1

7.5.2 Access Path


MainMenuSettingsLogic Links

7.6 Measurement and Control Settings


7.6.1 Setting Description
7.6.1.1 Synchronism Settings
Parameters in the Syn Settings menu are listed in the following table.
No.

Item

Remark

Range
0~5

MCBrd.25.Opt_Source_UL

Voltage selecting mode of line

(0: Ua; 1: Ub;


2: Uc; 3: Uab;
4: Ubc; 5: Uca)
0~5

MCBrd.25.Opt_Source_UB

Voltage selecting mode of bus

(0: Ua; 1: Ub;


2: Uc; 3: Uab;
4: Ubc; 5: Uca)

MCBrd.25.U_Dd

Voltage threshold of dead check

1.000~100.000 (V)

MCBrd.25.U_Lv

Voltage threshold of live check

1.000~100.000 (V)

MCBrd.25.K_Usyn

Compensation coefficient for synchronism voltage

0.20-5.00

MCBrd.25.phi_Diff

Phase difference limit of synchronism check for AR

0.10~ 180.00 (Deg)

MCBrd.25.phi_Comp

MCBrd.25.f_Diff

MCBrd.25.U_Diff

Voltage difference limit of synchronism check for AR 1.000~100.000 (V)

10

MCBrd.25.En_SynChk

Enable synchronism check

0 or 1

11

MCBrd.25.En_DdL_DdB

Enable dead line and dead bus (DLDB) check

0 or 1

12

MCBrd.25.En_DdL_LvB

Enable dead line and live bus (DLLB) check

0 or 1

13

MCBrd.25.En_LvL_DdB

Enable live line and dead bus (LLDB) check

0 or 1

Compensation for phase difference between two


synchronous voltages
Frequency difference limit of synchronism check for
AR

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

0~360 (Deg)

0.00~3.00 (Hz)

7-13
Date: 2013-02-28

7 Settings
14

MCBrd.25.En_NoChk

15

MCBrd.25.df/dt

Enable AR without any check

0 or 1

Threshold of rate of frequency change between both


sides of CB for synchronism-check.

0.10~5.00 (Hz/s)

Circuit breaker closing time. It is the time from


16

MCBrd.25.t_Close_CB

receiving closing command pulse till the CB is 0~1000 (ms)


completely closed.
From receiving a closing command, this device will
continuously check whether between incoming
voltage

17

MCBrd.25.t_Wait_Chk

and

reference

voltage

involved

in

synchronism check (or dead check) can meet the


criteria. If the synchronism check (or dead check)

5.000~30.000 (s)

criteria are not met within the duration of this time


delay, the failure of synchronism-check (or dead
check) will be confirmed.

7.6.1.2 Dual Point Binary Input Settings


Parameters in the DPos Settings menu are listed in the following table.
No.

Name

Remark

Range

These settings are applied to configure the debouncing


1

time. DPU is the abbreviation of Delay Pick Up.

t_DPU_Dposxx

0~60000 (ms)

(xx=01, 02.)

Thses settings are applied to configure the status change confirmation time for No.xx double point
binary inputs. Up to 10 virtual double point binary inputs are provided in this device.
If a double point binary input changes from normal status to invalid status, i.e.: double point error
occurs, [t_DPU_Dposxx] will be applied as the debouncing time for No.xx double point binary
input.
7.6.1.3 Control Settings
Parameters in the Control Settings menu are listed in the following table. (xx=01, 02.10)
No.

Name

t_DDO_Opnxx

t_DDO_Clsxx

Remark

Range

No.xx holding time of a normal open contact of remote


opening CB, disconnector or for signaling purpose.
No.xx closing time of a normal open contact of remote
closing CB, disconnector or for signaling purpose.

0~60000 (ms)

0~60000 (ms)

7.6.1.4 Interlock Settings


Parameters in the Interlock Settings menu are listed in the following table. (xx=01, 02.10)
No.
1

Name
En_Opnxx_Blk

Remark

Range

Enable No.xx open output of the BO module be controlled


by the interlocking logic

7-14

0 or 1

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

7 Settings
No.
2

Name
En_Clsxx_Blk

Remark
Enable No.xx closing output of the BO module be
controlled by the interlocking logic

Range
0 or 1

7.6.2 Access Path


MainMenuSettingsMon/Ctrl Settings

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

7-15
Date: 2013-02-28

7 Settings

7-16

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

8 Human Machine Interface

8 Human Machine Interface


Table of Contents
8.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.1 Keypad Operation ................................................................................................................ 8-2
8.1.2 LED Indications.................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.1.3 Front Communication Port................................................................................................... 8-3
8.1.4 Ethernet Port Setup ............................................................................................................. 8-4

8.2 Menu Tree ........................................................................................................ 8-5


8.2.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 8-5
8.2.2 Main Menus ......................................................................................................................... 8-6
8.2.3 Sub Menus........................................................................................................................... 8-7

8.3 LCD Display ................................................................................................... 8-17


8.3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 8-17
8.3.2 Normal Display .................................................................................................................. 8-18
8.3.3 Display Disturbance Records ............................................................................................ 8-19
8.3.4 Display Supervision Event ................................................................................................. 8-20
8.3.5 Display IO Events .............................................................................................................. 8-21
8.3.6 Display Device Logs .......................................................................................................... 8-22

8.4 Keypad Operation ......................................................................................... 8-23


8.4.1 View Device Measurements .............................................................................................. 8-23
8.4.2 View Device Status ............................................................................................................ 8-23
8.4.3 View Device Records......................................................................................................... 8-23
8.4.4 Print Device Report ........................................................................................................... 8-24
8.4.5 View Device Setting ........................................................................................................... 8-25
8.4.6 Modify Device Setting ........................................................................................................ 8-25
8.4.7 Copy Device Setting .......................................................................................................... 8-28
8.4.8 Switch Setting Group ......................................................................................................... 8-28

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

8-a
Date: 2013-02-28

8 Human Machine Interface

8.4.9 Delete Device Records ...................................................................................................... 8-29


8.4.10 Remote Control................................................................................................................ 8-30
8.4.11 Modify Device Clock ........................................................................................................ 8-33
8.4.12 View Module Information ................................................................................................. 8-34
8.4.13 Check Software Version .................................................................................................. 8-34
8.4.14 Communication Test ........................................................................................................ 8-34
8.4.15 Select Language .............................................................................................................. 8-35

List of Figures
Figure 8.1-1 Front panel .............................................................................................................. 8-1
Figure 8.1-2 Keypad buttons ...................................................................................................... 8-2
Figure 8.1-3 LED indications ...................................................................................................... 8-3
Figure 8.1-4 Corresponding cable of the RJ45 port in the front panel .................................. 8-4
Figure 8.1-5 Rear view and terminal definition of NR1102C ................................................... 8-5
Figure 8.2-1 Menu tree ................................................................................................................ 8-7

List of Tables
Table 8.1-1 Definition of the 8-core cable ................................................................................. 8-4
Table 8.3-1 Tripping report messages ..................................................................................... 8-20
Table 8.3-2 User operating event list ....................................................................................... 8-22

8-b

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

8 Human Machine Interface

The operator can access the protective device from the front panel. Local communication with the
protective device is possible using a computer via a multiplex RJ45 port on the front panel.
Furthermore, remote communication is also possible using a PC with the substation automation
system via rear RS485 port or rear Ethernet port. The operator is able to check the protective
device status at any time.
This chapter describes human machine interface (HMI), and give operator an instruction about
how to display or print event report, setting and so on through HMI menu tree and display metering
value, including r.m.s. current, voltage and frequency etc. through LCD. Procedures to change
active setting group or a settable parameter value through keypad is also described in details.

NOTE!

About three measurements in menu Measurements, please refer to the following


description:
Measurement1 is use to display measured values from protection calculation DSP
(displayed in secondary value)
Measurement2 is used to display measured values from fault detector DSP (displayed
in secondary value)
Measurement3 is used to display measured primary values and other calculated
quantities

8.1 Overview
The human-machine interface consists of a human-machine interface (HMI) module which allows
a communication to be as simple as possible for the user. The HMI module helps to draw your
attention to something that has occurred which may activate a LED or a report displayed on the
LCD. Operator can locate the data of interest by navigating the keypad.

HEALTHY

11

12

ALARM

PCS-9 21
BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

10

20

GRP

ESC

1
2

ENT

4
3

Figure 8.1-1 Front panel

The function of HMI module:


PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

8-1
Date: 2013-02-28

8 Human Machine Interface


No.

Item

Description
A 320240 dot matrix backlight LCD display is visible in dim lighting

LCD

conditions. The corresponding messages are displayed when there is


operation implemented.
20 status indication LEDs, 2 LEDs are fixed as the signals of HEALTHY

LED

(green) and ALARM (yellow), 18 LEDs are configurable with selectable


color among green, yellow and red.

Keypad

Navigation keypad and command keys for full access to device

Communication port

A multiplex RJ45 port for local communication with a PC

Logo

Type and designation and manufacturer of device

GR
P

8.1.1 Keypad Operation

ENT

ESC

Figure 8.1-2 Keypad buttons

1.

2.

3.

ESC:

Cancel the operation

Quit the current menu

ENT:

Execute the operation

Confirm the interface

GRP

4.

5.

6.

Activate the switching interface of setting group

leftward and rightward direction keys ( and ):

Move the cursor horizontally

Enter the next menu or return to the previous menu

upward and downward direction keys ( and )

Move the cursor vertically

Select command menu within the same level of menu

plus and minus sign keys ( and )

Modify the value

8-2

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

8 Human Machine Interface

Modify and display the message number

Page up/down

8.1.2 LED Indications


HEALTHY
ALARM

Figure 8.1-3 LED indications

A brief explanation has been made as bellow.


LED

Display
Off

HEALTHY
Steady Green
Off

Description
When the equipment is out of service or any hardware error is defected during
self-check.
Lit when the equipment is in service and ready for operation.
When equipment in normal operating condition.

ALARM
Steady Yellow

Lit when VT circuit failure, CT circuit failure or other abnormal alarm is issued.

NOTE!

HEALTHY LED can only be turned on by energizing the device and no abnormality
detected.
ALARM LED is turned on when abnormalities of device occurs like above mentioned
and can be turned off after abnormalities are removed except alarm report [CTS.Alm]
which can only be reset only when the failure is removed and the device is rebooted or
re-energized.
Other LED indicators with no labels are configurable and user can configure them to be lit
by signals of operation element, alarm element and binary output contact according to
requirement through PCS-Explorer software, but as drawn in figure, 2 LEDs are fixed as
the signals of HEALTHY (green) and ALARM (yellow), 18 LEDs are configurable with
selectable color among green, yellow and red.

8.1.3 Front Communication Port


There is a multiplex RJ45 port on the front panel. This port can be used as an RS-232 serial port
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

8-3
Date: 2013-02-28

8 Human Machine Interface

as well as a twisted-pair Ethernet port. As shown in the following figure, a customized cable is
applied for debugging via this multiplex RJ45 port.

Figure 8.1-4 Corresponding cable of the RJ45 port in the front panel

In the above figure and the following table:


P1: To connect the multiplex RJ45 port. An 8-core cable is applied here.
P2: To connect the twisted-pair Ethernet port of the computer.
P3: To connect the RS-232 serial port of the computer.
The definition of the 8-core cable in the above figure is introduced in the following table.
Table 8.1-1 Definition of the 8-core cable
Terminal
No.

Core color

Function

Device side

Computer side

(Left)

(Right)

Orange

TX+ of the Ethernet port

P1-1

P2-1

Orange & white

TX- of the Ethernet port

P1-2

P2-2

Green & white

RX+ of the Ethernet port

P1-3

P2-3

Blue

TXD of the RS-232 serial port

P1-4

P3-2

Brown & white

RXD of the RS-232 serial port

P1-5

P3-3

Green

RX- for the Ethernet port

P1-6

P2-6

Blue & white

The ground connection of the RS-232 port.

P1-7

P3-5

8.1.4 Ethernet Port Setup


MON plug-in module is equipped with two or four 100Base-TX Ethernet interface, take NR1102C
as an example, as shown in Figure 8.1-5. Its rear view and the definition of terminals.
The Ethernet port can be used to communication with PC via auxiliary software (PCS-Explorer)
after connecting the protection device with PC, so as to fulfill on-line function (please refer to the
instruction manual of PCS-Explorer). At first, the connection between the protection device and PC
must be established. Through setting the IP address and subnet mask of corresponding Ethernet
interface in the menu SettingsDevice SetupComm Settings, it should be ensured that the
protection device and PC are in the same network segment. For example, setting the IP address
and subnet mask of network A. (using network A to connect with PC)

8-4

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

8 Human Machine Interface

PC: IP address is set as 198.87.96.102, subnet mask is set as 255.255.255.0


The IP address and subnet mask of protection device should be [IP_LAN1]= 198.87.96.XXX,
[Mask_LAN1]=255.255.255.0, [En_LAN1]=1. (XXX can be any value from 0 to 255 except 102)
If the logic setting [En_LAN1] is non-available, it means that network A is always enabled.

NR1102C

ETHERNET

Network A

Network B

SYN+
SYNSGND
GND
RTS
TXD
SGND

Figure 8.1-5 Rear view and terminal definition of NR1102C

NOTE!
If using other Ethernet port, for example, Ethernet B, the logic setting [En_LAN2] must be
set as 1.

8.2 Menu Tree


8.2.1 Overview
Press of any running interface and enter the main menu. Select different submenu by and
. Enter the selected submenu by pressing ENT or . Press and return to the previous
menu. Press ESC back to main menu directly. For sake of entering the command menu again, a
command menu will be recorded in the quick menu after its execution. Five latest command
menus can be recorded in the quick menu. When five command menus are recorded, the latest
command menu will cover the earliest one, adopting the first in first out principle. It is arranged
from top to bottom and in accordance with the execution order of command menus.
Press to enter the main menu with the interface as shown in the following diagram:

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

8-5
Date: 2013-02-28

8 Human Machine Interface

MainMenu

Language
Clock
Quick Menu

For the first powered protective device, there is no record in quick menu. Press to enter the
main menu with the interface as shown in the following diagram:

Measurements
Status
Records
Settings
Print
Local Cmd
Information
Test
Clock
Language

The descriptions about menu is based on the maximized configuration, for a specific project, if
some function is not available, the corresponding submenu will hidden.

8.2.2 Main Menus


The menu of the PCS-921 is organized into main menu and submenus, much like a PC directory
structure. The menu of the PCS-921 is divided into 10 sections:

8-6

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

8 Human Machine Interface


Main Menu

Measurements

Status

Records

Settings

Print

Local Cmd

Information

Test

Clock

Language

Figure 8.2-1 Menu tree

Under the main interface, press to enter the main menu, and select submenu by pressing ,
and ENT. The command menu adopts a tree shaped content structure. The above diagram
provides the integral structure and all main menus under menu tree of the protection device.

8.2.3 Sub Menus


8.2.3.1 Measurements
Main Menu

Measurements

Measurements1
Measurements2
Measurements3

This menu is used to display real-time measured values, including AC voltage, AC current, phase
angle and calculated quantities. These data can help users to acquaint the devices status. This
menu comprises following submenus. Please refer to Section Measurement about the detailed
measured values.
No.
1

Item
Measurement1

Function description
Display measured values from protection calculation DSP (Displayed in

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

8-7
Date: 2013-02-28

8 Human Machine Interface


secondary value)
2

Measurement2

Measurement3

Display measured values from fault detector DSP (Displayed in


secondary value)
Display measured primary values and other calculated quantities

8.2.3.2 Status
Main Menu
Status
Inputs
Contact Inputs
GOOSE Inputs

Outputs
Contact Outputs
GOOSE Outputs
Interlock Status

Superv State
Prot Superv
FD Superv
GOOSE Superv
SV Superv

This menu is used to display real time input signals, output signals and alarm signals of the device.
These data can help users to acquaint the devices status. This menu comprises following
submenus. Please refer to Section Signal List about the detailed input and output signals, and
Section Supervision Alarms about alarm signals.
No.

Item

Function description

Inputs

Display all input signal states

Outputs

Display all output signal states

Superv State

Display supervision alarm states

The submenu Inputs comprises the following command menus.

8-8

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

8 Human Machine Interface


No.

Item

Function description

Contact Inputs

Display states of binary inputs derived from opto-isolated channels

GOOSE Inputs

Display states of GOOSE binary inputs.

The submenu Outputs comprises the following command menus.


No.

Item

Function description

Contact Outputs

Display states of contact binary outputs

GOOSE Outputs

Display states of GOOSE binary outputs

Interlock Status

Display states of interlock result of each remote control.

The submenu Superv State comprises the following command menus.


No.

Item

Function description

Prot Superv

Display states of self-supervision signals from protection calculation DSP

FD Superv

Display states of self-supervision signals from fault detector DSP

GOOSE Superv

Display states of GOOSE self-supervision signals

SV Superv

Display states of SV self-supervision signals

8.2.3.3 Records
Main Menu

Records

Disturb Records
Superv Events
IO Events
Device Logs
Clear_Records

This menu is used to display all kinds of records, including the disturbance records, supervision
events, binary events and device logs, so that the operator can load to view and use as the
reference of analyzing accidents and repairing the device. All records are stored in non-volatile
memory, it can still record them even if it loses its power.
This menu comprises the following submenus.
No.

Item

Function description

Disturb Records

Display disturbance records of the device

Superv Events

Display supervision events of the device

IO Events

Display binary events of the device

Device Logs

Display device logs of the device

Control Logs

Display control logs of the device

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

8-9
Date: 2013-02-28

8 Human Machine Interface


6

Clear Records

Clear all records.

8.2.3.4 Settings
Main Menu
Settings
System Settings
Prot Settings

FD Settings
AuxE Settings
OC Settings
ROC Settings
BFP Settings
DeadZone Settings
PD Settings
VTS/CTS Settings
Trip Logic Settings
AR/Syn Settings
Copy Settings
Mon/Ctrl Settings
Syn Settings
DPos Settings
Control Settings
Interlock Settings
Logic Links
Function Links
GOOSE Links
SV Links
Spare Links
Device Setup
Device Settings
Comm Settings
Label Settings

8-10

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

8 Human Machine Interface

This menu is used to check the device setup, system parameters, protection settings and logic
links settings, as well as modifying any of the above setting items. Moreover, it can also execute
the setting copy between different setting groups.
This menu comprises the following submenus.
No.

Item

Function description

System Settings

Check or modify the system parameters

Prot Settings

Check or modify the protection settings

Mon/Ctrl Settings

Check or modify the measurement and control settings

Logic Links

Device Setup

Check or modify the logic links settings, including function links, SV links,
GOOSE links and spare links
Check or modify the device setup

The submenu Prot Settings includes the following command menus.


No.

Item

Function description

FD Settings

Check or modify fault detector settings

AuxE Settings

Check or modify auxiliary element settings

OC Settings

Check or modify phase overcurrent protection settings

ROC Settings

Check or modify residual overcurrent protection settings

BFP Settings

Check or modify breaker failure protection settings

DeadZone Settings

Check or modify dead zone protection settings

PD Settings

Check or modify pole discrepancy protection settings

VTS/CTS Settings

Trip Logic Settings

Check or modify trip logic settings

10

AR/Syn Settings

Check or modify auto-reclosing and synchronism check settings

11

Copy Settings

Copy setting between different setting groups

Check or modify VT circuit supervision and CT circuit supervision


settings

The submenu Mon/Ctrl Settings includes the following command menus.


No.

Item

Function description

Syn Settings

Check or modify manual sysnchronism check settings

DPos Settings

Check or modify double point binary input settings

Control Settings

Check or modify control settings

Interlock Settings

Check or modify interlock settings

The submenu Logic Links comprises the following command menus.


No.
1

Item
Function Links

Function description
Check or modify function links settings

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

8-11
Date: 2013-02-28

8 Human Machine Interface


2

GOOSE Links

Check or modify GOOSE links settings

SV Links

Check or modify SV links settings

Spare Links

Check or modify spare links settings (used for programmable logic)

The submenu Device Setup comprises the following command menus.


No.

Item

Function description

Device Settings

Check or modify the device settings.

Comm Settings

Check or modify the communication settings.

Label Settings

Check or modify the label settings of each protection element.

8.2.3.5 Print
Main Menu

Print

Device Info
Settings

System Settings
Prot Settings
Mon/Ctrl Settings
Logic Links
Device Setup
All Settings
Latest Chgd Settings

Disturb Records
Superv Events
IO Events
Device Status
Waveform
IEC103 Info
Cancel Print

This menu is used to print device description, settings, all kinds of records, waveform, information
related with IEC60870-5-103 protocol, channel state and channel statistic.
This menu comprises the following submenus.

8-12

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

8 Human Machine Interface


No.
1

Item

Function description
Print the description information of the device, including software

Device Info

version.
Print device setup, system parameters, protection settings and logic

links settings. It can print by different classifications as well as printing all

Settings

settings of the device. Besides, it can also print the latest modified
settings.

Disturb Records

Print the disturbance records

Superv Events

Print the supervision events

IO Events

Print the binary events

Device Status

Waveform

Print the current state of the device, including the sampled value of
voltage and current, the state of binary inputs, setting and so on
Print the recorded waveform
Print 103 Protocol information,

IEC103 Info

including function type

(FUN),

information serial number (INF), general classification service group


number, and channel number (ACC)

Cancel Print

Cancel the print command

The submenu Settings comprises the following submenus.


No.

Item

Function description

System Settings

Print the system parameters

Prot Settings

Print the protection settings

Mon/Ctrl Settings

Print the measurement and control settings

Logic Links

Print the logic links settings

Device Setup

Print the settings related to device setup

All Settings

Latest Chgd Settings

Print all settings including device setup, system parameters, protection


settings and logic links settings
Print the setting latest modified

The submenu Prot Settings comprises the following command menus.


No.

Item

Function description

FD Settings

Print fault detector element settings

AuxE Settings

Print auxiliary element settings

OC Settings

Print phase overcurrent protection settings

ROC Settings

Print directional earth-fault protection settings

BFP Settings

Print breaker failure protection settings

Deadzone Settings

Print dead zone settings

PD Settings

Print pole discrepancy protection settings

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

8-13
Date: 2013-02-28

8 Human Machine Interface


8

VTS/CTS Settings

Print VT circuit supervision and CT circuit supervision settings

Trip Logic Settings

Print trippling logic settings

10

AR/Syn Settings

Print synchronism check and auto-reclosing settings

11

All Settings

Print all settings included in Prot Settings submenu

The submenu Mon/Ctrl Settings includes the following command menus.


No.

Item

Function description

Syn Settings

Print manual sysnchronism check settings

DPos Settings

Print double point binary input settings

Control Settings

Print control settings

Interlock Settings

Print interlock settings

All Settings

Print all settings included in Mon/Ctrl Settings submenu

The submenu Logic Links comprises the following command menus.


No.

Item

Function description

Function Links

Print function links settings

GOOSE Links

Print GOOSE links settings

SV Links

Print SV links settings

Spare Links

Print spare links settings (used for programmable logic)

All Settings

Print all settings included in Logic Links submenu

The submenu Device Setup comprises the following command menus.


No.

Item

Function description

Device Settings

Print the device settings.

Comm Settings

Print the communication settings.

Label Settings

Print the label settings of each protection element.

All Settings

Print all settings included in Device Setup submenu

8-14

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

8 Human Machine Interface

8.2.3.6 Local Cmd


Main Menu

Local Cmd

Reset Target
Trig Oscillograph
Control
Download
Clear Counter
Clear AR Counter
Clear Energy Counter

This menu is used to reset the tripping relay with latch, indicator LED, LCD display, and as same
as the resetting function of binary inputs. This menu provides a method of manually recording the
current waveform data of the device under normal condition for printing and uploading SAS.
Besides, it can send out the request of program download, clear statistic information about
GOOSE SV AR and energy.
This menu comprises the following submenus.
No.

Item

Function description

Reset Target

Reset the local signal, indicator LED, LCD display and so on

Trig Oscillograph

Trigger waveform recording

Control

Manually operating to trip, close output or for signaling purpose

Download

Send out the request of downloading program

Clear Counter

Clear GOOSE and SV statistic data

Clear AR Counter

Clear AR statistic data

Clear Energy Counter

Clear all energy metering values (i.e. PHr+_Pri, PHr-_Pri, Qr+_Pri,


QHr-_Pri)

8.2.3.7 Information
Main Menu

Information

Version Info
Board Info

In this menu, the LCD displays software information of all kinds of intelligent plug-in modules,
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

8-15
Date: 2013-02-28

8 Human Machine Interface

which consists of version, creating time of software, CRC codes and management sequence
number. Besides, plug-in module information can also be viewed.
This menu comprises the following command menus.
No.

Item

Function description
Display software information of DSP module, MON module and HMI module,

Version Info

which consists of version, creating time of software, CRC codes and


management sequence number.

Board Info

Monitor the current working state of each intelligent module.

8.2.3.8 Test
Main Menu

Test

GOOSE Comm Counter


SV Comm Counter
AR Counter
Device Test

Disturb Events
Superv Events
IO Events

This menu is mainly used for developers to debug the program and for engineers to maintain the
protection device. It can be used to fulfill the communication test function. It is also used to
generate all kinds of reports or events to transmit to the SAS without any external input, so as to
debug the communication on site. Besides, it can also display statistic information about GOOSE
SV and AR.
This menu comprises the following submenus.
No.

Item

Function description

GOOSE Counter

Check communication statistics data of GOOSE

SV Counter

Check communication statistics data of SV (Sampled Values)

AR Counter

Check AR counters
Automatically generate all kinds of reports or events to transmit to SCADA,

Device Test

including disturbance records, self-supervision events and binary events. It can


realize the report uploading by different classification, as well as the uploading
of all kinds of reports

The submenu Device Test comprises the following submenus.

8-16

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

8 Human Machine Interface


No.

Item

Disturb Events

Superv Events

IO Events

Function description
View the relevant information about disturbance records (only used for
debugging persons)
View the relevant information about supervision events (only used for
debugging persons)
View the relevant information about binary events (only used for debugging
persons)

Users can respectively execute the test automatically or manually by selecting commands All
Test or Select Test.
The submenu Disturb Events comprises the following command menus.
No.

Item

Description

All Test

Ordinal test of all protection elements

Select Test

Selective test of corresponding classification

The submenu Superv Events comprises the following command menus.


No.

Item

Description

All Test

Ordinal test of all self-supervisions

Select Test

Selective test of corresponding classification

The submenu IO Events comprises the following command menus.


No.

Item

Description

All Test

Ordinal test of change of all binary inputs

Select Test

Selective test of corresponding classification

8.2.3.9 Clock
The current time of internal clock can be viewed here. The time is displayed in the form
YY-MM-DD and hh:mm:ss. All values are presented with digits and can be modified.
8.2.3.10 Language
This menu is mainly used to set LCD display language.

8.3 LCD Display


8.3.1 Overview
There are five kinds of LCD display, SLD (single line diagram) display, tripping reports, alarm
reports, binary input changing reports and control reports. Tripping reports and alarm reports will
not disappear until these reports are acknowledged by pressing the RESET button in the
protection panel (i.e. energizing the binary input [BI_RstTarg]). User can press both ENT and
ESC at the same time to switch the display among trip reports, alarm reports and the SLD display.
IO events will be displayed for 5s and then it will return to the previous display interface
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

8-17
Date: 2013-02-28

8 Human Machine Interface

automatically. Device logs will not pop up and can only be viewed by navigating the corresponding
menu.

8.3.2 Normal Display


After the protection device is powered and entered into the initiating interface, it takes 30 seconds
to complete the initialization of protection device. During the initialization of protection device, the
HEALTHY indicator lamp of the protection device goes out.
The device can display single line diagram (SLD) and primary operation information, it can support
wiring configuration function. LCD configuration file can be downloaded via the network. Remote
control operating through single line diagram is also supported.
Under normal condition, the LCD will display the following interface. The LCD adopts white color
as its backlight that is activated if once there is any keyboard operation, and is extinguished
automatically after 60 seconds of no operation.

2010-06-08 10:10:00
Ia
0.00A
Ib
0.00A
Ic
0.00A
3I0
0.00A
Ua
0.02V
Ub
0.00V
Uc
0.00V
3U0
0.02V
UB1
0.00V
UL2
0.00V
UB2
0.00V
f_Line
50.00Hz
Addr 24343

Group 01

The content displayed on the screen contains: the current date and time of the protection device
(with a format of yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss:), the active setting group number, the three-phase
current sampling value, the neutral current sampling value, the three-phase voltage sampling
value, the neutral voltage sampling value, the synchronism voltage sampling value, line frequency
and the address relevant to IP address of Ethernet A. If all the sampling values of the voltage and
the current cant be fully displayed within one screen, they will be scrolling-displayed automatically
from the top to the bottom.
If IP address of Ethernet A is xxx.xxx.a.b, the displayed address equals to (a256+b). For
example, If IP address of Ethernet A is 198.087.095.023, the displayed address will be
95256+23=24343.
If the device has detected any abnormal state, itll display the self-check alarm information.

8-18

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

8 Human Machine Interface

8.3.3 Display Disturbance Records


This device can store 1024 disturbance records and 64 disturbance records with fault waveform.
When there is protection element operating, the LCD will automatically display the latest
disturbance record, and two kinds of LCD display interfaces will be available depending on
whether there are supervision events at present.
For the situation that the disturbance records and the supervision events coexist, the upper half
part is the disturbance record, and the lower half part is the supervision event. As to the upper half
part, it displays separately the record number of the disturbance record, fault name, generating
time of the disturbance record (with a format of yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss), protection element and
tripping element. If there is protection element operation, faulty phase and relative operation time
with reference to fault detector element are displayed. At the same time, if displayed rows of
protection element and tripping element are more than 3, a scroll bar will appear at the right. The
height of the black part of the scroll bar basically indicates the total lines of protection element and
tripping element, and its position suggests the position of the currently displayed line of the total
lines. The scroll bar of protection element and tripping element will roll up at the speed of one line
per time. When it rolls to the last three lines, it will roll from the earliest protection element and
tripping element again. The displayed content of the lower half part is similar to that of the upper
half part.
If the device has no the supervision event, the display interface will only show the disturbance
record.
1. Disturb Records NO.2
2008-11-28 07:10:00:200
0 ms
FD.DPFC.Pkp
24 ms

50/51P1.Op

If the device has the supervision event, the display interface will show the disturbance record and
the supervision event at the same time.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

8-19
Date: 2013-02-28

8 Human Machine Interface

1. Disturb Records NO.2


2008-11-28 07:10:00:200
0 ms
FD.DPFC.Pkp
24 ms

50/51P1.Op

2. Superv Events NO.3


2008-11-28 07:09:00:200
Alm_52b

Disturb Records NO.2

shows the title and SOE number of the disturbance record.

2008-11-28 07:10:00:200

shows the time when fault detector picks up, the format is
yearmonth-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond.

0ms FD.DPFC.Pkp

shows fault detector element and its operating time (set as 0ms
fixedly).

24ms A 50/51P1.Op

shows operation element and its relative operation time

All the protection elements have been listed in Chapter Operation Theory, and please refer to
each protection element for details. Operation reports of fault detector and the reports related to
oscillography function are showed in the following table.
Table 8.3-1 Tripping report messages
No.

Message

Description

ManTrigDFR

Oscillography function is triggered manually.

RmtTrigDFR

Oscillography function is triggered remotely.

8.3.4 Display Supervision Event


This device can store 1024 pieces of supervision events. During the running of the device, the
supervision event of hardware self-check errors or system running abnormity will be displayed
immediately.

8-20

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

8 Human Machine Interface

2. Superv Events NO.4


2008-12-29 9:18:47:500ms
Alm_52b

Superv_Events NO.4

shows the SOE number and title of the supervision event

2008-11-28 09:18:47:500

shows the real time of the report: yearmonth-date and


hour:minute:second:millisecond

Alm_52b

shows the content of abnormality alarm

01

8.3.5 Display IO Events


This device can store 1024 pieces of binary events. During the running of the device, the binary
input will be displayed once its state has changed, i.e. from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0.
3. IO Events NO.4
2008-11-29 09:18:47:500ms
BI_RstTarg

IO Events NO.4

shows the number and title of the binary event

2008-11-28 09:18:47:50

shows date and time when the report occurred, the format is
yearmonth-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond

BI_RstTarg 01

shows the state change of binary input, including binary input

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

8-21
Date: 2013-02-28

8 Human Machine Interface

name, original state and final state

8.3.6 Display Device Logs


This device can store 1024 pieces of device logs. During the running of the device, the device log
will be displayed after any operation of it is conducted.
4. Device Logs NO.4
2008-11-28 10:18:47:569ms
Reboot

Device Logs NO. 4

shows the title and the number of the device log

2008-11-28 10:18:47:569

shows date and time when the report occurred, the format is
yearmonth-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond

Reboot

shows the manipulation content of the device log

User operating information listed below may be displayed.


Table 8.3-2 User operating event list
No.

Message

Description

Reboot

The device has been reboot.

Settings_Chg

The devices settings have been changed.

ActiveGrp_Chgd

Active setting group has been changed.

Report_Cleared

All reports have been deleted. (Device logs can not be deleted)

Waveform_Cleared

All waveforms have been deleted.

Process_Exit

A process has exited.

Counter_Cleared

Clear counter

Signal_Reset

Reset signal

It will be displayed on the LCD before the fault report and self-check report are confirmed. Only
pressing the restore button on the protection screen or pressing both ENT and ESC at the
same time can switch among the fault report, the self-check report and the normal running state of
protection device to display it. The binary input change report will be displayed for 5s and then it
will return to the previous display interface automatically.

8-22

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

8 Human Machine Interface

8.4 Keypad Operation


8.4.1 View Device Measurements
The operation is as follows:
1.

Press the to enter the main menu;

2.

Press the or to move the cursor to the Measurements menu, and then press the
ENT or to enter the menu;

3.

Press the or to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the ENT to
enter the menu;

4.

Press the or to page up/down (if all information cannot be displayed in one display
screen, one screen can display 14 lines of information at most);

5.

Press the or to select pervious or next command menu;

6.

Press the ENT or ESC to exit this menu (returning to the Measurements menu);

8.4.2 View Device Status


The operation is as follows:
1.

Press the key to enter the main menu.

2.

Press the key or to move the cursor to the Status menu, and then press the ENT
or to enter the menu.

3.

Press the key or to move the cursor to any command menu item, and then press the
key ENT to enter the submenu.

4.

Press the or to page up/down (if all information cannot be displayed in one display
screen, one screen can display 14 lines of information at most).

5.

Press the key or to select pervious or next command menu.

6.

Press the key ENT or ESC to exit this menu (returning to the Status menu).

8.4.3 View Device Records


The operation is as follows:
1.

Press the to enter the main menu;

2.

Press the or to move the cursor to the Records menu, and then press the ENT or
to enter the menu;

3.

Press the or to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the ENT to
enter the menu;

4.

Press the or to page up/down;

5.

Press the or to select pervious or next record;

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

8-23
Date: 2013-02-28

8 Human Machine Interface

6.

Press the or to select pervious or next command menu;

7.

Press the ENT or ESC to exit this menu (returning to the Records menu);

8.4.4 Print Device Report


The operation is as follows:
1.

Press the to enter the main menu;

2.

Press the or to move the cursor to the Print menu, and then press the ENT or
to enter the menu;

3.

Press the or to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the ENT to
enter the menu;
Selecting the Disturb Records, and then press the or to select pervious or next
record. After pressing the key ENT, the LCD will display Start Printing... , and then
automatically exit this menu (returning to the menu Print). If the printer doesnt complete its
current print task and re-start it for printing, and the LCD will display Printer Busy. Press
the key ESC to exit this menu (returning to the menu Print).
Selecting the command menu Superv Events or IO Events, and then press the key or
to move the cursor. Press the or to select the starting and ending numbers of
printing message. After pressing the key ENT, the LCD will display Start Printing, and
then automatically exit this menu (returning to the menu Print). Press the key ESC to exit
this menu (returning to the menu Print).

4.

If selecting the command menu Device Info, Device Status or IEC103_Info, press the
key ENT, the LCD will display Start printing.., and then automatically exit this menu
(returning to the menu Print).

5.

If selecting the Settings, press the key ENT or to enter the next level of menu.

6.

After entering the submenu Settings, press the key or to move the cursor, and then
press the key ENT to print the corresponding default value. If selecting any item to printing:
Press the key or to select the setting group to be printed. After pressing the key
ENT, the LCD will display Start Printing, and then automatically exit this menu (returning
to the menu Settings). Press the key ESC to exit this menu (returning to the menu
Settings).

7.

After entering the submenu Waveforms, press the or to select the waveform item
to be printed and press ENT to enter. If there is no any waveform data, the LCD will display
No Waveform Data! (Before executing the command menu Waveforms, it is necessary to
execute the command menu Trig Oscillograph in the menu Local Cmd, otherwise the
LCD will display No Waveform Data!). With waveform data existing:

Press the key or to select pervious or next record. After pressing the key ENT, the LCD
will display Start Printing, and then automatically exit this menu (returning to the menu
Waveforms). If the printer does not complete its current print task and re-start it for printing, and

8-24

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

8 Human Machine Interface

the LCD will display Printer Busy. Press the key ESC to exit this menu (returning to the menu
Waveforms).

8.4.5 View Device Setting


The operation is as follows:
1.

Press the to enter the main menu;

2.

Press the or to move the cursor to the Settings menu, and then press the ENT or
to enter the menu;

3.

Press the or to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the ENT to
enter the menu;

4.

Press the or to move the cursor;

5.

Press the + or - to page up/down;

6.

Press the or to select pervious or next command menu;

7.

Press the ESC to exit this menu (returning to the menu Settings).
NOTE!
If the displayed information exceeds 14 lines, the scroll bar will appear on the right side of
the LCD to indicate the quantity of all displayed information of the command menu and the
relative location of information where the current cursor points at.

8.4.6 Modify Device Setting


The operation is as follows:
1.

Press the to enter the main menu;

2.

Press the or to move the cursor to the Settings menu, and then press the ENT or
to enter the menu;

3.

Press the or to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the ENT to
enter the menu;

4.

Press the or to move the cursor;

5.

Press the + or - to page up/down;

6.

Press the or to select pervious or next command menu;

7.

Press the ESC to exit this menu (returning to the menu Settings );

8.

If selecting the command menu System Settings, move the cursor to the setting item to be
modified, and then press the ENT;

Press the or to modify the value (if the modified value is of multi-bit, press the or
to move the cursor to the digit bit, and then press the or to modify the value), press the

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

8-25
Date: 2013-02-28

8 Human Machine Interface

ESC to cancel the modification and return to the displayed interface of the command menu
System Settings. Press the ENT to automatically exit this menu (returning to the displayed
interface of the command menu System Settings).
Move the cursor to continue modifying other setting items. After all setting values are modified,
press the , or ESC, and the LCD will display Save or Not?. Directly press the ESC or
press the or to move the cursor. Select the Cancel, and then press the ENT to
automatically exit this menu (returning to the displayed interface of the command menu System
Settings).
Press the or to move the cursor. Select No and press the ENT, all modified setting item
will restore to its original value, exit this menu (returning to the menu Settings).
Press the or to move the cursor to select Yes, and then press the ENT, the LCD will
display password input interface.

Please Input Password:

____

Input a 4-bit password (, , and ). If the password is incorrect, continue inputting it,
and then press the ESC to exit the password input interface and return to the displayed interface
of the command menu System Settings. If the password is correct, LCD will display Save
Setting Now, and then exit this menu (returning to the displayed interface of the command
menu System Settings), with all modified setting items as modified values.
NOTE!
For different setting items, their displayed interfaces are different but their modification
methods are the same. The following is ditto.
9.

If selecting the submenu Prot Settings, and press ENT to enter. After selecting different
command menu, the LCD will display the following interface: (take FD Settings as an
example)

8-26

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

8 Human Machine Interface


FD Settings

Please Select Group for Config


Active Group :

01

Selected Group :

02

Press the or to modify the value, and then press the ENT to enter it. Move the cursor to
the setting item to be modified, press the ENT to enter.
Take the setting [FD.DPFC.I_Set] as an example is selected to modify, then press the ENT to
enter and the LCD will display the following interface. is shown the or to modify the value
and then press the ENT to confirm.

FD.DPFC.I_Set

Current Value

0.200

Modified Value

0.202

Min Value

0.050

Max Value

30.000

NOTE!
After modifying protection settings in current active setting group or system parameters of
the device, the HEALTHY indicator lamp of the device will go out, and the device will
automatically restart and re-check them. If the check doesnt pass, the device will be
blocked.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

8-27
Date: 2013-02-28

8 Human Machine Interface

8.4.7 Copy Device Setting


The operation is as follows:
1.

Press the to enter the main menu;

2.

Press the or to move the cursor to the Settings menu, and then press the ENT or
to enter the menu;

3.

Press the or to move the cursor to the command menu Copy Settings, and then
press the ENT to enter the menu.

Copy Settings
Active Group:

01

Copy To Group:

02

Press the or to modify the value. Press the ESC, and return to the menu Settings.
Press the ENT, the LCD will display the interface for password input, if the password is incorrect,
continue inputting it, press the ESC to exit the password input interface and return to the menu
Settings. If the password is correct, the LCD will display copy setting OK!, and exit this menu
(returning to the menu Settings).

8.4.8 Switch Setting Group


The operation is as follows:
1.

Exit the main menu;

2.

Press the GRP

8-28

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

8 Human Machine Interface

Change Active Group

Active Group:

01

Change To Group:

02

Press the or to modify the value, and then press the ESC to exit this menu (returning to
the main menu). After pressing the ENT, the LCD will display the password input interface. If the
password is incorrect, continue inputting it, and then press the ESC to exit the password input
interface and return to its original state. If the password is correct, the HEALTHY indicator lamp
of the protection device will go out, and the protection device will re-check the protection setting. If
the check doesnt pass, the protection device will be blocked. If the check is successful, the LCD
will return to its original state.

8.4.9 Delete Device Records


The operation is as follows:
1.

Exit the main menu;

2.

Press the , , , and ENT; Press the ESC to exit this menu (returning to the
original state). Press the ENT to carry out the deletion.

Press <ENT> To Clear


Press <ESC> To Exit

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

8-29
Date: 2013-02-28

8 Human Machine Interface

NOTE!
The operation of deleting device message will delete all messages saved by the protection
device, including disturbance records, supervision events, binary events, but not including
device logs. Furthermore, the message is irrecoverable after deletion, so the application of
the function shall be cautious.

8.4.10 Remote Control


Control operation method is introduced as below:
1.

Press the key to enter the main menu.

2.

Press the key or to move the cursor to the command menu Local Cmd, and
then press the key ENT to enter submenus. Press the key or to move the
cursor to the command menu Control, and then press the key ENT to enter and the
following display will be shown on LCD.

Password:
___

Input a 3-bit password (111). If the password is incorrect, continue inputting it, and then press the
ESC to exit the password input interface and return to the displayed interface of the command
menu Control. If the password is correct, it will go to the following step.
3.

Press the key or to move the cursor to the control object and press the key
ENT to select control object.

8-30

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

8 Human Machine Interface

Control

4.

1.

Step1: select Control Object


CSWI01

2.

CSWI02

3.

CSWI03

4.

CSWI04

5.

CSWI05

6.

CSWI06

7.

CSWI07

8.

CSWI08

9.

CSWI09

10.

CSWI10

Press the key or to select control command press the key ENT to the next step.

Three control commands are optional:


1) Open (Step down): Remote open
2) Close (Step up): Remote close
3) Stop: Reserved
CSWI01
Step2: select Control Command
Open(Step down) Close(Step up)
NoCheck

SynchroCheck

LoopCheck

EF Line Selection

InterlockChk

InterlockNotChk

Select

Execute

(Stop)
DeadCheck

Cancle

Result

5.

Press the key or to select synchronism check mode and press the key ENT to
the next step.

Five synchronism check modes are optional:


1) NoCheck: Without any check
2) SynchroCheck: Synchronism-check mode

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

8-31
Date: 2013-02-28

8 Human Machine Interface

3) DeadCheck: Dead check mode


4) LoopCheck: Reserved
5) EF Line Selection: Reserved
CSWI01
Step3: select Execution Condition
Open(Step down) Close(Step up)
NoCheck

SynchroCheck

LoopCheck

EF Line Selection

InterlockChk

InterlockNotChk

Select

Execute

(Stop)
DeadCheck

Cancle

Result

6.

Press the key or to select interlock mode and press the key ENT to next step.

Two interlock check modes are optional:


1) InterlockChk: Check interlocking criteria
2) InterlockNotChk: Not check interlocking criteria
CSWI01
Step4: select Interlock Condition
Open(Step down) Close(Step up)
NoCheck

SynchroCheck

LoopCheck

EF Line Selection

InterlockChk

InterLockNotChk

Select

Execute

(Stop)
DeadCheck

Cancle

Result

7.

Press the key or to select control type and press the key ENT.

As shown in the following figure, operation results will be shown after Result at the bottom of the
LCD.

8-32

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

8 Human Machine Interface

Three synchronism control types are optional:


1) Select: Select control object
2) Execute: Execute control operation
3) Cancle: Cancle control operation
CSWI01
Step5: select Control Type
Open(Step down) Close(Step up)
NoCheck

SynchroCheck

LoopCheck

EF Line Selection

InterlockChk

InterLockNotChk

Select

Execute

(Stop)
DeadCheck

Cancle

Result

NOTE!
Exectue operation must be operated after Select operation.

8.4.11 Modify Device Clock


The operation is as follows:
1.

Press the to enter the main menu;

2.

Press the or to move the cursor to the Clock menu, and then press the ENT to
enter clock display

3.

Press the or to move the cursor to the date or time to be modified;

4.

Press the + or - to modify value, and then press the ENT to save the modification and
return to the main menu;

5.

Press the ESC to cancel the modification and return to the main menu.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

8-33
Date: 2013-02-28

8 Human Machine Interface

Clock
Year

2008

Month

11

Day

28

Hour

20

Minute

59

Second

14

8.4.12 View Module Information


The operation is as follows:
1.

Press the to enter the main menu;

2.

Press the or to move the cursor to the Information menu, and then press the ENT
or to enter the menu;

3.

Press the or to move the cursor to the command menu Board Info, and then press
the ENT to enter the menu;

4.

Press the or to move the scroll bar;

5.

Press the ENT or ESC to exit this menu (returning to the Information menu).

8.4.13 Check Software Version


The operation is as follows:
1.

Press the to enter the main menu.

2.

Press the or to move the cursor to the Information menu, and then press the ENT
to enter the submenu.

3.

Press the key or to move the cursor to the command menu Version Info, and then
press the key ENT to display the software version.

4.

Press the ESC to return to the main menu.

8.4.14 Communication Test


The operation is as follows:
1.

Press the key to enter the main menu.

2.

Press the key or to move the cursor to the Test menu, and then press the key
ENT or to enter the menu.

8-34

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

8 Human Machine Interface

3.

Press the key or to move the cursor to the submenu Device Test, and then press
the key ENT to enter the submenu, to select test item. If Disturb Events Superv Events
or IO Events is selected, two options All Test and Select Test are provided.

Prot Element
All Test
Select Test

4.

Press the key or to move the cursor to select the corresponding command menu All
Test or Select Test. If selecting the All Test, press the ENT, and the device will
successively carry out all operation element message test one by one.

5.

If Select Test is selected, press the key ENT. Press the or to page up/down, and
then press the key or to move the scroll bar. Move the cursor to select the
corresponding protection element. Press the key ENT to execute the communication test of
this protection element, the substation automatic system (SAS) will receive the corresponding
message.
NOTE!
If no input operation is carried out within 60s, exit the communication transmission and
return to the Test menu, at this moment, the LCD will display Communication Test
Timeout and Exiting....

Press the key ESC to exit this menu (returning to the menu Test, at this moment, the LCD will
display Communication Test Exiting.

8.4.15 Select Language


The operation is as follows:
1.

Press the key to enter the main menu.

2.

Press the key or to move the cursor to the command menu Language, and then
press the key ENT to enter the menu and the following display will be shown on LCD.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

8-35
Date: 2013-02-28

8 Human Machine Interface

Please Select Language:

3.

English

Press the key or to move the cursor to the language user preferred and press the key
ENT to execute language switching. After language switching is finished, LCD will return
to the menu Language, and the display language is changed. Otherwise, press the key
ESC to cancel language switching and return to the menu Language.
NOTE!
LCD interface provided in this chapter is only a reference and available for explaining
specific definition of LCD. The displayed interface of the actual device may be some
different from it, so you shall be subject to the actual protection device.

8-36

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

9 Configurable Function

9 Configurable Function
Table of Contents
9.1 General Description ........................................................................................ 9-1
9.2 Introduction on PCS-Explorer software ........................................................ 9-1
9.3 GOOSE Introduction ....................................................................................... 9-2
9.3.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 9-2
9.3.2 Function Description ............................................................................................................ 9-3
9.3.3 Maintenance Mechanism..................................................................................................... 9-5

9.4 Signal List ........................................................................................................ 9-6


9.4.1 Input Signals ........................................................................................................................ 9-6
9.4.2 Output Signals ................................................................................................................... 9-10

List of Figures
Figure 9.3-1 Typical GOOOSE networking scheme ................................................................. 9-2
Figure 9.3-2 GOOSE send mechanism ..................................................................................... 9-3

List of Tables
Table 9.4-1 Input signals ............................................................................................................. 9-6
Table 9.4-2 Output signals ........................................................................................................ 9-10

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

9-a
Date: 2013-02-28

9 Configurable Function

9-b

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

9 Configurable Function

9.1 General Description


By adoption of PCS-Explorer software, it is able to make device configuration, function
configuration, LCD configuration, binary input and binary output configuration, LED indicator
configuration and programming logic for PCS-921.

9.2 Introduction on PCS-Explorer software


PCS-Explorer software is developed in order to meet customers demand on functions of UAPC
platform device such as device configuration and programmable design. It selects substation as
the core of data management and the device as fundamental unit, supporting one substation to
govern many devices. The software provides on-line and off-line functions: on-line mode: Ethernet
connected with the device supporting IEC60870-5-103 and capable of uploading and downloading
configuration files through Ethernet net; off-line mode: off-line setting configuration. In addition, it
also supports programmable logic to meet customers demand.
After function configuration is finished, disabled protection function will be hidden in the device and
in setting configuration list of PCS-Explorer Software. The user can select to show or hide some
setting by this way, and modify the setting value.
Please refer to the instruction manual PCS-Explorer Auxiliary Software for details.
Overall functions:

Programmable logic (off-line function)

Device configuration (off-line function)

Function configuration (off-line function)

LCD configuration (off-line function)

LED indicators configuration (off-line function)

Binary signals configuration (off-line function)

Setting configuration (off-line & on-line function)

Real-time display of analogue and digital quantity of device (on-line function)

Display of sequence of report (SOE) (on-line function)

Analysis of waveform (off-line & on-line function)

File downloading/uploading (on-line function)

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

9-1
Date: 2013-02-28

9 Configurable Function

9.3 GOOSE Introduction


9.3.1 Overview
Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE) is the mechanism in IEC61850 standard
used to satisfy fast message demand of substation automation system, and provides means of
fast information transmission and exchange under network communication conditions. In case of
any status change, intelligent electronic device (IED) will use change report to transmit binary
objects in high speed, i.e. GOOSE report. Information exchange among IEDs is realized by
GOOSE.
PCS-900 series features GOOSE network message interface independent of MMS message
interface and of high real-time property. Therefore, PCS-900 series can receive binary inputs via
opto-coupler and send output commands via binary output contact, as well as GOOSE input
signals, and can configure GOOSE output commands and GOOSE output signals. Configuration
of GOOSE signals is obtained by GOOSE file based on SCD file.
PCS-900 series supports single network mode and dual network mode, P2P mode and networking
mode, as well as mode based on station level network MMS or process level network. Networking
mode can be selected by parameters setup or configuration tool PCS-Explorer. For important
occasions, in order to ensure no loss of data during transmission, it is recommended to configure
dual GOOSE network in which process level is independent of station level for the protection
device. Refer to the figure as below.

Control Center
Server A/
Workstation

Server B/
Workstation

Engineering
Workstation

Maintenance
Workstation

GPS

Printer

Station Level

Satellite-Synchronized
Clock
Gateway

Station Bus: MMS, GOOSE (Interlocking), SNTP

Switch

Protocol Converter
PCS-900
Protection

Bay Level

PCS-900
Protection

PCS-9700
Bay Control Unit

Third-Party IEDs

Switch

Process Bus: Sampled Value, GOOSE (Tripping/Binary Input), IEEE 1588, GMRP Clock Synchronization

PCS-221
Merging Unit

Process Level
Optical Fiber

PCS-222
Circuit Breaker Controller

Electronic/Optical CT & VT

Circuit Breaker: GIS/AIS

Figure 9.3-1 Typical GOOOSE networking scheme

The above figure shows a typical dual network mode, in which process level network is separate
from station level network, to ensure that important information (e.g. tripping signal) is not affected
by data on the MMS data network.

9-2

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

9 Configurable Function

Ring network is not recommended for GOOSE network configuration, to avoid the problem of
network storm. Duplicated protection configuration and their GOOSE networks shall be totally
independent of each other, to ensure that in case of any network fault in one set of duplicated
protection configuration, the other set will not be affected.

9.3.2 Function Description


IEC 61850 provides substation configuration language (SCL) based on XML, which has
standardized description of substation systems and device configuration. There are four types of
SCL files:

SSD: Substation Specification Description

SCD: Substation Configuration Description

ICD: IED Capability Description

CID: Configured IED Description

Normally, manufacturers provide ICD file, system integrator prepare SCD file of the whole
substation according to design blueprints, and each IED manufacturer exports its CID file after
receiving SCD configuration model.
9.3.2.1 GOOSE Transmission
GOOSE service is directly mapped to network data link layer. To ensure important information
transmission priority, broadcast address is used for multi-channle transmission of information.
GOOSE message allows high-speed transmission of tripping signals, which has high transmission
success rate.
GOOSE message is not sent at fixed interval. When there is no GOOSE event, interval of GOOSE
message transmission is fixed and relatively long. However, after an event occurs, data
transmission will change, and the interval set for this occasion is the shortest. GOOSE adopts
continual repeated transmission to realize reliable transmission, and during this period,
transmission interval will gradually increase, till the event status becomes stable. Later, GOOSE
message transmission will be back to fixed interval. The whole process is shown as below:
Transmission Time

Event

Figure 9.3-2 GOOSE send mechanism

Where:
T0 is retransmission in stable conditions (no event for a long time), and it can be configured
(typical value is 5000ms)
T1 is the shortest retransmission time after the event, and it can be configured (typical value is
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

9-3
Date: 2013-02-28

9 Configurable Function

2ms)
T2 is retransmission times until achieving the stable conditions time, and it is fixed at 2T1.
T3 is retransmission times until achieving the stable conditions time, and it is fixed at 4T1.
GOOSE transmission adopts retransmission mechanism and has 4 transmission times: T0, T1, T2,
and T3. After the event occurs, a frame message will be transmitted, transmitting again after
interval T1, and still transmitting after another interval T1. And then, transmitting again after
interval T2 and yet transmitting after interval T3. At this time, if no new event occurs, transmission
will continue at interval T0 again.
Data transmitted are defined by definition of GOOSE transmission dataset and GOOSE control
blocks. PCS-900 series supports transmission of 8 GOOSE control blocks at maximum. GOOSE
can transmit both binary quantities and analog quantities of not large change, e.g. temperature
and humidity.
9.3.2.2 GOOSE Reception
At maximum, PCS-900 series can receive 128 control block data, subject to control by GOOSE
Links. GOOSE reception control block is controlled by GOOSE links of corresponding serial
number, and provides corresponding alarm signal of the same serial number.
After the receiver receives GOOSE data, if GOOSE data is invalid (refer to section 9.3.2.3), the
GOOSE data shall be processed accordingly, i.e. clear (zero), force to 1, or keep.
9.3.2.3 Invalid GOOSE Data
In case of any of the following, invalid GOOSE data will be reported:
1.

The next frame of GOOSE message is not received within 1.1 times of maximum message
survival time

2.

GOOSE reception link is disabled

3.

Inconsistent version No. or mismatching dataset data

4.

Device test mode is inconsistent with message Test state

NOTE!

Each frame of transmitted GOOSE data includes maximum message survival time,
normally 2 times of GOOSE heartbeat time (t0)
Test state of GOOSE message is set to 1 if the reception control block receives message
with Test bit, otherwise it is set to 0 if message without Test bit is received.
9.3.2.4 GOOSE Data Link Disconnection
If GOOSE message is not received within 2 times of maximum message survival time, GOOSE
link disconnection will be reported. For example, receiver sets GOOSE heartbeat time (t0) to 5s,

9-4

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

9 Configurable Function

so that specified message survival time in transmitted message is 10s. After GOOSE receives one
frame of message, if the next frame is not received within 11s, , GOOSE data is invalid. If not
received in 20s (2 times of message survival time), GOOSE link disconnection will be reported.
If invalid data or data link disconnection is tested by unplugging network wire, note that since
network line disconnection occurs at any time between two groups of heartbeat messages, invalid
GOOSE data is normally reported in 6~11s after actual disconnection, and GOOSE network link
disconnection is normally reported in 15~20s after actual disconnection.

NOTE!

Invalid GOOSE data is not synchronized with GOOSE link disconnection in time. The
former is reported when message is not received within 1.1 times maximum message
survival time, while the latter is only reported when message is not received within 2 times
maximum message survival time.
9.3.2.5 GOOSE Message Handling Mechanism under Network Storm
This device features fast detection of network storm and fast handling of network messages. In
case of network storm in single network, this device can ensure no loss of normal network
messages, and protection functions will not be affected.
In case of network storm in dual network, this device can maintain reception and handling of
messages in one of the networks, and actual test has shown that protection functions are basically
not affected.

9.3.3 Maintenance Mechanism


For important GOOSE output signal, such as, tripping, reclosing, breaker failure etc., it is
selectable whether they are controlled by Start signal, which is monitoring signal of GOOSE
output, and provided by fault detector DSP and separated from protection DSP, to ensure reliability
of output signals.
GOOSE reception and transmission message provide a Test bit. The receiver will compare this
Test bit in received message with its own Test bit. If they are consistent, operation will occur,
otherwise, invalid GOOSE data will be reported (refer to section 9.3.2.3). This eliminates mutual
effect between device in operation and device in maintainence.
Different from traditional contact signals, which can can be set to enable/disable corresponding
signals, PCS-900 series adopts the following modes to enable and disable corresponding signals
including Test state.
1.

When the Test bit in GOOSE message is consistent with the Test of the receiver, GOOSE
data is valid, otherwise it is invalid (refer to section 9.3.2.3). In this way, the device in service
and device in maintainence do not affect each other.

2.

In Test state, the receiver still has event recording and state display functions, to facilitate
check of circuit.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

9-5
Date: 2013-02-28

9 Configurable Function

3.

GOOSE logic link is provided to solve the problem of selective transmission of signals.
Transmitter can be isolated from receiver by disabling relevant GOOSE logic link. The setup
of transmission and reception logic links can be consistent with traditional logic links.

4.

For transmitter, GOOSE element will perform AND of data value and transmission logic link
state, and then detect change of data, so as to decide activation of a new round of
transmission flow.

9.4 Signal List


9.4.1 Input Signals
All input signals for this device are listed in the following table.
If a input signal is gray in PCS-Explorer, it means the input signal is not configurable. If a input
signal is dark in PCS-Explorer, it means the input signal is configurable.
Table 9.4-1 Input signals
No.

Item

Description
Circuit Breaker Position

52b_PhA

Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase A of corresponding circuit breaker

52b_PhB

Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase B of corresponding circuit breaker

52b_PhC

Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase C of corresponding circuit breaker

52b

Normally closed contact of three-phase of circuit breaker


Auxiliary element

AuxE.OCD.En

AuxE.OCD.Blk

AuxE.ROC1.En

AuxE.ROC1.Blk

AuxE.ROC2.En

10

AuxE.ROC2.Blk

11

AuxE.ROC3.En

12

AuxE.ROC3.Blk

13

AuxE.OC1.En

14

AuxE.OC1.Blk

Current change auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from binary


input or programmable logic etc.
Current change auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from binary
input or programmable logic etc.
Stage 1 of residual current auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from
binary input or programmable logic etc.
Stage 1 of residual current auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from
binary input or programmable logic etc.
Stage 2 of residual current auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from
binary input or programmable logic etc.
Stage 2 of residual current auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from
binary input or programmable logic etc.
Stage 3 of residual current auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from
binary input or programmable logic etc.
Stage 3 of residual current auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from
binary input or programmable logic etc.
Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from
binary input or programmable logic etc.
Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from
binary input or programmable logic etc.

9-6

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

9 Configurable Function
15

AuxE.OC2.En

16

AuxE.OC2.Blk

17

AuxE.OC3.En

18

AuxE.OC3.Blk

19

AuxE.UVD.En

20

AuxE.UVD.Blk

21

AuxE.UVG.En

22

AuxE.UVG.Blk

23

AuxE.UVS.En

24

AuxE.UVS.Blk

25

AuxE.ROV.En

26

AuxE.ROV.Blk

Stage 2 of phase current auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from


binary input or programmable logic etc.
Stage 2 of phase current auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from
binary input or programmable logic etc.
Stage 3 of phase current auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from
binary input or programmable logic etc.
Stage 3 of phase current auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from
binary input or programmable logic etc.
Voltage change auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from binary
input or programmable logic etc.
Voltage change auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from binary
input or programmable logic etc.
Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered
from binary input or programmable logic etc.
Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered
from binary input or programmable logic etc.
Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered
from binary input or programmable logic etc.
Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered
from binary input or programmable logic etc.
Residual voltage auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from binary
input or programmable logic etc.
Residual voltage auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from binary
input or programmable logic etc.
Phase Overcurrent Protection

27

50/51Px.En1

28

50/51Px.En2

29

50/51Px.Blk

Stage x of phase overcurrent protection enabling input 1, it is triggered from


binary input or programmable logic etc.
Stage x of phase overcurrent protection enabling input 2, it is triggered from
binary input or programmable logic etc.
Stage x of phase overcurrent protection blocking input, it is triggered from
binary input or programmable logic etc.
Earth-fault Protection

30

50/51Gx.En1

31

50/51Gx.En2

32

50/51Gx.Blk

Stage x of earth fault protection enabling input 1, it is triggered from binary


input or programmable logic etc.
Stage x of earth fault protection enabling input 2, it is triggered from binary
input or programmable logic etc.
Stage x of earth fault protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input
or programmable logic etc.
Dead Zone Protection

33

50DZ.En1

34

50DZ.En2

Dead zone protection enabling input 1, it is triggered from binary input or


programmable logic etc.
Dead zone protection enabling input 2, it is triggered from binary input or
programmable logic etc.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

9-7
Date: 2013-02-28

9 Configurable Function
35

50DZ.Blk

36

50DZ.Init

Dead zone protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or


programmable logic etc
Initiation signal input of the dead zone protection.
Breaker Failure Protection

37

50BF.ExTrp3P_L

Input signal of three-phase tripping contact from line protection

38

50BF.ExTrp3P_GT

39

50BF.ExTrpA

Input signal of phase-A tripping contact from external device

40

50BF.ExTrpB

Input signal of phase-B tripping contact from external device

41

50BF.ExTrpC

Input signal of phase-C tripping contact from external device

Input signal of three-phase tripping contact from generator or transformer


protection

Input signal of three-phase tripping contact from external device. Once it is


42

50BF.ExTrp_WOI

energized, normally closed auxiliary contact of circuit breaker is chosen in


addition to breaker failure current check to trigger breaker failure timers.

43

50BF.En

44

50BF.Blk

Breaker failure protection enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or


programmable logic etc.
Breaker failure protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
programmable logic etc
Pole Discrepancy Protection

45

62PD.En1

46

62PD.En2

47

62PD.Blk

48

62PD.In_PD

Pole discrepancy protection enabling input 1, it is triggered from binary input


or programmable logic etc.
Pole discrepancy protection enabling input 2, it is triggered from binary input
or programmable logic etc.
Pole discrepancy protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
programmable logic etc.
Pole discrepancy binary input
Synchronism Check

49

25.Blk_Chk

Input signal of blocking synchrocheck function for AR.

50

25.Blk_SynChk

51

25.Blk_DdChk

52

25.Start_Chk

53

25.Blk_VTS_UB

VT circuit supervision (UB) is blocked

54

25.Blk_VTS_UL

VT circuit supervision (UL) is blocked

55

25.MCB_VT_UB

Binary input for VT MCB auxiliary contact (UB)

56

25.MCB_VT_UL

Binary input for VT MCB auxiliary contact (UL)

Input signal of blocking synchronism check for AR. If the value is 1, the
output of synchronism check is 0.
Input signal of blocking dead charge check for AR.
Input signal of starting synchronism check, usually it was starting signal of AR
from auto-reclosing module.

Auto-reclosure
Binary input for enabling AR. If the logic setting [79.En_ExtCtrl]=1, enabling

57

79.En

58

79.Blk

59

79.Sel_1PAR

Input signal for selecting 1-pole AR mode of corresponding circuit breaker

60

79.Sel_3PAR

Input signal for selecting 3-pole AR mode of corresponding circuit breaker

AR will be controlled by the external signal via binary input


Binary input for disabling AR. If the logic setting [79.En_ExtCtrl]=1, disabling
AR will be controlled by the external input

9-8

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

9 Configurable Function
61

79.Sel_1P/3PAR

Input signal for selecting 1/3-pole AR mode of corresponding circuit breaker

62

79.Trp

Input signal of single-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR

63

79.Trp3P

Input signal of three-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR

64

79.TrpA

Input signal of A-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR

65

79.TrpB

Input signal of B-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR

66

79.TrpC

Input signal of C-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR

67

79.LockOut

Input signal of blocking reclosing, usually it is connected with the operating


signals of definite-time protection, transformer protection and busbar
differential protection, etc.
68

79.PLC_Lost

Input signal of indicating the alarm signal that signal channel is lost

69

79.WaitMaster

70

79.CB_Healthy

71

79.Clr_Counter

Clear the reclosing counter

72

79.Ok_Chk

Synchrocheck condition of AR is met

Input signal of waiting for reclosing permissive signal from master AR (when
reclosing multiple circuit breakers)
The input for indicating whether circuit breaker has enough energy to perform
the close function

Trip Logic
73

TrpOut.En

Trip enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or programmable logic etc.

74

TrpOut.Blk

Trip blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or programmable logic etc.

75

Op_CBProt

breaker tripping elements except line fault


Input signal of permitting three-phase tripping

76

PrepTrp3P

When this signal is valid, three-phase tripping will be adopted for any kind of
faults.
VT Circuit Supervision

77

VTS.En

78

VTS.Blk

79

VTNS.En

80

VTNS.Blk

81

VTS.MCB_VT

VT supervision enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or


programmable logic etc.
VT supervision blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
programmable logic etc.
VT neutral point supervision enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or
programmable logic etc.
VT neutral point supervision blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
programmable logic etc.
Binary input for VT MCB auxiliary contact
CT Circuit Supervision

82

CTS.En

83

CTS.Blk

CT circuit supervision enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or


programmable logic etc.
CT circuit supervision blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
programmable logic etc.
Control and Synchrocheck for Manual Closing

84

CSWIxx.CILO.EnOpn

It is the interlock status of No.xx open output of BO module (xx=01~10)

85

CSWIxx.CILO.EnCls

It is the interlock status of No.xx closing output of BO module (xx=01~10)

86

Sig_Ok_Chk

From receiving a closing command, this device will continuously check


whether the 2 voltages (Incoming voltage and reference voltage) involved in

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

9-9
Date: 2013-02-28

9 Configurable Function
synchronism check(or dead check) can meet the criteria.
Within the duration of [MCBrd.25.t_Wait_Chk], if the synchronism check(or
dead check) criteria are not met, [Sig_Ok_Chk] will be set as 0; if the
synchronism check(or dead check) criteria are met, [Sig_Ok_Chk] will be set
as 1.
Access the menu Local CmdControl to issue control command locally.
87

CSWIxx.Cmd_LocCtrl

It is used to select the local control to No.xx controlled object (CB/DS/ES).


When the local control is active, No.xx binary outputs can only be locally
controlled.
It is used to select the remote control to No.xx controlled object (CB/DS/ES).

88

CSWIxx.Cmd_RmtCtrl

When the remote control is active, No.xx binary outputs can only be remotely
controlled by SCADA or control centers.
It is used to disable the interlock blocking function for control output. If the

89

CSWIxx.CILO.Disable

signal CSWIxx.CILO.Disable is 1, No.xx binary outputs of the device will


not be blocked by interlock conditions.
It is used to select the remote control to No.xx controlled object (CB/DS/ES).

90

BIinput.RmtCtrl

When the remote control is active, all binary outputs can only be remotely
controlled by SCADA or control centers.
It is used to select the local control to No.xx controlled object (CB/DS/ES).

91

BIinput.LocCtrl

When the local control is active, all binary outputs can only be locally
controlled.
It is used to disable the interlock blocking function for control output. If the

92

BIinput.CILO.Disable

signal CSWIxx.CILO.Disable is 1, all binary outputs of this device will not


be blocked by interlock conditions.
When

93

CSWI01.ManSynCls

the

condition

of

local

control

is

met

and

the

signal

CSWI01.ManSynCls is 1, the output contact [BO_CtrlCls01] is closed to


execute manually closing the circuit breaker with synschrochcek.
When the condition of local control is met and the signal CSWI01.ManOpn is

94

CSWI01.ManOpn

1, the output contact [BO_CtrlOpn01] is closed to execute manually open the


circuit breaker.

9.4.2 Output Signals


All output signals for this device have been listed in the following table.
If a output signal is gray in PCS-Explorer, it means the output signal is not configurable. If a output
signal is dark in PCS-Explorer, it means the output signal is configurable.
Table 9.4-2 Output signals
No.

Signal

Description
Circuit Breaker Position

Alm_52b

CB position is abnormal
Fault Detector

FD.Pkp

The device picks up

FD.DPFC.Pkp

DPFC current fault detector element operates.

9-10

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

9 Configurable Function
4

FD.ROC.Pkp

Residual current fault detector element operates.


Auxiliary element

AuxE.St

Any auxiliary element of the device operates

AuxE.OCD.St_Ext

Current change auxiliary element operates (7s delayed drop off).

AuxE.OCD.On

Current change auxiliary element is enabled

AuxE.ROC1.St

Stage 1 of residual current auxiliary element operates.

AuxE.ROC1.On

Stage 1 of residual current auxiliary element is enabled

10

AuxE.ROC2.St

Stage 2 of residual current auxiliary element operates.

11

AuxE.ROC2.On

Stage 2 of residual current auxiliary element is enabled

12

AuxE.ROC3.St

Stage 3 of residual current auxiliary element operates.

13

AuxE.ROC3.On

Stage 3 of residual current auxiliary element is enabled

14

AuxE.OC1.St

Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element operates.

15

AuxE.OC1.StA

Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element operates (phase A).

16

AuxE.OC1.StB

Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element operates (phase B).

17

AuxE.OC1.StC

Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element operates (phase C).

18

AuxE.OC1.On

Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element is enabled

19

AuxE.OC2.St

Stage 2 of phase current auxiliary element operates.

20

AuxE.OC2.StA

Stage 2 of phase current auxiliary element operates (phase A).

21

AuxE.OC2.StB

Stage 2 of phase current auxiliary element operates (phase B).

22

AuxE.OC2.StC

Stage 2 of phase current auxiliary element operates (phase C).

23

AuxE.OC2.On

Stage 2 of phase current auxiliary element is enabled

24

AuxE.OC3.St

Stage 3 of phase current auxiliary element operates.

25

AuxE.OC3.StA

Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element operates (phase A).

26

AuxE.OC3.StB

Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element operates (phase B).

27

AuxE.OC3.StC

Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element operates (phase C).

28

AuxE.OC3.On

Stage 3 of phase current auxiliary element is enabled

29

AuxE.UVD.St

Voltage change auxiliary element operates.

30

AuxE.UVD.St_Ext

Voltage change auxiliary element operates (7s delayed drop off).

31

AuxE.UVD.On

Voltage change auxiliary element is enabled

32

AuxE.UVG.St

Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element operates.

33

AuxE.UVG.StA

Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase A).

34

AuxE.UVG.StB

Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase B).

35

AuxE.UVG.StC

Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase C).

36

AuxE.UVG.On

Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element is enabled

37

AuxE.UVS.St

Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element operates.

38

AuxE.UVS.StAB

Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase AB).

39

AuxE.UVS.StBC

Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase BC).

40

AuxE.UVS.StCA

Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase CA).

41

AuxE.UVS.On

Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element is enabled

42

AuxE.ROV.St

Residual voltage auxiliary element operates.

43

AuxE.ROV.On

Residual voltage auxiliary element is enabled


Phase Overcurrent Protection

44

50/51Px.En

Stage x of phase overcurrent protection is enabled

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

9-11
Date: 2013-02-28

9 Configurable Function
45

50/51Px.St

Stage x of phase overcurrent protection starts

46

50/51Px.StA

Stage x of phase overcurrent protection starts (A-Phase).

47

50/51Px.StB

Stage x of phase overcurrent protection starts (B-Phase).

48

50/51Px.StC

Stage x of phase overcurrent protection starts (C-Phase).

49

50/51Px.Op

Stage x of phase overcurrent protection operates


Earth-fault Protection

50

50/51Gx.En

Stage x of residual overcurrent protection is enabled.

51

50/51Gx.St

Stage x of residual overcurrent protection starts.

52

50/51Gx.Op

Stage x of residual overcurrent protection operates.


Dead Zone Protection

53

50DZ.En

Dead zone protection is enabled.

54

50DZ.St

Dead zone protection starts.

55

50DZ.Op

Dead zone protection operates.


Breaker Failure Protection

56

50BF.En

Breaker failure protection is enabled

57

50BF.Op_ReTrpA

Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip phase-A circuit breaker

58

50BF.Op_ReTrpB

Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip phase-B circuit breaker

59

50BF.Op_ReTrpC

Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip phase-C circuit breaker

60

50BF.Op_ReTrp3P

Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip three-phase circuit breaker

61

50BF.Op_t1

Stage 1 breaker failure protection operates

62

50BF.Op_t2

Stage 2 breaker failure protection operates


Pole Discrepancy Protection

63

62PD.En

Pole discrepancy protection is enabled

64

62PD.St

Pole discrepancy protection starts

65

62PD.Op

Pole discrepancy protection operates to trip


Synchronism Check

66

UL1_Sel

To select voltage of Line 1

67

UL2_Sel

To select voltage of Line 2

68

UB1_Sel

To select voltage of Bus 1

69

UB2_Sel

To select voltage of Bus 2

70

Invalid_Sel

Voltage selection is invalid.

71

25.Ok_fDiffChk

72

25.Ok_UDiffChk

73

25.Ok_phiDiffChk

74

25.Ok_DdL_DdB

Dead line and dead bus condition is met

75

25.Ok_DdL_LvB

Dead line and live bus condition is met

76

25.Ok_LvL_DdB

Live line and dead bus condition is met

77

25.Chk_LvL

Line voltage is greater than the voltage setting [25.U_Lv]

78

25.Chk_DdL

Line voltage is smaller than the voltage setting [25.U_Dd]

79

25.Chk_LvB

Bus voltage is greater than the voltage setting [25.U_Lv]

To indicate that frequency difference condition for synchronism check of AR is


met, frequency difference between UB and UL is smaller than [25.f_Diff].
To indicate that voltage difference condition for synchronism check of AR is
met, voltage difference between UB and UL is smaller than [25.U_Diff]
To indicate phase difference condition for synchronism check of AR is met,
phase difference between UB and UL is smaller than [25.phi_Diff].

9-12

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

9 Configurable Function
80

25.Chk_DdB

Bus voltage is smaller than the voltage setting [25.U_Dd]

81

25.Ok_DdChk

To indicate that dead charge check condition of AR is met

82

25.Ok_SynChk

To indicate that synchronism check condition of AR is met

83

25.Ok_Chk

To indicate that synchrocheck condition of AR is met

84

25.Alm_VTS_UB

Synchronism voltage circuit is abnormal (UB)

85

25.Alm_VTS_UL

Synchronism voltage circuit is abnormal (UL)


Auto-reclosure

86

79.On

Automatic reclosure is enabled

87

79.Off

Automatic reclosure is disabled

88

79.Close

Output of auto-reclosing signal

89

79.Ready

Automatic reclosure have been ready for reclosing cycle

90

79.AR_Blkd

Automatic reclosure is blocked

91

79.Active

Automatic reclosing logic is actived

92

79.Inprog

Automatic reclosing cycle is in progress

93

79.Inprog_1P

The first 1-pole AR cycle is in progress

94

79.Inprog_3P

3-pole AR cycle is in progress

95

79.Inprog_3PS1

First 3-pole AR cycle is in progress

96

79.Inprog_3PS2

Second 3-pole AR cycle is in progress

97

79.Inprog_3PS3

Third 3-pole AR cycle is in progress

98

79.Inprog_3PS4

Fourth 3-pole AR cycle is in progress

99

79.WaitToSlave

100

79.Prem_Trp1P

Single-phase circuit breaker will be tripped once protection device operates

101

79.Prem_Trp3P

Three-phase circuit breaker will be tripped once protection device operates

102

79.Rcls_Status

103

79.Fail_Rcls

Auto-reclosing fails

104

79.Succ_Rcls

Auto-reclosing is successful

105

79.Fail_Chk

Synchrocheck for AR fails

106

79.Mode_1PAR

Output of 1-pole AR mode

107

79.Mode_3PAR

Output of 3-pole AR mode

108

79.Mode_1/3PAR

Output of 1/3-pole AR mode

Waiting signal of automatic reclosing which will be sent to slave (when


reclosing multiple circuit breakers)

Automatic reclosure status (0: AR is ready; 1: AR is in progress; 2: AR is


successful)

Tripping Logic
109

TrpOut.En

Trip output is enabled

110

TrpA

Tripping phase-A circuit breaker

111

TrpB

Tripping phase-B circuit breaker

112

TrpC

Tripping phase-C circuit breaker

113

Trp

Tripping any phase of circuit breaker

114

Trp3P

Tripping three-phase circuit breaker


VT Circuit Supervision

115

VTS.Alm

Alarm signal to indicate VT circuit fails

116

VTNS.Alm

Alarm signal to indicate VT neutral point fails

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

9-13
Date: 2013-02-28

9 Configurable Function
CT Circuit Supervision
117

CTS.Alm

Alarm signal to indicate CT circuit fails


Control and Synchrocheck for Manual Closing

118

CSWIxx.Op_Opn

No.xx command output for open. (xx=01~10)

119

CSWIxx.Op_Cls

No.xx command output for closing. (xx=01~10)

120

BIinput.RmtCtrl

In order to be convenient to user configure control output, three same output

121

BIinput.LocCtrl

signals with input signals are available. The relationship with 10 binary output
have been configured inside the device. The user only assigns a specific
binary input to input signal, the relevant function can be gained. If some

122

BIinput.CILO.Disable

binary output need not be controlled by three signals, please cancle the
configuration by PCS-Explorer, and configure it independently.

9-14

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2013-02-28

10 Communications

10 Communications
Table of Contents
10.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 10-1
10.2 Rear Communication Port Information ..................................................... 10-1
10.2.1 RS-485 Interface.............................................................................................................. 10-1
10.2.2 Ethernet Interface ............................................................................................................ 10-3
10.2.3 IEC60870-5-103 Communication .................................................................................... 10-4

10.3 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Serial Port ................................................ 10-4


10.3.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer ............................................................................... 10-4
10.3.2 Initialization ...................................................................................................................... 10-4
10.3.1 Time Synchronization ...................................................................................................... 10-5
10.3.2 Spontaneous Events ........................................................................................................ 10-5
10.3.3 General Interrogation....................................................................................................... 10-5
10.3.4 General Service ............................................................................................................... 10-5
10.3.5 Disturbance Records ....................................................................................................... 10-6

10.4 Messages Description for IEC61850 Protocol .......................................... 10-6


10.4.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 10-6
10.4.2 Communication Profiles................................................................................................... 10-7
10.4.3 MMS Communication Network Deployment ................................................................... 10-7
10.4.4 Server Data Organization ...............................................................................................10-11
10.4.5 Server Features and Configuration ............................................................................... 10-13
10.4.6 ACSI Conformance ........................................................................................................ 10-15
10.4.7 Logical Nodes ................................................................................................................ 10-18

10.5 DNP3.0 Interface........................................................................................ 10-21


10.5.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 10-21
10.5.2 Link Layer Functions ..................................................................................................... 10-21
10.5.3 Transport Functions ....................................................................................................... 10-21

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

10-a
Date: 20131-03-01

10 Communications

10.5.4 Application Layer Functions .......................................................................................... 10-21

List of Figures
Figure 10.2-1 EIA RS-485 bus connection arrangements ..................................................... 10-2
Figure 10.2-2 Ethernet communication cable ........................................................................ 10-3
Figure 10.2-3 Ethernet communication structure .................................................................. 10-3
Figure 10.4-1 Dual-net full duplex mode sharing the RCB block instance ......................... 10-8
Figure 10.4-2 Dual-net hot-standby mode sharing the same RCB instance ....................... 10-9
Figure 10.4-3 Dual-net full duplex mode with 2 independent RCB instances .................. 10-10

10-b

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 20131-03-01

10 Communications

10.1 Overview
This section outlines the remote communications interfaces of NR Relays. The protective device
supports a choice of three protocols via the rear communication interface (RS-485 or Ethernet),
selected via the model number by setting. The protocol provided by the protective device is
indicated in the menu SettingsDevice SetupComm Settings.
The rear EIA RS-485 interface is isolated and is suitable for permanent connection of whichever
protocol is selected. The advantage of this type of connection is that up to 32 protective devices
can be daisy chained together using a simple twisted pair electrical connection.
It should be noted that the descriptions in this section do not aim to fully introduce the protocol
itself. The relevant documentation for the protocol should be referred for this information. This
section serves to describe the specific implementation of the protocol in the relay.

10.2 Rear Communication Port Information


10.2.1 RS-485 Interface
This protective device provides two rear RS-485 communication ports, and each port has three
terminals in the 12-terminal screw connector located on the back of the relay and each port has a
ground terminal for earth shield of communication cable. The rear ports provide RS-485 serial data
communication and are intended for use with a permanently wired connection to a remote control
center.
10.2.1.1 EIA RS-485 Standardized Bus
The EIA RS-485 two-wire connection provides a half-duplex fully isolated serial connection to the
product. The connection is polarized and whilst the products connection diagrams indicate the
polarization of the connection terminals it should be borne in mind that there is no agreed
definition of which terminal is which. If the master is unable to communicate with the product, and
the communication parameters match, then it is possible that the two-wire connection is reversed.
10.2.1.2 Bus Termination
The EIA RS-485 bus must have 120 (Ohm) Watt terminating resistors fitted at either end
across the signal wires (refer to Figure 10.2-1). Some devices may be able to provide the bus
terminating resistors by different connection or configuration arrangements, in which case
separate external components will not be required. However, this product does not provide such a
facility, so an external termination resistor is required when it is located at the bus terminus.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

10-1
Date: 20131-03-01

Master

EIA RS-485

10 Communications

120 Ohm

120 Ohm

Slave

Slave

Slave

Figure 10.2-1 EIA RS-485 bus connection arrangements

10.2.1.3 Bus Connections & Topologies


The EIA RS-485 standard requires that each device is directly connected to the physical cable i.e.
the communications bus. Stubs and tees are strictly forbidden, such as star topologies. Loop bus
topologies are not part of the EIA RS-485 standard and are forbidden also.
Two-core screened cable is recommended. The specification of the cable will be dependent on the
application, although a multi-strand 0.5mm2 per core is normally adequate. Total cable length must
not exceed 500m. The screen must be continuous and connected to ground at one end, normally
at the master connection point; it is important to avoid circulating currents, especially when the
cable runs between buildings, for both safety and noise reasons.
This product does not provide a signal ground connection. If a signal ground connection is present
in the bus cable then it must be ignored, although it must have continuity for the benefit of other
devices connected to the bus. The signal ground shall not be connected to the cables screen or to
the products chassis at any stage. This is for both safety and noise reasons.
10.2.1.4 Biasing
It may also be necessary to bias the signal wires to prevent jabber. Jabber occurs when the signal
level has an indeterminate state due to inactively driven of tubs. This can occur when all the slaves
are in receive mode and the master unit is slow to turn from receive mode to transmit mode. The
reason is that the master purposefully waits in receive mode, or even in a high impedance state,
until it has something to transmit. Jabber can result in the loss of first bits of the first character in
the packet for receiving device(s), which will lead to the rejection of messages for slave units,
causing non-responding between master unit and slave unit. This could brings poor response
times (due to retries), increase in message error counters, erratic communications, and even a
complete failure to communicate.
Biasing requires that the signal lines shall be weakly pulled to a defined voltage level of about 1V.
There should be only one bias point on the bus, which is best situated at the master connection
point. The DC source used for the bias must be clean; otherwise noise will be injected. Please
note that some devices may (optionally) be able to provide the bus bias that the external
components will not be required.
NOTE!
10-2

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 20131-03-01

10 Communications

It is extremely important that the 120 termination resistors are fitted. Failure to do so will
result in an excessive bias voltage that may damage the devices connected to the bus.
As the field voltage is much higher than that required, NR cannot assume responsibility for
any damage that may occur to a device connected to the network as a result of incorrect
application of this voltage.
Ensure that the field voltage is not being used for other purposes (i.e. powering logic inputs)
as this may cause noise to be passed to the communication network.

10.2.2 Ethernet Interface


This protective device can provide four rear Ethernet interfaces (optional) and they are unattached
to each other. Parameters of each Ethernet port can be configured in the menu
SettingsDevice SetupComm Settings.
10.2.2.1 Ethernet Standardized Communication Cable
It is recommended to use twisted screened eight-core cable as the communication cable. A picture
is shown bellow.

Figure 10.2-2 Ethernet communication cable

10.2.2.2 Connections and Topologies


Each device is connected with an exchanger via communication cable, and thereby it forms a star
structure network. Dual-network is recommended in order to increase reliability. SCADA is also
connected to the exchanger acting as the master station, and every device which has been
connected to the exchanger will act as a slave unit.

SCADA

Switch: Net A
Switch: Net B

Figure 10.2-3 Ethernet communication structure

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

10-3
Date: 20131-03-01

10 Communications

10.2.3 IEC60870-5-103 Communication


The IEC specification IEC60870-5-103: Telecontrol Equipment and Systems, Part 5: Transmission
Protocols Section 103 defines the use of standards IEC60870-5-1 to IEC60870-5-5 to perform
communication with protective device. The standard configuration of IEC60870-5-103 protocol is
using a twisted pair EIA RS-485 connection over distances up to 500m. It also supports an
Ethernet for communication between devices. The relay operates as a slave unit in the system to
respond commands received from master station.
To use the rear port with IEC60870-5-103 communication, the relevant settings of the protective
device must be configured by using keypad and LCD user interface. In the submenu Comm
Settings, set the parameters [Protocol_RS485A], [Protocol_RS485B] and [Baud_RS485]. To use
the Ethernet port with IEC60870-5-103 communication, the IP address and the submask of each
Ethernet port shall be set in the same submenu. Please refer to the corresponding section in
Chapter Settings for further details.

10.3 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Serial Port


The IEC60870-5-103 interface over serial port (RS-485) is a master/slave interface and the
protective device is the slave device.
The protective device conforms to compatibility level 3.
The following IEC60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface:

Initialization (reset)

Time synchronization

Event record extraction

General interrogation

General commands

Disturbance records

10.3.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer


Two EIA RS-485 standardized ports are available for IEC60870-5-103 in this protective device.
The transmission speed is optional: 4800 bit/s, 9600 bit/s, 19200 bit/s or 38400 bit/s.
The link layer strictly abides by the rules defined in the IEC60870-5-103.

10.3.2 Initialization
When the protective device is powered up, or the communication parameters are changed, a reset
command is required to initialize the communications. The protective device will respond to either
of the two reset commands (Reset CU or Reset FCB), the difference is that the Reset CU will clear
any unsent messages in the transmit buffer.
The protective device will respond to the reset command with an identification message ASDU 5,
10-4

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 20131-03-01

10 Communications

the COT (Cause Of Transmission) of this response will be either Reset CU or Reset FCB
depending on the nature of the reset command.

10.3.1 Time Synchronization


The time and date of protective device can be set by time synchronization feature of the
IEC60870-5-103 protocol. The transmission delay as specified in IEC60870-5-103 will be
corrected in the protective device. If the time synchronization message is sent as a send/confirm
message, then the protective device will respond with a confirmation. Whether the
time-synchronization message is sent as a send confirmation or a broadcast (send/no reply)
message, a time synchronization class 1 event will be generated/produced.
If the protective device clock is synchronized using the IRIG-B input, the protection device will not
be able to set the time using the IEC60870-5-103 interface. For attempt to set the time via the
interface, the protective device will create an event with the date and time taken from the IRIG-B
synchronized internal clock.

10.3.2 Spontaneous Events


Events are categorized by the following information:

Type identification (TYP)

Function type (FUN)

Information number (INF)

Messages sent to substation automation system are grouped according to IEC60870-5-103


protocol. Operation elements are sent by ASDU2 (time-tagged message with relative time), and
status of binary signal and alarm element are sent by ASDU1 (time-tagged message). The cause
of transmission (COT) of these responses is 1.
The complete list of all events produced by the protective device can be printed by choosing the
submenu IEC103 Info in the menu Print.

10.3.3 General Interrogation


The GI can be used to read the status of the relay, the function numbers, and information numbers
that will be returned during the GI cycle. The GI cycle strictly abides by the rules defined in the
IEC60870-5-103.
Refer the IEC60870-5-103 standard can get the enough details about general interrogation.

10.3.4 General Service


The general functions can be used to read the setting and protection measurement of the device,
and modify the setting. Two supported type identifications are ASDU 21 and ASDU 10. For more
details about generic functions, please see the IEC60870-5-103 standard.
Generic service group numbers supported by the relay can be printed by the submenu IEC103
Info in the menu Print.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

10-5
Date: 20131-03-01

10 Communications

10.3.5 Disturbance Records


This protective device can store up to 64 disturbance records in its memory. Pickup of fault
detector or operation of relay will be stored as disturbance recorders in the protective device.
The disturbance records are stored in uncompressed format and can be extracted using the
standard mechanisms described in IEC60870-5-103.
All channel numbers (ACC) of disturbance data can be gained by printing, implementing submenu
IEC103 Info in the menu Print.

10.4 Messages Description for IEC61850 Protocol


10.4.1 Overview
The IEC 61850 standard is the result of years of work by electric utilities and vendors of electronic
device to produce standardized communications systems. IEC 61850 is a series of standards
describing client/server and peer-to-peer communications, substation design and configuration,
testing, environmental and project standards. The complete set includes:

IEC 61850-1: Introduction and overview

IEC 61850-2: Glossary

IEC 61850-3: General requirements

IEC 61850-4: System and project management

IEC 61850-5: Communications and requirements for functions and device models

IEC 61850-6: Configuration description language for communication in electrical substations


related to IEDs

IEC 61850-7-1: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder device - Principles
and models

IEC 61850-7-2: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder device - Abstract
communication service interface (ACSI)

IEC 61850-7-3: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder device Common
data classes

IEC 61850-7-4: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder device Compatible
logical node classes and data classes

IEC 61850-8-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) Mappings to MMS (ISO
9506-1 and ISO 9506-2) and to ISO/IEC 8802-3

IEC 61850-9-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) Sampled values over
serial unidirectional multidrop point to point link

IEC 61850-9-2: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) Sampled values over

10-6

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 20131-03-01

10 Communications

ISO/IEC 8802-3

IEC 61850-10: Conformance testing

These documents can be obtained from the IEC (http://www.iec.ch). It is strongly recommended
that all those involved with any IEC 61850 implementation obtain this document set.

10.4.2 Communication Profiles


The PCS-900 series relay supports IEC 61850 server services over TCP/IP communication
protocol stacks. The TCP/IP profile requires the PCS-900 series to have an IP address to establish
communications. These addresses are located in the menu SettingsDevice SetupComm
Settings.
1.

MMS protocol

IEC 61850 specifies the use of the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) at the upper
(application) layer for transfer of real-time data. This protocol has been in existence for a number
of years and provides a set of services suitable for the transfer of data within a substation LAN
environment. IEC 61850-7-2 abstract services and objects are mapped to actual MMS protocol
services in IEC61850-8-1.
2.

Client/server

This is a connection-oriented type of communication. The connection is initiated by the client, and
communication activity is controlled by the client. IEC61850 clients are often substation computers
running HMI programs or SOE logging software. Servers are usually substation equipment such
as protection relays, meters, RTUs, transformer, tap changers, or bay controllers.
3.

Peer-to-peer

This is a non-connection-oriented, high speed type of communication usually between substation


equipment, such as protection relays, intelligent terminal. GOOSE is the method of peer-to-peer
communication.
4.

Substation configuration language (SCL)

A substation configuration language is a number of files used to describe IED and communication
system realized according to IEC 61850-5 and IEC 61850-7. Each configured device has an IED
Capability Description (ICD) file and a Configured IED Description (CID) file. The substation single
line information is stored in a System Specification Description (SSD) file. The entire substation
configuration is stored in a Substation Configuration Description (SCD) file. The SCD file is the
combination of the individual ICD files and the SSD file, moreover, add communication system
parameters (MMS, GOOSE, control block, SV control block) and the connection relationship of
GOOSE and SV to SCD file.

10.4.3 MMS Communication Network Deployment


To enhance the stability and reliability of SAS, dual-MMS Ethernet is widely adopted. This section
is applied to introduce the details of dual-MMS Ethernet technology. Generally, single-MMS

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

10-7
Date: 20131-03-01

10 Communications

Ethernet is recommended to be adopted in the SAS of 110kV and lower voltage levels, while
dual-MMS Ethernet is recommended to be adopted in the SAS of voltage levels above 110kV.
Client-server mode is adopted: clients (SCADA, control center and etc.) communicate with the
IEDs via MMS communication network, and the IEDs operate as the servers. IEDs are connected
to clients passively, and they can interact with the clients according to the configuration and the
issued command of the clients.
Three modes for dual-MMS Ethernet (abbreviated as dual-net) are provided as below.
NOTE!
Hereinafter, the normal operation status of net means the physical link and TCP link are
both ok. The abnormal operation status of net means physical link or TCP link is broken.
1)

Mode 1: Dual-net full duplex mode sharing the same RCB instance

Client

Client

Net B

Net A

Net B

Net A

Report Instance 1

Report Instance 1

RptEna = true

RptEna = true

Report Control Block

Report Control Block

IED (Server)

IED (Server)

Normal operation status

Abnormal operation status


TCP Link
MMS Link

Figure 10.4-1 Dual-net full duplex mode sharing the RCB block instance

Net A and Net B share the same report control block (abbreviated as RCB) enabled by the client.
IED sends undifferentiated date through dual-net to the clients. If one net is physically
disconnected, the flag of RCB instance (i.e.: RptEna in above figure) is still true. Only when
both Net A and Net B are disconnected, the flag of the RCB instance will automatically change to
false.
In normal operation status of mode 1, IED provides the same MMS service for Net A and Net B. If
one net is physically disconnected (i.e.: Abnormal operation status in above figure), the working
mode will switch to single-net mode seamlessly and immediately. Network communication
supervision is unnecessary here, and Buffered Report Control Block (abbreviated as BRCB) need
10-8

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 20131-03-01

10 Communications

not to be used. On the other net, date alternation works normally. Therefore, MMS service can
interact normally without interruption. This mode ensures no data loss during one net is in
abnormal operation status.
In mode 1, one report will be transmitted twice via dual nets for the same report instance, so the
client needs to distinguish whether two reports are same according to corresponding EntryIDs.
2)

Mode 2: Dual-net hot-standby mode sharing the same RCB instance

Client

Client

Net B

Net A

Net B

Net A

Report Instance 1

Report Instance 1

RptEna = true

RptEna = true

Report Control Block

Report Control Block

IED (Server)

IED (Server)

Normal operation status

Abnormal operation status


TCP Link
Main MMS Link
Standby MMS Link

Figure 10.4-2 Dual-net hot-standby mode sharing the same RCB instance

In mode 2, the MMS service is provided on main MMS link, no MMS service interacts on the
standby MMS link. The definitions of two links are as follows:

Main MMS Link: Physically connected, TCP level connected, MMS report service available.

Standby MMS Link: Physically connected, TCP level connected, MMS report service not
available.

If the main net fails to operate (i.e.: Abnormal operation status in the above figure), the IED will
set RptEna to false. Meanwhile the client will detect the failure by heartbeat message or
keep-alive, it will automatically enable the RCB instance by setting RptEna back to true
through standby MMS link. By the buffer function of BRCB, the IED can provide uninterrupted
MMS service on the standby net. However, the differences of BRCB standards among different
manufacturers may cause data loss. Moreover, if duration of net switch is too long, the data loss is
positively as the capacity of BRCBs buffer function is limited.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

10-9
Date: 20131-03-01

10 Communications

NOTE!
In mode 1 and mode 2, Net A IED host address and Net B IED host address must be the
same. E.g.: if the subnet mask is 255.255.0.0, network prefix of Net A is 198.120.0.0,
network prefix of Net B is 198.121.0.0, Net A IP address of the IED is 198.120.1.2, and
then Net B IP address of the IED must be configured as 198.121.1.2, i.e.: Net A IED host
address =1x256+2=258, Net B IED host address =1x256+2=258, Net A IED host address
equals to Net B IED host address.
3)

Mode 3: Dual-net full duplex mode with 2 independent RCB instances

Client

Client

Net B

Net A

Net B

Net A

Report Instance 1

Report Instance 2

Report Instance 1

Report Instance 2

RptEna = true

RptEna = true

RptEna = false

RptEna = true

Report Control Block

Report Control Block

IED (Server)

IED (Server)

TCP Link
MMS Link

Figure 10.4-3 Dual-net full duplex mode with 2 independent RCB instances

In mode 3, IED provides 2 report instances for each RCB, Net A and Net B work independently
from each other, failures of one net will not affect the other net at all.
In this mode, 2 report instances are required for each client. Therefore, the IED may be unable to
provide enough report instances if there are too many clients.
Net A and Net B send the same report separately when they operates normally, To ensure no
repeated data is saved into database, massive calculation is required for the client.
Moreover, accurate clock synchronization of the IED is required to distinguish whether 2 reports
are the same report according to the timestamps. Clock synchronization error of the IED may lead
to report loss/redundancy.
As a conclusion:
In mode 2, its difficult to realize seamless switchover between dual nets;

10-10

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 20131-03-01

10 Communications

In mode 3, the IED may be unable to provide enough report instances if too many clients are
applied on site.
For the consideration of client treatment and IED implementation, mode 1 (Dual-net full duplex
mode sharing the same report instance) is recommended for MMS communication network
deployment.

10.4.4 Server Data Organization


IEC61850 defines an object-oriented approach to data and services. An IEC61850 physical device
can contain one or more logical device(s) (for proxy). Each logical device can contain many logical
nodes. Each logical node can contain many data objects. Each data object is composed of data
attributes and data attribute components. Services are available at each level for performing
various functions, such as reading, writing, control commands, and reporting.
Each IED represents one IEC61850 physical device. The physical device contains one or more
logical device(s), and the logical device contains many logical nodes. The logical node LPHD
contains information about the IED physical device. The logical node LLN0 contains common
information about the IED logical device.
10.4.4.1 Digital Status Values
The GGIO logical node is available in the PCS-900 series relays to provide access to digital status
points (including general I/O inputs and warnings) and associated timestamps and quality flags.
The data content must be configured before the data can be used. GGIO provides digital status
points for access by clients. It is intended that clients use GGIO in order to access digital status
values from the PCS-900 series relays. Clients can utilize the IEC61850 buffered reporting
features available from GGIO in order to build sequence of events (SOE) logs and HMI display
screens. Buffered reporting should generally be used for SOE logs since the buffering capability
reduces the chances of missing data state changes. All needed status data objects are transmitted
to HMI clients via buffered reporting, and the corresponding buffered reporting control block
(BRCB) is defined in LLN0.
10.4.4.2 Analog Values
Most of analog measured values are available through the MMXU logical nodes, and metering
values in MMTR, the else in MMXN, MSQI and so on. Each MMXU logical node provides data
from a IED current/voltage source. There is one MMXU available for each configurable source.
MMXU1 provides data from CT/VT source 1(usually for protection purpose), and MMXU2 provides
data from CT/VT source 2 (usually for monitor and display purpose). All these analog data objects
are transmitted to HMI clients via unbuffered reporting periodically, and the corresponding
unbuffered reporting control block (URCB) is defined in LLN0. MMXUx logical nodes provide the
following data for each source:

MMXU.MX.Hz: frequency

MMXU.MX.PPV.phsAB: phase AB voltage magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.PPV.phsBC: phase BC voltage magnitude and angle

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

10-11
Date: 20131-03-01

10 Communications

MMXU.MX.PPV.phsCA: Phase CA voltage magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.PhV.phsA: phase AG voltage magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.PhV.phsB: phase BG voltage magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.PhV.phsC: phase CG voltage magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.A.phsA: phase A current magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.A.phsB: phase B current magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.A.phsC: phase C current magnitude and angle

10.4.4.3 Protection Logical Nodes


The following list describes the protection elements for PCS-921 series relays. The specified relay
will contain a subset of protection elements from this list.

PPDP: Pole discrepancy

PTOC: Phase overcurrent, earth fault overcurrent

PSCH: Protection scheme

RBRF:Breaker failure

RREC: Automatic reclosing

RSYN: Synchronism-check

The protection elements listed above contain start (pickup) and operate flags, instead of any
element has its own start (pickup) flag separately, all the elements share a common start (pickup)
flags PTRC.ST.Str.general. The operate flag for PTOC1 is PTOC1.ST.Op.general. For
PCS-921 series relays protection elements, these flags take their values from related module for
the corresponding element. Similar to digital status values, the protection trip information is
reported via BRCB, and BRCB also locates in LLN0.
10.4.4.4 LLN0 and Other Logical Nodes
Logical node LLN0 is essential for an IEC61850 based IED. This LN shall be used to address
common issues for Logical Devices. Most of the public services, the common settings, control
values and some device oriented data objects are available here. The public services may be
BRCB, URCB and GSE control blocks and similar global defines for the whole device; the
common settings include all the setting items of communication settings. System settings and
some of the protection setting items, which can be configured to two or more protection elements
(logical nodes). In LLN0, the item Loc is a device control object, this Do item indicates the local
operation for complete logical device, when it is true, all the remote control commands to the IED
will be blocked and those commands make effective until the item Loc is changed to false. In
PCS-900 series relays, besides the logical nodes we describe above, there are some other logical
nodes below in the IEDs:

MMXU: This LN shall be used to acquire values from CTs and VTs and calculate measurands

10-12

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 20131-03-01

10 Communications

such as r.m.s. values for current and voltage or power flows out of the acquired voltage and
current samples. These values are normally used for operational purposes such as power
flow supervision and management, screen displays, state estimation, etc. The requested
accuracy for these functions has to be provided.

LPHD: Physical device information, the logical node to model common issues for physical
device.
PTRC: Protection trip conditioning, it shall be used to connect the operate outputs of one or
more protection functions to a common trip to be transmitted to XCBR. In addition or
alternatively, any combination of operate outputs of protection functions may be combined to
a new operate of PTRC.
RDRE: Disturbance recorder function. It triggers fault wave recorder and its output refers to
the IEEE Standard Format for Transient Data Exchange (COMTRADE) for Power System
(IEC 60255-24). All enabled channels are included in the recording and independent of the
trigger mode.

10.4.5 Server Features and Configuration


10.4.5.1 Buffered/unbuffered Reporting
IEC61850 buffered and unbuffered reporting control blocks are located in LLN0, they can be
configured to transmit information of protection trip information (in the Protection logical nodes),
binary status values (in GGIO) and analog measured/calculated values (in MMXU, MMTR and
MSQI). The reporting control blocks can be configured in CID files, and then be sent to the IED via
an IEC61850 client. The following items can be configured.

TrgOps: Trigger options.

The following bits are supported by the PCS-900 series relays:


Bit 1: Data-change
Bit 4: Integrity
Bit 5: General interrogation

OptFlds: Option Fields.

The following bits are supported by the PCS-900 series relays:


Bit 1: Sequence-number
Bit 2: Report-time-stamp
Bit 3: Reason-for-inclusion
Bit 4: Data-set-name
Bit 5: Data-reference
Bit 6: Buffer-overflow (for buffered reports only)

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

10-13
Date: 20131-03-01

10 Communications

Bit 7: EntryID (for buffered reports only)


Bit 8: Conf-revision
Bit 9: Segmentation

IntgPd: Integrity period.

BufTm: Buffer time.

10.4.5.2 File Transfer


MMS file services are supported to allow transfer of oscillography, event record or other files from
a PCS-900 series relay.
10.4.5.3 Timestamps
The Universal Time Coordinated(UTC for short) timestamp associated with all IEC61850 data
items represents the lastest change time of either the value or quality flags of the data item.
10.4.5.4 Logical Node Name Prefixes
IEC61850 specifies that each logical node can have a name with a total length of 11 characters.
The name is composed of:

A five or six-character name prefix.

A four-character standard name (for example, MMXU, GGIO, PIOC, etc.).

A one or two-character instantiation index.

Complete names are of the form xxxxxxPTOC1, where the xxxxxx character string is configurable.
Details regarding the logical node naming rules are given in IEC61850 parts 6 and 7-2. It is
recommended that a consistent naming convention be used for an entire substation project.
10.4.5.5 GOOSE Services
IEC61850 specifies the type of broadcast data transfer services: Generic Object Oriented
Substation Events (GOOSE). IEC61850 GOOSE services provide virtual LAN (VLAN) support,
Ethernet priority tagging, and Ether-type Application ID configuration. The support for VLANs and
priority tagging allows for the optimization of Ethernet network traffic. GOOSE messages can be
given a higher priority than standard Ethernet traffic, and they can be separated onto specific
VLANs. Devices that transmit GOOSE messages also function as servers. Each GOOSE
publisher contains a GOOSE control block to configure and control the transmission.
The GOOSE transmission (including subscribing and publishing) is controlled by GOOSE link
settings in device.
The PCS-900 series relays support IEC61850 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE)
communication. All GOOSE messages contain IEC61850 data collected into a dataset. It is this
dataset that is transferred using GOOSE message services. The GOOSE related dataset is
configured in the CID file and it is recommended that the fixed GOOSE be used for
implementations that require GOOSE data transfer between PCS-900 series relays.

10-14

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 20131-03-01

10 Communications

IEC61850 GOOSE messaging contains a number of configurable parameters, all of which must be
correct to achieve the successful transfer of data. It is critical that the configured datasets at the
transmission and reception devices are an exact match in terms of data structure, and that the
GOOSE addresses and name strings match exactly.

10.4.6 ACSI Conformance


10.4.6.1 ACSI Basic Conformance Statement
Services

Client

Server

PCS-900 Series

B11

Server side (of Two-party Application-Association)

C1

B12

Client side (of Two-party Application-Association)

C1

Client-Server Roles

SCSMS Supported
B21

SCSM: IEC 61850-8-1 used

B22

SCSM: IEC 61850-9-1 used

B23

SCSM: IEC 61850-9-2 used

B24

SCSM: other

Generic Substation Event Model (GSE)


B31

Publisher side

B32

Subscriber side

Transmission Of Sampled Value Model (SVC)


B41

Publisher side

B42

Subscriber side

Where:
C1: Shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-DEVICE model has been declared
O: Optional
M: Mandatory
Y:

Supported by PCS-900 series relays

N: Currently not supported by PCS-900 series relays


10.4.6.2 ACSI Models Conformance Statement
Services

Client

Server

PCS-900 Series

M1

Logical device

C2

C2

M2

Logical node

C3

C3

M3

Data

C4

C4

M4

Data set

C5

C5

M5

Substitution

M6

Setting group control

M7

Buffered report control

M7-1

sequence-number

Reporting

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

10-15
Date: 20131-03-01

10 Communications
M7-2

report-time-stamp

M7-3

reason-for-inclusion

M7-4

data-set-name

M7-5

data-reference

M7-6

buffer-overflow

M7-7

entryID

M7-8

BufTm

M7-9

IntgPd

M7-10

GI

M8

Unbuffered report control

M8-1

sequence-number

M8-2

report-time-stamp

M8-3

reason-for-inclusion

M8-4

data-set-name

M8-5

data-reference

M8-6

BufTm

M8-7

IntgPd

M9

Log control

M9-1

IntgPd

M10

Log

M12

GOOSE

M13

GSSE

M14

Multicast SVC

M15

Unicast SVC

M16

Time

M17

File transfer

Logging

GSE

Where:
C2: Shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-NODE model has been declared
C3: Shall be "M" if support for DATA model has been declared
C4: Shall be "M" if support for DATA-SET, Substitution, Report, Log Control, or Time models has
been declared
C5: Shall be "M" if support for Report, GSE, or SMV models has been declared
M: Mandatory
Y:

Supported by PCS-900 series relays

N: Currently not supported by PCS-900 series relays

10-16

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 20131-03-01

10 Communications

10.4.6.3 ACSI Services Fonformance Statement


Services

Server/Publisher

PCS-921

Server
S1

ServerDirectory

Application association
S2

Associate

S3

Abort

S4

Release

Logical device
S5

LogicalDeviceDirectory

Logical node
S6

LogicalNodeDirectory

S7

GetAllDataValues

S8

GetDataValues

S9

SetDataValues

S10

GetDataDirectory

S11

GetDataDefinition

S12

GetDataSetValues

S13

SetDataSetValues

S14

CreateDataSet

S15

DeleteDataSet

S16

GetDataSetDirectory

Data

Data set

Substitution
S17

SetDataValues

Setting group control


S18

SelectActiveSG

M/O

S19

SelectEditSG

M/O

S20

SetSGValuess

M/O

S21

ConfirmEditSGValues

M/O

S22

GetSGValues

M/O

S23

GetSGCBValues

M/O

Reporting
Buffered report control block
S24

Report

S24-1

data-change

S24-2

qchg-change

S24-3

data-update

S25

GetBRCBValues

S26

SetBRCBValues

Unbuffered report control block


PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

10-17
Date: 20131-03-01

10 Communications
S27

Report

S27-1

data-change

S27-2

qchg-change

S27-3

data-update

S28

GetURCBValues

S29

SetURCBValues

Logging
Log control block
S30

GetLCBValues

S31

SetLCBValues

S32

QueryLogByTime

S33

QueryLogAfter

S34

GetLogStatusValues

Log

Generic substation event model (GSE)


GOOSE control block
S35

SendGOOSEMessage

S36

GetGoReference

S37

GetGOOSEElementNumber

S38

GetGoCBValues

S39

SetGoCBValuess

S51

Select

S52

SelectWithValue

S53

Cancel

S54

Operate

S55

Command-Termination

S56

TimeActivated-Operate

Control

File transfer
S57

GetFile

M/O

S58

SetFile

S59

DeleteFile

S60

GetFileAttributeValues

M/O

Time
SNTP

10.4.7 Logical Nodes


The PCS-921 series relays support IEC61850 logical nodes as indicated in the following table.
Note that the actual instantiation of each logical node is determined by the product order code.
Nodes

PCS-921 Series

L: System Logical Nodes


LPHD: Physical device information

YES

10-18

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 20131-03-01

10 Communications
LLN0: Logical node zero

YES

P: Logical Nodes For Protection Functions


PDIF: Differential

PDIR: Direction comparison

PDIS: Distance

PDOP: Directional overpower

PDUP: Directional underpower

PFRC: Rate of change of frequency

PHAR: Harmonic restraint

PHIZ: Ground detector

PIOC: Instantaneous overcurrent

PMRI: Motor restart inhibition

PMSS: Motor starting time supervision

POPF: Over power factor

PPAM: Phase angle measuring

PSCH: Protection scheme

YES

PSDE: Sensitive directional earth fault

PTEF: Transient earth fault

PTOC: Time overcurrent

YES

PTOF: Overfrequency

PTOV: Overvoltage

PTRC: Protection trip conditioning

YES

PTTR: Thermal overload

PTUC: Undercurrent

PPDP: Pole discrepancy

YES

PTUV: Undervoltage

PUPF: Underpower factor

PTUF: Underfrequency

PVOC: Voltage controlled time overcurrent

PVPH: Volts per Hz

PZSU: Zero speed or underspeed

R: Logical Nodes For Protection Related Functions


RDRE: Disturbance recorder function

YES

RADR: Disturbance recorder channel analogue

RBDR: Disturbance recorder channel binary

RDRS: Disturbance record handling

RBRF: Breaker failure

YES

RDIR: Directional element


RFLO: Fault locator

YES

RPSB: Power swing detection/blocking


RREC: Autoreclosing

YES

RSYN: Synchronism-check or synchronizing

YES

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

10-19
Date: 20131-03-01

10 Communications
C: Logical Nodes For Control
CALH: Alarm handling

CCGR: Cooling group control

CILO: Interlocking

CPOW: Point-on-wave switching

CSWI: Switch controller

G: Logical Nodes For Generic References


GAPC: Generic automatic process control

YES

GGIO: Generic process I/O

YES

GSAL: Generic security application


I: Logical Nodes For Interfacing And Archiving
IARC: Archiving

IHMI: Human machine interface

ITCI: Telecontrol interface

ITMI: Telemonitoring interface

A: Logical Nodes For Automatic Control


ANCR: Neutral current regulator

ARCO: Reactive power control

ATCC: Automatic tap changer controller

AVCO: Voltage control

M: Logical Nodes For Metering And Measurement


MDIF: Differential measurements

MHAI: Harmonics or interharmonics

MHAN: Non phase related harmonics or interharmonic

MMTR: Metering

MMXN: Non phase related measurement

MMXU: Measurement

YES

MSQI: Sequence and imbalance

MSTA: Metering statistics

S: Logical Nodes For Sensors And Monitoring


SARC: Monitoring and diagnostics for arcs

SIMG: Insulation medium supervision (gas)

SIML: Insulation medium supervision (liquid)

SPDC: Monitoring and diagnostics for partial discharges

X: Logical Nodes For Switchgear


TCTR: Current transformer

YES

TVTR: Voltage transformer

YES

Y: Logical Nodes For Power Transformers


YEFN: Earth fault neutralizer (Peterson coil)

YLTC: Tap changer

YPSH: Power shunt

YPTR: Power transformer

10-20

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 20131-03-01

10 Communications
Z: Logical Nodes For Further Power System Equipment
ZAXN: Auxiliary network

ZBAT: Battery

ZBSH: Bushing

ZCAB: Power cable

ZCAP: Capacitor bank

ZCON: Converter

ZGEN: Generator

ZGIL: Gas insulated line

ZLIN: Power overhead line

ZMOT: Motor

ZREA: Reactor

ZRRC: Rotating reactive component

ZSAR: Surge arrestor

ZTCF: Thyristor controlled frequency converter

ZTRC: Thyristor controlled reactive component

10.5 DNP3.0 Interface


10.5.1 Overview
The descriptions given here are intended to accompany this relay. The DNP3.0 protocol is not
described here; please refer to the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the DNP3.0
implementation. This manual only specifies which objects, variations and qualifiers are supported
in this relay, and also specifies what data is available from this relay via DNP3.0.
The relay operates as a DNP3.0 slave and supports subset level 2 of the protocol, plus some of
the features from level 3. The DNP3.0 communication uses the Ethernet ports at the rear side of
this relay. The Ethernet ports are optional: electrical or optical.

10.5.2 Link Layer Functions


Please see the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the linker layer functions.

10.5.3 Transport Functions


Please see the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the transport functions.

10.5.4 Application Layer Functions


10.5.4.1 Time Synchronization
1.

Time delay measurement


Master/Slave

Function Code

Object

Variation

Qualifier

Master

0x17

Slave

0x81

0x34

0x02

0x07

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

10-21
Date: 20131-03-01

10 Communications

2.

3.

Read time of device


Master/Slave

Function Code

Object

Variation

Qualifier

Master

0x01

0x34

0x00, 0x01

0x07-

Slave

0x81

0x32

0x01

0x07

Write time of device


Master/Slave

Function Code

Object

Variation

Qualifier

Master

0x02

0x32

0x01

0x00, 0x01, 0x07, 0x08

Slave

0x81

10.5.4.2 Supported Writing Functions


1.

Write time of device


See Section 10.5.4.1 for the details.

2.

Reset the CU (Reset IIN bit7)


Master/Slave

Function Code

Object

Variation

Qualifier

Master

0x02

0x50

0x01

0x00, 0x01

Slave

0x81

10.5.4.3 Supported Reading Functions


1.

2.

Supported qualifiers
Master Qualifier

0x00

0x01

0x06

0x07

0x08

Slave Qualifier

0x00

0x01

0x01

0x07

0x08

Supported objects and variations

Object 1, Binary inputs


Master Variation

0x00

0x01

0x02

Slave Variation

0x02

0x01

0x02

The protection operation signals, alarm signals and binary input state change signals are
transported respectively according to the variation sequence in above table.

Object 2, SOE
Master Variation

0x00

0x01

0x02

0x03

Slave Variation

0x02

0x01

0x02

0x03

If the master qualifier is 0x07, the slave responsive qualifier is 0x27; and if the master
qualifier is 0x01, 0x06 or 0x08, the slave responsive qualifier is 0x28.

Object 30, Analog inputs


Master Variation

0x00

0x01

0x02

0x03

0x04

Slave Variation

0x01

0x01

0x02

0x03

0x04

10-22

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 20131-03-01

10 Communications

The measurement values are transported firstly, and then the measurement values are
transported.

Object 40, Analog outputs


Master Variation

0x00

0x01

0x02

Slave Variation

0x01

0x01

0x02

The protection settings are transported in this object.

Object 50, Time Synchronization


See Section 10.5.4.1 for the details.

3.

Class 0 data request


The master adopts the Object 60 for the Class 0 data request and the variation is 0x01.
The slave responds with the above mentioned Object 1, Object 30 and Object 40 (see
Supported objects and variations in Section 10.5.4.3).

4.

Class 1 data request


The master adopts the Object 60 for the Class 1 data request and the variation is 0x02.
The slave responds with the above mentioned Object 2 (see Supported objects and
variations in Section 10.5.4.3).

5.

Multiple object request


The master adopts the Object 60 for the multiple object request and the variation is 0x01,
0x02, 0x03 and 0x04.
The slave responds with the above mentioned Object 1, Object 2, Object 30 and Object
40 (see Supported objects and variations in Section 10.5.4.3).

10.5.4.4 Remote Control Functions


The function code 0x03 and 0x04 are supported in this relay. The function code 0x03 is for the
remote control with selection; and the function code 0x04 is for the remote control with execution.
The selection operation must be executed before the execution operation, and the single point
control object can be supported to this relay.
Master Qualifier

0x17

0x27

0x18

0x28

Slave Qualifier

0x17

0x27

0x18

0x28

The Object 12 is for the remote control functions.


Master Variation

0x01

Slave Variation

0x01

Control Code

0x01: closing
0x10: tripping

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

10-23
Date: 20131-03-01

10 Communications

10-24

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 20131-03-01

11 Installation

11 Installation
Table of Contents
11.1 Overview ....................................................................................................... 11-3
11.2 Safety Information ........................................................................................ 11-3
11.3 Checking Shipment ...................................................................................... 11-4
11.4 Material and Tools Required........................................................................ 11-4
11.5 Device Location and Ambient Conditions.................................................. 11-4
11.6 Mechanical Installation ................................................................................ 11-5
11.7 Electrical Installation and Wiring ................................................................ 11-6
11.7.1 Grounding Guidelines .......................................................................................................11-6
11.7.2 Cubicle Grounding ............................................................................................................11-6
11.7.3 Ground Connection on the Device ...................................................................................11-7
11.7.4 Grounding Strips and their Installation..............................................................................11-8
11.7.5 Guidelines for Wiring.........................................................................................................11-8
11.7.6 Wiring for Electrical Cables...............................................................................................11-9

List of Figures
Figure 11.6-1 Dimensions of PCS-921..................................................................................... 11-5
Figure 11.6-2 panel cut-out of PCS-921................................................................................... 11-5
Figure 11.6-3 Demonstration of plugging a board into its corresponding slot .................. 11-6
Figure 11.7-1 Cubicle grounding system ................................................................................ 11-7
Figure 11.7-2 Ground terminal of this relay ............................................................................ 11-8
Figure 11.7-3 Ground strip and termination ........................................................................... 11-8
Figure 11.7-4 Glancing demo about the wiring for electrical cables ................................... 11-9

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

11-a
Date: 2011-07-26

11 Installation

11-b

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2011-07-26

11 Installation

11.1 Overview
The device must be shipped, stored and installed with the greatest care.
Choose the place of installation such that the communication interface and the controls on the
front of the device are easily accessible.
Air must circulate freely around the equipment. Observe all the requirements regarding place of
installation and ambient conditions given in this instruction manual.
Take care that the external wiring is properly brought into the equipment and terminated correctly
and pay special attention to grounding. Strictly observe the corresponding guidelines contained in
this section.

11.2 Safety Information


Modules and units may only be replaced by correspondingly trained personnel. Always observe
the basic precautions to avoid damage due to electrostatic discharge when handling the
equipment.
In certain cases, the settings have to be configured according to the demands of the engineering
configuration after replacement. It is therefore assumed that the personnel who replace modules
and units are familiar with the use of the operator program on the service PC.
DANGER! Only insert or withdraw the PWR module while the power supply is switched
off. To this end, disconnect the power supply cable that connects with the PWR module.
WARNING! Only insert or withdraw other modules while the power supply is switched off.

WARNING! The modules may only be inserted in the slots designated in Section 6.2.
Components can be damaged or destroyed by inserting boards in the wrong slots.
DANGER! Improper handling of the equipment can cause damage or an incorrect
response of the equipment itself or the primary plant.
WARNING! Industry packs and ribbon cables may only be replaced or the positions of
jumpers be changed on a workbench appropriately designed for working on electronic
equipment. The modules, bus backplanes are sensitive to electrostatic discharge when
not in the units housing.
The basic precautions to guard against electrostatic discharge are as follows:

Should boards have to be removed from this relay installed in a grounded cubicle in an HV
switchgear installation, please discharge yourself by touching station ground (the cubicle)
beforehand.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

11-3
Date: 2011-07-26

11 Installation

Only hold electronic boards at the edges, taking care not to touch the components.

Only works on boards that have been removed from the cubicle on a workbench designed for
electronic equipment and wear a grounded wristband. Do not wear a grounded wristband,
however, while inserting or withdrawing units.

Always store and ship the electronic boards in their original packing. Place electronic parts in
electrostatic screened packing materials.

11.3 Checking Shipment


Check that the consignment is complete immediately upon receipt. Notify the nearest NR
Company or agent, should departures from the delivery note, the shipping papers or the order be
found.
Visually inspect all the material when unpacking it. When there is evidence of transport damage,
lodge a claim immediately in writing with the last carrier and notify the nearest NR Company or
agent.
If the equipment is not going to be installed immediately, store all the parts in their original packing
in a clean dry place at a moderate temperature. The humidity at a maximum temperature and the
permissible storage temperature range in dry air are listed in Chapter Technical Data.

11.4 Material and Tools Required


The necessary mounting kits will be provided, including screws, pincers and assembly
instructions.
A suitable drill and spanners are required to secure the cubicles to the floor using the plugs
provided (if this relay is mounted in cubicles).

11.5 Device Location and Ambient Conditions


The place of installation should permit easy access especially to front of the device, i.e. to the
human machine interface of the equipment.
There should also be free access at the rear of the equipment for additions and replacement of
electronic boards.
Since every piece of technical equipment can be damaged or destroyed by inadmissible ambient
conditions, such as:
1.

The location should not be exposed to excessive air pollution (dust, aggressive substances).

2.

Severe vibration, extreme changes of temperature, surge voltages of high amplitude and
short rise time, high levels of humidity and strong induced magnetic fields should be avoided
as far as possible.

3.

Air must not be allowed to circulate freely around the equipment.

The equipment can in principle be mounted in any attitude, but it is normally mounted vertically
11-4

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2011-07-26

11 Installation

(visibility of markings).
WARNING! Excessively high temperature can appreciably reduce the operating life of
this relay.

11.6 Mechanical Installation


The device adopts IEC standard chassis and is rack with modular structure. It uses an integral
faceplate and plug terminal block on backboard for external connections. PCS-921 series is IEC
4U high and 19 wide. Figure 11.6-1 shows its dimensions and Figure 11.6-2 shows the panel
cut-out.
482.6
465.0

101.6

177.0

291

Figure 11.6-1 Dimensions of PCS-921

179.0

101.6

465.0

4-6.8

450.0

Figure 11.6-2 panel cut-out of PCS-921

NOTE! It is necessary to leave enough space top and bottom of the cut-out in the cubicle
for heat emission of this relay.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

11-5
Date: 2011-07-26

11 Installation

The safety instructions must be abided by when installing the boards, please see Section 11.2 for
the details.
Following figure shows the installation way of a module being plugged into a corresponding slot.

Figure 11.6-3 Demonstration of plugging a board into its corresponding slot

In the case of equipment supplied in cubicles, place the cubicles on the foundations that have
been prepared. Take care while doing so not to jam or otherwise damage any of the cables that
have already been installed. Secure the cubicles to the foundations.

11.7 Electrical Installation and Wiring


11.7.1 Grounding Guidelines
Switching operations in HV installations generate transient over voltages on control signal cables.
There is also a background of electromagnetic RF fields in electrical installations that can induce
spurious currents in the devices themselves or the leads connected to them.
All these influences can influence the operation of electronic apparatus.
On the other hand, electronic apparatus can transmit interference that can disrupt the operation of
other apparatus.
In order to minimize these influences as far as possible, certain standards have to be observed
with respect to grounding, wiring and screening.

NOTE! All these precautions can only be effective if the station ground is of good quality.

11.7.2 Cubicle Grounding


The cubicle must be designed and fitted out such that the impedance for RF interference of the
ground path from the electronic device to the cubicle ground terminal is as low as possible.
Metal accessories such as side plates, blanking plates etc., must be effectively connected
surface-to-surface to the grounded frame to ensure a low-impedance path to ground for RF
interference. The contact surfaces must not only conduct well, they must also be non-corroding.
NOTE! If the above conditions are not fulfilled, there is a possibility of the cubicle or parts

11-6

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2011-07-26

11 Installation

of it forming a resonant circuit at certain frequencies that would amplify the transmission
of interference by the devices installed and also reduce their immunity to induced
interference.
Movable parts of the cubicle such as doors (front and back) or hinged equipment frames must be
effectively grounded to the frame by three braided copper strips (see Figure 11.7-1).
The metal parts of the cubicle housing and the ground rail are interconnected electrically
conducting and corrosion proof. The contact surfaces shall be as large as possible.
NOTE! For metallic connections please observe the voltage difference of both materials
according to the electrochemical code.
The cubicle ground rail must be effectively connected to the station ground rail by a grounding strip
(braided copper).
Door or hinged
equipment frame

Cubicle ground
rail close to floor

Braided
copper strip
Station
ground
Conducting
connection

Figure 11.7-1 Cubicle grounding system

11.7.3 Ground Connection on the Device


There is a ground terminal on the rear panel, and the ground braided copper strip can be
connected with it. Take care that the grounding strip is always as short as possible. The main thing
is that the device is only grounded at one point. Grounding loops from unit to unit are not allowed.
There are some ground terminals on some connectors of this relay, and the sign is GND. All the
ground terminals are connected in the cabinet of this relay. So, the ground terminal on the rear
panel (see Figure 11.7-2) is the only ground terminal of this device.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

11-7
Date: 2011-07-26

11 Installation

Figure 11.7-2 Ground terminal of this relay

11.7.4 Grounding Strips and their Installation


High frequency currents are produced by interference in the ground connections and because of
skin effect at these frequencies, only the surface region of the grounding strips is of consequence.
The grounding strips must therefore be of (preferably tinned) braided copper and not round copper
conductors, as the cross-section of round copper would have to be too large.
Proper terminations must be fitted to both ends (press/pinch fit and tinned) with a hole for bolting
them firmly to the items to be connected.
The surfaces to which the grounding strips are bolted must be electrically conducting and
non-corroding.
The following figure shows the ground strip and termination.
Press/pinch fit
cable terminal

Braided
copper strip

Terminal bolt
Contact surface

Figure 11.7-3 Ground strip and termination

11.7.5 Guidelines for Wiring


There are several types of cables that are used in the connection of this relay: braided copper
cable, serial communication cable etc. Recommendation of each cable:

Grounding: braided copper cable, 2.5mm2 ~ 6.0mm2

Power supply, binary inputs & outputs: brained copper cable, 1.0mm2 ~ 2.5mm2

AC voltage inputs: brained copper cable, 1.0mm2 ~ 2.5mm2

AC current inputs: brained copper cable, 1.5mm2 ~ 4.0mm2

Serial communication: 4-core shielded braided cable

Ethernet communication: 4-pair screened twisted category 5E cable

11-8

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2011-07-26

11 Installation

11.7.6 Wiring for Electrical Cables


A female connector is used for connecting the wires with it, and then a female connector plugs into
a corresponding male connector that is in the front of one board. See Chapter Hardware for
further details about the pin defines of these connectors.
The following figure shows the glancing demo about the wiring for the electrical cables.

Tighten

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

01

Figure 11.7-4 Glancing demo about the wiring for electrical cables

DANGER! Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this
equipment to be opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will produce a
dangerously high voltage.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

11-9
Date: 2011-07-26

11 Installation

11-10

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2011-07-26

12 Commissioning

12 Commissioning
Table of Contents
12.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 12-1
12.2 Safety Instructions ...................................................................................... 12-1
12.3 Commission Tools ...................................................................................... 12-2
12.4 Setting Familiarization ................................................................................ 12-2
12.5 Product Checks ........................................................................................... 12-3
12.5.1 With the Relay De-energized .......................................................................................... 12-3
12.5.2 With the Relay Energized ................................................................................................ 12-5
12.5.3 Print Fault Report............................................................................................................. 12-7
12.5.4 On-load Checks ............................................................................................................... 12-7

12.6 Final Checks ................................................................................................ 12-8

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

12-a
Date: 2011-07-26

12 Commissioning

12-b

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2011-07-26

12 Commissioning

12.1 Overview
This relay is fully numerical in their design, implementing all protection and non-protection
functions in software. The relay employs a high degree of self-checking and in the unlikely event of
a failure, will give an alarm. As a result of this, the commissioning test does not need to be as
extensive as with non-numeric electronic or electro-mechanical relays.
To commission numerical relays, it is only necessary to verify that the hardware is functioning
correctly and the application-specific software settings have been applied to the relay.
Blank commissioning test and setting records are provided at the end of this manual for
completion as required.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of the
safety and technical data sections and the ratings on the equipments rating label.

12.2 Safety Instructions


WARNING! Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation.
Non-observance of the safety rules can result in severe personal injury or property
damage.
WARNING! Only the qualified personnel shall work on and around this equipment after
becoming thoroughly familiar with all warnings and safety notices of this manual as well
as with the applicable safety regulations.
Particular attention must be drawn to the following:

The earthing screw of the device must be connected solidly to the protective earth conductor
before any other electrical connection is made.

Hazardous voltages can be present on all circuits and components connected to the supply
voltage or to the measuring and test quantities.

Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after disconnection of the supply
voltage (storage capacitors!)

The limit values stated in the Chapter Technical Data must not be exceeded at all, not even
during testing and commissioning.

When testing the device with secondary test equipment, make sure that no other
measurement quantities are connected. Take also into consideration that the trip circuits and
maybe also close commands to the circuit breakers and other primary switches are
disconnected from the device unless expressly stated.
DANGER! Current transformer secondary circuits must have been short-circuited before
the current leads to the device are disconnected.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

12-1
Date: 2011-07-26

12 Commissioning

WARNING! Primary test may only be carried out by qualified personnel, who are familiar
with the commissioning of protection system, the operation of the plant and safety rules
and regulations (switching, earthing, etc.).

12.3 Commission Tools


Minimum equipment required:

Multifunctional dynamic current and voltage injection test set with interval timer.

Multimeter with suitable AC current range and AC/DC voltage ranges of 0~440V and 0~250V
respectively.

Continuity tester (if not included in the multimeter).

Phase angle meter.

Phase rotation meter.


NOTE! Modern test set may contain many of the above features in one unit.

Optional equipment:

An electronic or brushless insulation tester with a DC output not exceeding 500V (for
insulation resistance test when required).

A portable PC, with appropriate software (this enables the rear communications port to be
tested, if this is to be used, and will also save considerable time during commissioning).

EIA RS-485 to EIA RS-232 converter (if EIA RS-485 IEC60870-5-103 port is being tested).

PCS-900 serials dedicated protection tester HELP-2000.

12.4 Setting Familiarization


When commissioning this device for the first time, sufficient time should be allowed to become
familiar with the method by which the settings are applied. A detailed description of the menu
structure of this relay is contained in Chapter Operation Theory and Chapter Settings.
With the front cover in place all keys are accessible. All menu cells can be read. The LED
indicators and alarms can be reset. Protection or configuration settings can be changed, or fault
and event records cleared. However, menu cells will require the appropriate password to be
entered before changes can be made.
Alternatively, if a portable PC is available together with suitable setting software (such as
PCS-9700 SAS software), the menu can be viewed one page at a time to display a full column of
data and text. This PC software also allows settings to be entered more easily, saved to a file on
disk for future reference or printed to produce a setting record. Refer to the PC software user
manual for details. If the software is being used for the first time, allow sufficient time to become
familiar with its operation.
12-2

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2011-07-26

12 Commissioning

12.5 Product Checks


These product checks cover all aspects of the relay which should be checked to ensure that it has
not been physically damaged prior to commissioning, is functioning correctly and all input quantity
measurements are within the stated tolerances.
If the application-specific settings have been applied to the relay prior to commissioning, it is
advisable to make a copy of the settings so as to allow them restoration later. This could be done
by extracting the settings from the relay itself via printer or manually creating a setting record.

12.5.1 With the Relay De-energized


This relay is fully numerical and the hardware is continuously monitored. Commissioning tests can
be kept to a minimum and need only include hardware tests and conjunctive tests. The function
tests are carried out according to users correlative regulations.
The following tests are necessary to ensure the normal operation of the equipment before it is first
put into service.

Hardware tests
These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware
defect. Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by
self-monitoring when the DC power is supplied.

User interfaces test

Binary input circuits and output circuits test

AC input circuits test

Function tests
These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based. Tests of
the protection schemes and fault locator require a dynamic test set.

Measuring elements test

Timers test

Measurement and recording test

Conjunctive tests
The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment and other
external equipment.

On load test.

Phase sequence check and polarity check.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

12-3
Date: 2011-07-26

12 Commissioning

12.5.1.1 Visual Inspection


After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the relay case. If there is any damage, the
internal module might also have been affected, contact the vendor. The following items listed is
necessary.

Protection panel
Carefully examine the protection panel, protection equipment inside and other parts inside to
see that no physical damage has occurred since installation.
The rated information of other auxiliary protections should be checked to ensure it is correct
for the particular installation.

Panel wiring
Check the conducting wire which is used in the panel to assure that their cross section
meeting the requirement.
Carefully examine the wiring to see that they are no connection failure exists.

Label
Check all the isolator binary inputs, terminal blocks, indicators, switches and push buttons to
make sure that their labels meet the requirements of this project.

Device plug-in modules


Check each plug-in module of the equipments on the panel to make sure that they are well
installed into the equipment without any screw loosened.

Earthing cable
Check whether the earthing cable from the panel terminal block is safely screwed to the panel
steel sheet.

Switch, keypad, isolator binary inputs and push button


Check whether all the switches, equipment keypad, isolator binary inputs and push buttons
work normally and smoothly.

12.5.1.2 Insulation Test (if required)


Insulation resistance tests are only necessary during commissioning if it is required for them to be
done and they have not been performed during installation.
Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the isolation with an electronic or brushless insulation
tester at a DC voltage not exceeding 500V, The circuits need to be tested should include:

Voltage transformer circuits

Current transformer circuits

DC power supply

12-4

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2011-07-26

12 Commissioning

Optic-isolated control inputs

Output contacts

Communication ports

The insulation resistance should be greater than 100M at 500V.


Test method:
To unplug all the terminals sockets of this relay, and do the Insulation resistance test for each
circuit above with an electronic or brushless insulation tester.
On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected
to the protection.
12.5.1.3 External Wiring
Check that the external wiring is correct to the relevant relay diagram and scheme diagram.
Ensure as far as practical that phasing/phase rotation appears to be as expected.
Check the wiring against the schematic diagram for the installation to ensure compliance with the
customers normal practice.
12.5.1.4 Auxiliary Power Supply
The relay only can be operated under the auxiliary power supply depending on the relays nominal
power supply rating.
The incoming voltage must be within the operating range specified in Chapter Technical Data,
before energizing the relay, measure the auxiliary supply to ensure it within the operating range.
Other requirements to the auxiliary power supply are specified in Chapter Technical Data. See
this section for further details about the parameters of the power supply.
WARNING! Energize this relay only if the power supply is within the specified operating
ranges in Chapter Technical Data.

12.5.2 With the Relay Energized


The following groups of checks verify that the relay hardware and software is functioning correctly
and should be carried out with the auxiliary supply applied to the relay.
The current and voltage transformer connections must remain isolated from the relay for these
checks. The trip circuit should also remain isolated to prevent accidental operation of the
associated circuit breaker.
12.5.2.1 Front Panel LCD Display
Connect the relay to DC power supply correctly and turn the relay on. Check program version and
forming time displayed in command menu to ensure that are corresponding to what ordered.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

12-5
Date: 2011-07-26

12 Commissioning

12.5.2.2 Date and Time


If the time and date is not being maintained by substation automation system, the date and time
should be set manually.
Set the date and time to the correct local time and date using menu item Clock.
In the event of the auxiliary supply failing, with a battery fitted on CPU board, the time and date will
be maintained. Therefore when the auxiliary supply is restored the time and date will be correct
and not need to set again.
To test this, remove the auxiliary supply from the relay for approximately 30s. After being
re-energized, the time and date should be correct.
12.5.2.3 Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
On power up, the green LED HEALTHY should have illuminated and stayed on indicating that
the relay is healthy.
The relay has latched signal relays which remember the state of the trip, auto-reclose when the
relay was last energized from an auxiliary supply. Therefore these indicators may also illuminate
when the auxiliary supply is applied. If any of these LEDs are on then they should be reset before
proceeding with further testing. If the LED successfully reset, the LED goes out. There is no testing
required for that that LED because it is known to be operational.
It is likely that alarms related to voltage transformer supervision will not reset at this stage.
12.5.2.4 Testing HEALTHY and ALARM LEDs
Apply the rated DC power supply and check that the HEALTHY LED is lighting in green. We
need to emphasize that the HEALTHY LED is always lighting in operation course except that the
equipment find serious errors in it.
Produce one of the abnormal conditions listed in Chapter Supervision, the ALARM LED will
light in yellow. When abnormal condition reset, the ALARM LED extinguishes.
12.5.2.5 Testing AC Current Inputs
This test verified that the accuracy of current measurement is within the acceptable tolerances.
Apply rated current to each current transformer input in turn; checking its magnitude using a
multimeter/test set readout. The corresponding reading can then be checked in the relays menu.
The measurement accuracy of the protection is 2.5% or 0.02In. However, an additional allowance
must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
NOTE! The closing circuit should remain isolated during these checks to prevent
accidental operation of the associated circuit breaker.
12.5.2.6 Testing AC Voltage Inputs
This test verified that the accuracy of voltage measurement is within the acceptable tolerances.

12-6

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2011-07-26

12 Commissioning

Apply rated voltage to each voltage transformer input in turn; checking its magnitude using a
multimeter/test set readout. The corresponding reading can then be checked in the relays menu.
The measurement accuracy of the relay is 2.5% or 0.1V. However an additional allowance must be
made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
NOTE! The closing circuit should remain isolated during these checks to prevent
accidental operation of the associated circuit breaker.
12.5.2.7 Testing Binary Inputs
This test checks that all the binary inputs on the equipment are functioning correctly.
The binary inputs should be energized one at a time, see external connection diagrams for
terminal numbers.
Ensure that the voltage applied on the binary input must be within the operating range.
The status of each binary input can be viewed using relay menu. Sign 1 denotes an energized
input and sign 0 denotes a de-energized input.

12.5.3 Print Fault Report


In order to acquire the details of protection operation, it is convenient to print the fault report of
protection device. The printing work can be easily finished when operator presses the print button
on panel of protection device to energize binary input [BI_Print] or operate control menu. What
should be noticed is that only the latest fault report can be printed if operator presses the print
button. A complete fault report includes the content shown as follows.
1) Trip event report
2) Binary input when protection devices start
3) Self-check and the transition of binary input in the process of devices start
4) Fault wave forms compatible with COMTRADE
5) The setting value when the protection device trips

12.5.4 On-load Checks


The objectives of the on-load checks are:

Confirm the external wiring to the current and voltage inputs is correct.

Measure the magnitude of on-load current and voltage (if applicable).

Check the polarity of each current transformer.

However, these checks can only be carried out if there are no restrictions preventing the
tenderization of the plant being protected.
Remove all test leads, temporary shorting leads, etc. and replace any external wiring that has
been removed to allow testing.
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

12-7
Date: 2011-07-26

12 Commissioning

If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the protection in order to
perform any of the foregoing tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in
accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram. Confirm current and voltage
transformer wiring.

12.6 Final Checks


After the above tests are completed, remove all test or temporary shorting leads, etc. If it has been
necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the protection in order to perform the
wiring verification tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in accordance with
the relevant external connection or scheme diagram.
Ensure that the protection has been restored to service.
If the protection is in a new installation or the circuit breaker has just been maintained, the circuit
breaker maintenance and current counters should be zero. If a test block is installed, remove the
test plug and replace the cover so that the protection is put into service.
Ensure that all event records, fault records, disturbance records and alarms have been cleared
and LEDs has been reset before leaving the protection.

12-8

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2011-07-26

13 Maintenance

13 Maintenance
Table of Contents
13.1 Appearance Check ...................................................................................... 13-3
13.2 Failure Tracing And Repair ......................................................................... 13-3
13.3 Replace Failed Modules ............................................................................. 13-3
13.4 Cleaning ....................................................................................................... 13-5
13.5 Storage ......................................................................................................... 13-5

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

13-a
Date: 2011-07-26

13 Maintenance

13-b

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2011-07-26

13 Maintenance

NR numerical relay PCS-921 is designed to require no special maintenance. All measurement and
signal processing circuit are fully solid state. All input modules are also fully solid state. The output
relays are hermetically sealed.
Since the device is almost completely self-monitored, from the measuring inputs to the output
relays, hardware and software defects are automatically detected and reported. The
self-monitoring ensures the high availability of the device and generally allows for a corrective
rather than preventive maintenance strategy. Therefore, maintenance checks in short intervals are
not required.
Operation of the device is automatically blocked when a hardware failure is detected. If a problem
is detected in the external measuring circuits, the device normally only provides alarm messages.

13.1 Appearance Check


1. The relay case should be clean without any dust stratification. Case cover should be sealed
well. No component has any mechanical damage and distortion, and they should be firmly fixed in
the case. Relay terminals should be in good condition. The keys on the front panel with very good
feeling can be operated flexibly.
2. It is only allowed to plug or withdraw relay board when the supply is reliably switched off.
Never allow the CT secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be opened while the primary
system is live when withdrawing an AC module. Never try to insert or withdraw the relay board
when it is unnecessary.
3. Check weld spots on PCB whether they are well soldered without any rosin joint. All dual
inline components must be well plugged.

13.2 Failure Tracing And Repair


Failures will be detected by automatic supervision or regular testing.
When a failure is detected by supervision, a remote alarm is issued and the failure is indicated on
the front panel with LED indicators and LCD display. It is also recorded in the event record.
Failures detected by supervision are traced by checking the Superv Events screen on the LCD.
When a failure is detected during regular testing, confirm the following:

Test circuit connections are correct

Modules are securely inserted in position

Correct DC power voltage is applied

Correct AC inputs are applied

Test procedures comply with those stated in the manual

13.3 Replace Failed Modules


If the failure is identified to be in the relay module and the user has spare modules, the user can
PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

13-3
Date: 2011-07-26

13 Maintenance

recover the protection by replacing the failed modules.


Repair at the site should be limited to module replacement. Maintenance at the component level is
not recommended.
Check that the replacement module has an identical module name (AI, PWR, CPU, SIG, BI, BO,
etc.) and hardware type-form as the removed module. Furthermore, the CPU module replaced
should have the same software version. In addition, the AI and PWR module replaced should have
the same ratings.
The module name is indicated on the top front of the module. The software version is indicated in
LCD menu Version Info.
CAUTION!
When handling a module, take anti-static measures such as wearing an earthed wrist band
and placing modules on an earthed conductive mat. Otherwise, many of the electronic
components could suffer damage. After replacing the CPU module, check the settings.
1)

Replacing a module

Switch off the DC power supply

Disconnect the trip outputs

Short circuit all AC current inputs and disconnect all AC voltage inputs

Unscrew the module.


WARNING!
Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power
supply. It takes approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.

2)

Replacing the Human Machine Interface Module (front panel)

Open the relay front panel

Unplug the ribbon cable on the front panel by pushing the catch outside.

Detach the HMI module from the relay

Attach the replacement module in the reverse procedure.

3)

Replacing the AI, PWR, CPU, BI or BO module

Unscrew the module connector

Unplug the connector from the target module.

Unscrew the module.

Pull out the module

13-4

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2011-07-26

13 Maintenance

Inset the replacement module in the reverser procedure.

After replacing the CPU module, input the application-specific setting values again.
WARNING!
Units and modules may only be replaced while the supply is switched off and only by
appropriately trained and qualified personnel. Strictly observe the basic precautions to
guard against electrostatic discharge.
WARNING!
When handling a module, take anti-static measures such as wearing an earthed wrist band
and placing modules on an earthed conductive mat. Otherwise, many of the electronic
components could suffer damage. After replacing the CPU module, check the settings.
DANGER!
After replacing modules, be sure to check that the same configuration is set as before the
replacement. If this is not the case, there is a danger of the unintended operation of
switchgear taking place or of protections not functioning correctly. Persons may also be
put in danger.

13.4 Cleaning
Before cleaning the relay, ensure that all AC/DC supplies, current transformer connections are
isolated to prevent any chance of an electric shock whilst cleaning. Use a smooth cloth to clean
the front panel. Do not use abrasive material or detergent chemicals.

13.5 Storage
The spare relay or module should be stored in a dry and clean room. Based on IEC standard
60255-1 the storage temperature should be from -40oC to +70oC, but the temperature of from 0oC
to +40oC is recommended for long-term storage.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

13-5
Date: 2011-07-26

13 Maintenance

13-6

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2011-07-26

14 Decommissioning and Disposal

14 Decommissioning and Disposal


Table of Contents
14.1 Decommissioning ....................................................................................... 14-3
14.2 Disposal ....................................................................................................... 14-3

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

14-a
Date: 2011-07-26

14 Decommissioning and Disposal

14-b

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2011-07-26

14 Decommissioning and Disposal

14.1 Decommissioning
1.

Switching off

To switch off the PCS-921, switch off the external miniature circuit breaker of the power supply.
2.

Disconnecting Cables

Disconnect the cables in accordance with the rules and recommendations made by relational
department.
DANGER!
Before disconnecting the power supply cables that connected with the PWR module of the
PCS-921, make sure that the external miniature circuit breaker of the power supply is
switched off.
DANGER!
Before disconnecting the cables that are used to connect analog input module with the
primary CTs and VTs, make sure that the circuit breaker for the primary CTs and VTs is
switched off.
3.

Dismantling

The PCS-921 rack may now be removed from the system cubicle, after which the cubicles may
also be removed.
DANGER!
When the station is in operation, make sure that there is an adequate safety distance to
live parts, especially as dismantling is often performed by unskilled personnel.

14.2 Disposal
In every country there are companies specialized in the proper disposal of electronic waste.
NOTE!
Strictly observe all local and national regulations when disposing of the device.

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

14-3
Date: 2011-07-26

14 Decommissioning and Disposal

14-4

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2011-07-26

15 Manual Version History

15 Manual Version History


In the latest version of the instruction manual, several descriptions on existing features have been
modified.
Manual version and modification history records
Manual Version
Source

Software

New

Version

R1.00

R1.00

Date

Description of change

2011-11-07

Form the original manual.

2011-12-29

Chapter 3, Chapter 7 and Chapter 9 are amended

R1.00
R1.00

R1.01

and
R1.10

Modify remote control function


Two system settings are added
Two settings are added for VT circuit supervision module
Add GOOSE alarm signals
Modify logic of reclosing failure and success
R1.01

R1.02

R2.00

2013-03-01

Add common alarm signal [Alm_Insuf_Memory]


Modify the breaking capacity of binary output contact
Add symbol corresponding relationship about phase
sequence
Add corresponding description about double circuit
breakers application

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

15-1
Date: 2013-03-01

15 Manual Version History

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection

15-2
Date: 2013-03-01